giao an tieng anh 8 ca nam

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (1.1 MB, 295 trang )

(1)Week : 01 Period: 01. Preparing day: 20/08/2011 Teaching day: 22 /08/2011. Revision and do the test A- Objectives: Help Ss to know the ways to learn English 8 well and to consolidate knowledge of English 7. By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to consolidate knowledge of English 7 and know something about English 8. B- Language contents: The simple future tense, the simple past tense, comparatives and superlatives, adverbs, modal verbs. - Anticipated problems: Some Ss forget the old knowledge. C- Work arrangements: Individual, pairs, groups D- Teaching aids: Extra board, work sheet E- Procedure: I. Setting the class: II. Warm up Sing a song: The Alphabel. III. New lesson: T gives the situations and asks Ss to 1. Review English 7. make sentences (one situation in the Eg: I (have) a test tomorrow. future and the other in the past) I (watch) TV last night. Tell me the tense in each sentence ? * Simple future tense Give form quickly ? (+) S + will + V (bare infinitive) The adverbs are often used in each (-) S + won’t + V (bare infinitive) tense ? (?) Will + S + V (bare) ? * Simple past tense (+) S + V(past form) - T gives exercises in the extra board, (-) S + didn't + V Ss work in pairs to do exercises. (?) Did (not) + S + V ? - Call some Ss to give the opinions. Ex1: These sentences are right or 1,2,5- right wrong. Correct wrong sentences. 3. invites -> invite 1. She will be fifteen next Friday. 4. is -> be 2. Will you give Ann a doll ? 3. Nga will invites you. - Ss do ex in individual and then 4. He will not is here tomorrow. compare with their partners. 5. We will eat oranges. - Call some Ss to correct Ex 2: Put the verbs in the simple past tense. 1. What you (buy) yesterday ? 2. You (be) in Hanoi last Sunday. 3. She (not watch) TV last night. 4. Who (talk) to Lan ?.

(2) - T uses real things in the class and asks Ss. Eg: 2 rulers Now compare 2 rulers. 5. She (arrive) home at 6 o'clock yesterday and (give) me some flowers. * Comparatives and superlatives of adj. S1: Hoa's ruler is longer than Mai's one. - T gives out 5 rulers and asks Ss to S2: Mai's ruler is shorter than Hoa's compare. ruler. Consolidate 2 comparisons. Hoa's ruler is the longest ruler. Notice: extra adjs such as: good, bad, many/ much, little. Far. Adj Comparatives Superlatives Short adj Ask Ss to make sentences using comparatives and superlatives with things and people in the class. Retell the modal verbs you learnt. - Retell adverbs of frequency you learnt The position of the adverbs (ordinary verbs, to be) Ask Ss to do exercise in individual Call Ss to correct. adj (er). The + adj (est). Long adj more + adj The most + adj Eg: Binh is taller than Hung Hoa is the most beautiful girl in my class. * Adverbs of frequency always, usually, often, sometimes, rarely, seldom, never These adverbs stand after "be" and before "ordinary verbs" Ex 3: Put the adverbs given in the right places. 1. We talk with our friends at recess (always) 2. She is late for school. (sometimes) 3. What do you do after class ? (often) 4. Is she good at Math ? (always) 5. Does Hoa go to the movies ? (usually) Do the test Read the text and answer the questions below. The Vietnamese students take part in different aftern school activities. Some students play sport. They often play soccer, table tennis or badminton. Sometimes they go swimming in the swimming – pools, some students like listening music and watching movies. And the others lijke reading books in the library. 1. Which sports do some students play? 2. How often do they go swimming? 3. Where do some students read books? 4. Do Vietnamese students enjoy their.

(3) activities? 2. Introduce English 8. Look at your books please. How many units are there in English 8? Can you tell me the differences between the parts in English 7 with the parts in English 8 ? Guess your activities in each part ? For example "getting started" Call some Ss the methods to learn each part well. 1. How many units are there in English There are 16 units 8? The parts: Getting started, listen and 2. What are they? read, speak, listen, read and write, language focus. Objective: help Ss to practice 4 skills and consolidate knowledge of each lesson in language focus. IV- Consolidation: Ss retell the knowledge they have just reviewed T controls V- Homework: - Review English 7 at home. - Prepare books and notebooks carefully (2 notebooks, English 8 and Exercise book) - Prepare : Getting started and Listen and read.. Week : 01 Period: 02. Preparing day: 20/8/2011 Teaching day: 23/8/2011. Unit 1: My friends Lesson 1 - Getting started + Listen and read. A- Objectives: By the of the lesson Ss can introduce and describe people with their activities. By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to introduce their friends, their activities and appearance. They will be able to understand the structures: "What do/does + S + look like ?" and "adj + enough" “ S + (to)be + adj + enough + To-infinitive......” B- Language contents: Favorite activities The structures: "What do/does + S + look like ?" and "adj + enough" The content of the dialogue between Hoa and Lan.

(4) - Anticipated problem: names of activities. C- Work arrangements: Individual works, Pair works, Group works D- Teaching aids: Text book, reference book, Pictures, cassette, tape, extra boards. E- Procedure: I. Setting the class II. Warm up: - T asks Ss to answer some questions: *****1. Getting started. What did you do during the summer vacation ? ? Did you like the activities you did ? ? Did you do them with your friends ? ? How many pictures are there ? Yes, there are four pictures. ? Are they all boys ? ? Are their activities the same or different? T divides the groups and names each group. Each group has a leader and a reporter ) - T gives suggested questions and ask ss Eg: Picture a: to use these questions. There are three boys. They are playing ? How many people are there in each soccer in the play ground. Playing soccer picture ? is their favorite activity. / They like ? Where are they ? playing soccer. ? What are they doing ? ? What time of the day do you think it is? The groups describe the pictures III. New lesson: -Ask ss toLook at the picture in book and answer some questions below individually. Who are they? Where is she from ? Which grade is she in ? - T introduces the situations of the dialogue and some new words: - Translation - Explaination - Example - Mime. ***** 2. Listen and read. Vocab: (to) seem: dường như (to) receive: nhận (to) look like: trông như Next – door neighbor (n): người hàng xóm Smile (n): nụ cêi (v): cười, cười mỉm (to) laugh: cười thành tiếng enough (adj, adv): Đủ, vừa đủ.

(5) As you know Hoa comes from Hue 1. Practice the dialogue with a partner. She is talking to a friend about one of her friends in Hue. Now we are going to listen and read about it. -T asks Ss to listen to the tape and answer the questions (2 times). 1. Why is Hoa happy today? 1.Because she received a letter from her friend – Nien today. 2. What does Hoa talk about her 2.She was Hoa’s next door neighbor in Hue. friend? She is beautiful. She wasn’t old enough to be in Hoa’s class. - T asks Ss to read the dialogue in pairs. - Ask ss to work in pairs: One is Hoa, One is Lan. Call some pairs to read aloud before the class. T helps Ss pronounce correctly. **? Find the question Lan asks when Lan: What does Lan look like? she wants to know Nien's appearance. Hoa: She is beautiful. T < - > WC, H < - > H open pairs, close pairs ? What is the form ? Form: What do/does + S + look like ? S + (to)be + adj (build). ? When would we use it? Use: Dùng để hỏi và trả lời về hình dáng diện mạo của bạn mình hoặc ai đó. **? What does Lan say when she sees What a lovely smile ! Nien's photograph ? What kind of sentence ? This is a compliment The form ? Form: What + (a/an ) + adj + N! **? Who is older, Hoa or Nien ? ? Find the sentence in the dialogue She wasn't old enough to be in my class. helps you answer my question ? Notice the question of "enough ". Who knows the meaning of this sentence ? ? What is the form? Form: S + be (not) + adj enough (for smb) to + inf..... ? When would we use it? Use: Dùng để nói mình hoặc ai đó có đủ, không đủ khả năng làm gì. - T asks Ss to read the dialogue again 2. Answer the following questions. then answer the questions. Key Ask ss to work in pairs. a. She lives in Hue. Ask ss to play a game: Lucky number. b. No, she doesn't. 1. a 3.c 5.b c. The sentence is: "She wasn't old enough to 2. d 4. LN 6. LN be in my class"..

(6) T corrects. d. She's going to visit Hoa at Christmas. IV- Consolidation: - Ask ss to make their own dialogue 1. I / tall and fat based on some words below: 2. Huong / thin - Ask ss tolook at the dialouge again and Nien - > Hai / Van base on the content of that dialogue, keep beautiful - > handsome, tall and thin the main structure to make up their own Christmas - > this summer / Tet holiday dialogue. (Using an extra board) Or ask ss to complete this dialouge. A: Hello B. B. Hi A. You (1)...........very happy. Key: A: I am. I got a letter (2).............my 1. look friend C today. 2. from B: Do I know him ? 3. like A: I don't think so. He was my next door 4. classmate neighbor in Hanoi. 5. old enough B: What does he look (3).................? 6. old A: He's so handsome. Here's his photo. B: What a lovely smile ! Was he your (4)................? A: Oh, no. he wasn't (5) ................to be in my class. B: How (6).................is he ? A: He's 12 (Using an extra board) V- Homework: - Practice the dialogue at home, notice the structure with "look like" and "enough" - Learn by heart new words, models, structures..... - Do Ex 1, 2, 5 (5, 6, 9) in workbook. Ex2: Vocab. + The west (n): phía tây + The sun (n): mặt trời + gold (n): vàng + silver (n): bạc + spider (n): con nhện + carpenter (n): thợ mộc - Prepare: Speak and listen..

(7) Week : 01 Period: 03. Unit 1: My friends Lesson 2 – Speak and listen. Preparing day: 20 /8/ 2011 Teaching day: 27/8/ 2011. A- Objectives: - Help Ss describe the appearance of people and know more adjectives of appearance. - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to describe the appearance of people, practice speaking skill fluently. * Anticipated problems: Ss don't know more adjectives of appearance. - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to revise the structures about introducing myself and greetings. - Develop Ss' listening skill. B- Language contents: Describe the appearance of people; know how to do the greetings C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Teaching aids: Pictures, photos of famous people, cassette tape, an extraboard E- Procedure: I. setting the class: II. Checking the old lesson: Call 2 Ss to read the dialogue (P.10) and answer the questions about the content of the dialogue. Ask ss to ask and answer the appearance of some ss in the class. What does she / he look like? She / He is ......... III. New lesson: - In daily life, we always have to A – Speaking commmunicate with other people, so it Pre – speaking is very improtant to know the adj and structures to describe a person’s appearance. - Ask ss to look at the pictures on P.11 Vocab: and P.12 and give some new words. build (n): hình dáng / thể.

(8) slim = slender (adj): mảnh mai curly (adj): xoăn blod = fair (adj): mà sáng, vàng nhạt - Look at the pictures on pages 11 and bald (adj): hói, hãi ®Çu 12, then choose the corect adjs for each Key: picture. Van: tall, thin / short black hair - Ask ss to work in groups. Mr Lai: short, fat / bald Miss Lien: slim / long blond hair (Using an extra board) Ann: tall, thin / short blond hair Ask sis to repeat the structure to ask Mr Khoi: tall, fat / short black hair and answer the build. ? What does Mary look like? - She is short and thin. She has long blond hair. Her hair is long and blond. Give the structures. Tả hình dáng: S + (to) be + Adj (build). Tả mái tóc: S + have / has + Adj + hair. Her / His / Their hair is + Adj and Ask sis to practise the dialogue adj. T < - > WC, H < - > H, Pairs 1. Read the dialogue. Ask ss to look at the pictures from a to f on P.11 and P.12, then work in pairs. Make similar dialogues with the pictures in book. St A makes the situation. St B guesses.. While – speaking 2. Now take turn to make similar dialogues use the adjectives in the table. a, Van A: This person is tall and thin. He has short black hair. B: Is this Van? A: Yes. (B: Is this Mr. Khoi? A: No. B: Is this Van? A: Yes.) Post – speaking - Ask ss to play a game: Guessing - Build: tall , short, slim, thin, fat, game muscular..... One ss describes one member of the - Hair: straight, curly, long, blond, fair, class, another guesses who is he / she. bold, short, brown, dark/ black...... T expands some more adjs. - Face: round, long, oval, high cheekbone...... (Using an extra board) - Eye: blue, green, brown, sharp..... - Ask Ss to repeat the words given. - Nose: big, small, straight, thin.... - Ss copy and practice pronouncing in - Lips: thin, thick...... focus, individually. - Forehead: high, low... - Ask ss to work in pairs. Make similar.

(9) dialogues with the pictures in book. - T makes a dialogue with a student model. Eg 1: (You can choose the person you like) T: This person is tall and fat. She has long black hair. She has an oval face and straight nose. Who is he / she? - Call some pairs to practice aloud. SS: He / She is........ T explains the request of part Listen then guides Ss to listen by asking some questions. Give some new words. Synonym: comfort (n) Mr Hai: Who is he? Ask ss to give some greetings.. B: Listen Pre-listening Vocab: Pleasure (n): sự dễ chịu Principle (n): thầy hiệu trưởng certainly (adv): chắc chắn rồi good morning. Greetings ? What do you say if you want to meet someone ? + I'd like to meet....... ? What will you say if when you are + Nice to Pleased to + meet (see) you.) introduced to someone ? Good to Glad to + How do you do ? + It's a pleasure to meet you. ? What will you say when you + I would like you to meet....... introduce someone to someone? T revises the structures "Introduce and respond the greetings". T asks Ss to guess the expressions in the box to fill in the dialogues (Ss work in pairs). T introduces: We're going to listen 4 dialogues illustrating different situations. Each dialogue has some missing information. You listen to the tape and complete the dialogues. Ss listen to the tape and complete the gaps.. While-listening. Listen and complete the conversations use the expressions in the box. Key D1: Hoa: Nam I'd like you to meet my.

(10) - Ask ss to compare with their guess cousin, Thu. then share with a partner. Nam: Nice to meet you, thu. T calls on some pairs to practice the dialogues. D2: Khai: Miss Lien. I'd like you to The others and T correct. meet my mother. T asks Ss to copy down. Miss Lien: It's a pleasure to meet you, Mrs Vi. D3: Ba: Bao, come and meet my grandmother. Bao: Hello... D4:.............. Mr Thanh: How do T expands: Post - listening T asks Ss to make the dialogue of their Eg: own using the greetings. Mai: Hello, Hoa. Hoa: Hi, mai Call on some pairs to practice the Mai: Hoa, I'd like you to meet my dialogues. friend Nam. The others and T correct Hoa. Nice to meet you Nam. Nam: Nice to meet you ,too Hoa. IV- Homework: - Write a paragraph describing one of the people you love best by using the adjectives you learnt. - Complete your own dialogues. - Guide Ss to do exercise 3 (6, 7) ; 4 (p.8) in work book. Vocab: - ugly (adj): xấu xí - dress (n): áo dài, váy đầm - a suit (n): đồng phục - Prepare part Read.. Week : 02 Period: 04. Unit 1: My friends Lesson 3 – Read. Preparing day: 28 /8/ 2011 Teaching day: 29 /8/ 2011. A- Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to describe their friend's character by using the adjectives such as sociable, kind, generous, hard working.. B- Language contents: - Describe people's character..

(11) - Vocabulary: reserved, out going, humorous, generous..... C- Work arrangements: - Individual works, pair works, group works D- Teaching aids: - Teacher's book, pictures, an extra board. E- Procedure: I. Setting class: II. Checking the old lesson: Imagine I and you haven’t known each other, we are talking on the phone. 1. What is your name? 2. How old are you? 3. Which class are you in? 4. How many people are there in your family? 5. What do you look like? Or ask Ss to play a game: I have a table. Now look at the information in the table. Try your best to complete the second column quickly. S1: Who usually helps other people ? S2: Nga. Ss work in pairs. Who has completed the table ? You are the winner Find someone who. Name. - Usually helps other people. - Doesn't speak a lot in public. - Always goes to the library. - Often tells funny stories. - Smiles a lot. - Never do homework at home. - have a red face when talking to other people. III. New lesson: - Do you have many friends? Today ưe are going to read a text about Ba's friends and each of them has his own character. However; they are good friends and they have really true friendship. - T introduces new words in the text. Use the table in the game. Antonym: Situation Translation - Ask Ss to read and copy in to their. Pre-reading: New words. - sociable (adj): hòa nhã - out going (adj): hòa nhã - generous (adj): rộng lượng - reserved (adj): kín đáo, dè dặt - sense of humor (n): có óc hài hước - humorous (adj): - character (n): tính cách, tính nết - volunteer (ad): tin nguyện - orphanage (n): trại trẻ mồ côi.

(12) books. - Ask ss to close the books, then guess these sentences are T or F. 1. Ba always spends most of his time with Bao, Khai and Song . 2. Bao is the most reserved in public. 3. Khai and Song are sociable, kind and generous. 4. Song plays soccer very much. 5. Ba is not as outgoing as Bao but enjoys teling jokes. (Using an extra board) - Ask ss to open the books, read the text for the first time and correct Ex T or F above. - Ask ss to read the text for second time and do Ex 1. - Ask ss to do it individually, then compare with partner and give the result. - Ask ss to guess the meaning from the context. - Ask ss to do it individually, then compare with a partner and give the result.. - Ask ss to read the text for the third time and do Ex 2 (a - e). - Ask ss to work in pairs: Ask and answer the questions. - Ask ss to play a game: Lucky Number 1.a 6. b 2. LN 7. LN 3. c 8. LN 4. LN 9. e 5. d - T divides the class into small groups and discuss the question f. - Ss talk about their friends using the adjectives of character. - T gives more adjectives: friendly, smart, honest, pleasant, confident, ambitious.. Statements Prediction 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.. Result. While reading 1. Choose the best answer and write. a. A b. C c. B d. D Matching A B 1. extremely (adv) a.địa phương 2. hardworking b. hết sức, vô (adj) cùng 3. local (n) c. nói chuyện 4. tell jokes cười d. chăm chỉ 2. Now answer the questions. a. He feels lucky enough to have a lot of friends. b. Bao is the most sociable. c. Khai likes reading. d. A bad thing about Ba's jokes is that sometimes his jokes annoy his friends. e. Bao spends his free time doing volunteer work at a local orphanage. Post – reading We have the different characters. I........ Lan........ Loan......... Huong............ we have the same characters. We are.

(13) The leader of each group reports the always friendly and kind to each other. answer before the class. V- Homework: - Learn by heart: vocab - Do this exercise. How would you describe the person in each of the description. a. She finds it difficult to meet people and talk to strangers. b. He is always here in time. c. He doesn't do anything until he is asked to do. (a. shy b. punctual c. lazy) - Guide Ss to do ex 1 (p.5), ex 2 (P5,6), ex 3 (p 6,7), ex 7 (11,12) in Workbook Vocab: - friendly (adj): thân thiện - honest (adj): thật thà - pleasant (adj): dễ chịu, thoải mái - shy (adj): xấu hổ - optimistic (adj): lạc quan - pessimistic (adj): bi quan - confident (adj): tự tin - Prepare: Write. Week : 02 Period: 05. Unit 1: My friends Lesson 4 - Write. Preparing day: 28/8/2011 Teaching day: 30/8/ 2011. A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to revise the structures describing appearance and character of a person. Ss write a passage describing a person. Develop writing skill. B- Language contents: - The present simple tense. - The adjectives of appearance and character. C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works. D- Teaching aids: Pictures of some ss, an extra board, teacher's book. E- Procedure: I. Setting class: II. Checking the old lesson: - Ask ss to answer the questions: 1. How many people are there in your family? 2. Can you tell me your father’s character, your mother’s character and your sister or brother’s character? 3. How many close friends do you have?.

(14) 4. Can you tell me their characters? III. New lesson: - Ask ss to put adjectives into 2 correct columns: Character adjs and build adjs: tall, thin, sociable, humorous, fat, short, helpful, slim, slender, reserved, kind, generous, shy, ugly, handsome, outgoing, pretty, honest, friendly, good – Looking. - Ask ss to do it individual, compare with a partner and give the result. - Ask ss play a game and find name of members in the family. (Using an extra board) - Ask ss to look at the information about Tam and explain it. - Ask ss to read the paragraph aloud and give the main idea about structures of the paragraph. - Call a student to read the information about Tam aloud. - Ask ss to look at part 2 and answer the questions in pairs. - Ask ss to work in groups to make a prompt as similsr as Tam’s.. - Call some Ss to read their information. - Ask Ss to write the paragraph about their partner with the information in the form. Ss write individually. - T goes round the class and helps Ss. - Ask Ss to share their writing and correct mistakes. - Ss exchange their writing and correct mistakes. - Call some Ss to read their writing aloud. - Ss read their writing. The others listen and find mistakes. T corrects common mistakes.. Pre – writing Character adjs Build adjs. - Grandmother: 1. Read the information about Tam. Tam is described about name, age, address, family, appearance, characters and friends. 2. Fill in a similar form for your partner. Use the following questions as prompts. Name: Appearance: Characters: Address: Family: Friends: While – writing 3. Now write a paragraph about your partner. Her name is Nguyen Thanh Huyen and she is 13 years old now. She lives in a house with her mother, father and her younger brother. She’s tall and thin and she has long black hair. She is kind, generous and helpful. Her friends are Hai and Lan.. Post – writing My aunt’s name are Mrs Hoa. She is thirty year old. She live in a flat in Ha Noi with her husband, her son and her daughter. She is slim and beautiful with long black hairs. She are gentle, sociable, generous and helpful. Her friends is Mrs. Mai, Mrs. Houng and.

(15) - T gives a letter with mistakes (each sentence has one mistake) - Ask ss to read and correct them - Ask ss to do it individually, then compare with a partner and give the result. (Using an extra board). Mrs. Lan. Key: 1. are - > is 2. year - > years 3. live - > lives 4. hairs - > hair 5. are - > is 6. is - > are. V- Homework: - Learn by heart: vocab, new structures of character and appearance. - T guides ss to do ex 4 (P8), ex 7 (P 11,12) in workbook. - Write a paragraph about character and appearance of a person you like best. - Prepare: Language focus. Week : 02 Preparing day: 28/8 /2011 Period: 06 Teaching day: 01/9/2011 Unit 1: My friends Lesson 5 - Language focus A- Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to revise the present simple tense, the past simple tense, the adjectives of appearance and character and use the structure "(not) adj + enough + to-inf". B- Language contents: - The present simple tense. - The past simple tense. - The adjectives of appearance and character and use the structure " not )adj + enough + to-inf". C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Teaching aids: Pictures, an extra board, exercise book, teacher's book. E- Procedure: I. Setting class: II. Checking the old lesson: - Call ss to go to the board and reteel smth about characters and apearance of s.obased on: 1. What is her / his name?/ 2. How old is she / he? 3. What does she / he look like?/ 4. What is she / he like? 5. Do you love him / her very much? - Call another student and answer the questions. 1. What is your name?/ 2. How old are you? 3. Where do you live / Where are you living? 4. How do you go to scholl?/ 5. What did you do last night? III. New lesson: Give some new words New words: Hello, I am Lan. What am I doing? - (to) introduce: giới thiệu - (to) rise: mọc - (to) set: lặn.

(16) We have 2 passages. Read them and put the verbs in the right forms. - Share with your friends. - Correct mistakes. T corrects mistakes and gives the answers. - Call 2 Ss to read the passages aloud. Revise the present simple tense and simple past tense. Ask Ss to give forms and uses. Ask ss to do Ex 1: - Ask ss to use the simple tenses to put the correct form. - Ask ss to do it individually, compare with a partner and give the result.. Guides Ss to do ex 2; - Ask ss to use the simple tenses to put the correct form. - Ask ss to do it individually, compare with a partner and give the result. Ask ss to do Ex 3: Ask ss to look at the picture and answer the questions individually, then compare with a partner. Ask ss to name for each person in the picture. Ask ss to work in groups to describe each person.. T explains the other use of the present tense. T gives a situation to introduce the structure "(not) adj + enough + to-inf" Ask Ss to give examples. T introduces the situation of the dialogues and guides Ss to do exercise using the structure with "enough".. - East (n): phía Đông - West (n): phía Tây - Sun (n): mặt trời - Earth (n): Trái đất - Moon (n): mặt trăng - Mars (n): sao hỏa - Mercury (n): sao thủy - Planet (n): hành tinh 1. Complete the dialogue. Use the correct form of the verbs in brackets. a. (1) lives (2) sent (3) was (4) is b. (1) are (2) came (3) showed (4) introduced Note: The adverbs of time: yesterday, last year is the simple past tense. 2. Complete the dialogue. Key: 1. rises, sets 2. goes 3. moves 4. Is 5. Is 6. Is 3. Look and describe. Key a. There are four people in the picture. b. There is a tall, heavy set man. There is a tall, thin woman with short hair. There is a boy sitting on the ground, holding his head, and there is a short man standing across the street. c. The man standing next to the taxi is wearing a yellow shirt and black trousers, the woman is carrying a shoulder bag, and is wearing a green skirt and red blouse. The boy sitting on the ground and holding hiss head is wearing blue shorts and a white shirt, and the man across the street is wearing blue trousers and a pink shirt. 4. Complete the dialogues. Use (not) adj + enough. Form: S + be + (not) adj + enough + to-inf Answer: b. not old enough c. strong enough d. good enough 1.Xét 2 câu chung chủ ngữ. Eg1. Lan is very clever. She can make a.

(17) Call Ss to read the dialogue and T corrects. Guide ss to combine two sentences using “ enough”. shirt. - Lan is clever enough to make a shirt. Eg2. They aren’t very old. They can’t go to school alone. S + (to)be (not) + adj + enough + to – infinitive. Note: Câu 1 bỏ very, too, so, quite nếu có, enough đặt ngay sau tính từ và thay cho dấu chấm. Câu 2 bỏ chủ ngữ, bỏ trợ động từ (can / can’t / could / couldn’t…..) chọn động từ chính và thêm (to) vào trước. 2. Xét 2 câu khác chủ ngữ Eg1. The ice is quite thick. We can walk on it. - The ice is thick enough for us to walk on it. Eg2. The weather wasn’t very warm. They couldn’t go swimming. S + (to)be (not) + adj enough + for + me / us / you / them / him / her / it + to – infinitive Note: Câu 1 bỏ very, too, so, quite nếu có, enough đặt ngay sau tính từ và thay cho dấu chấm. Câu 2 chủ ngữ được chuyển sang làm tân ngữ và thêm for vào trước, bỏ trợ động từ, chọn động. IV- Consolidation: - Retell the grammars and make their own sentences. V- Homework: - Redo all the exercises in language focus at home. - Guides Ss to do ex 5 (P.9), ex 6 (P.10) in workbook. ** Xét Enough là 1 tính từ. Nếu enough là 1 tính từ thì nó thường đứng trước danh từ và bổ nghĩa cho danh từ. Eg1. I have money. I can buy that house. I have enough money to buy that house. Eg2. Mai doesn’t have many books. She can’t do that kind of exercise.. S+. V + enough + Noun + to – infinitive don’t / doesn’t + V didn’t. - Prepare Unit 2: Getting started + Listen and read. Week : 03 Preparing day: 04/9/2011 Period: 07 Teaching day: 06/9/2011.

(18) Unit 2: Making arrangements Lesson 1 - Getting started + Listen and read.. A- Objectives: By the and of the lesson, Ss will be able to know the structures when we use telephone to speak, Ss know the vocabulary concern to the subject. Revise the invitation "Would you like........?", "Let's + inf" B- Teaching aids: Teacher's book, cassette, tape, picture, reference books. Vocabulary concern to the telephone Structures: Can I speak to..............?, Would you like........? Let's............ C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works. D- Procedures: I. Setting class: II. Warm up: Ask ss to look at the picturres on P 18 *****Getting started and tell them in Vietnamese. a, an answering machine ? How many words have you known in b, a mobile phone E? c, a fax machine Ask ss to look at the pictures and d, a telephone directory practise. e, a public telephone A: What is it? f, an address book B: It’s..... A: Do you have a / an +.....? B: Yes, I do. / No, I don’t. As you know telephone has become more and more popular in our social communication, so it is necessary for English learners to have a good skill of using and understanding the language used in telephone. We can communicate with friends without meeting. Today we are going to listen to the dialogue between Nga and Hoa. III. New lesson: ? Who is Hoa? Who is Nga? *****Listen and read ? What are they talking to each other? Vocab: Ask ss to give some new words: - downstairs (n): Tầng dưới antonym: much - upstairs (n): Tầng trên situation - a bit = a little: 1 ít, 1 chút Check: R and R outside (adv): bên ngoài Ask Ss to look at the books and listen inside (adv): bên trong to the tape, then answer the questions. 1. Where the film Dream City on? 1. It’s at Sao Mai movie theater. 2. What time will they meet? and 2. They’ll meet at 6.30 outside the theater. where? Ask ss to do it individually, then + The way to read telephone numbers. compare with a partner and give the + Structures: call and answer the phone. result. Ask ss to listen to the tape for the third 1. Practice the dialogue with a partner. time. Old structures.

(19) Ask ss to practise the dialogue in pairs (One is Hoa and the other is Nga) Look at the dialogue and find the structures you learnt. Except the way to read telephone number and the structure "Can I speak to smb, please ?" Now read the dialogue in pairs (One is Hoa and the other is Nga) Call some pairs to read the dialogue aloud. Let Ss listen to the tape again and ask them to do ex 2. T and a student do model T asks: Who made the call ? Ss: Nga made the call (or Nga did) Notice: the questions for subject. Call some Ss to read aloud their answers. T gives the right answers base on Ss' answers.. Eg1. Would you like.............? (Invitation) Let's + inf (Suggestions) Eg2. I am going to see the movie Dream City at 6.45 this evening. Form: I am We / You / They are + going to + V (bare) He / She / It is Use: Nói về kế hoach rong tương lai đã có dự định sẵn.. 2. Read the dialogue again decide who did the following things. Ask a partner to check your answer. Answers: a. Nga made the call b. Nga did c. Nga invited Hoa to the movies. d. Nga arranged the meeting place. e. Hoa arranged the time. f. Nga agreed the time. T asks Ss to make up a new dialogue - Ss copy the answers. by changing some details of the original one (Ss work in pairs, change names of characters, telephone numbers, the content of the dialogue) IV- Consolidation: Ask ss to fill in gaps with words provided: invite / Dream City / phone / Sao Mai / Key: meet / 6.30 1.phone This afternoon, Nga made a (1)....to Hoa. 2. invite She wanted to (2).... Hoa to see the 3. Dream City movie. Hoa’s aunt agreed to Nga’s invitation. They are going to see the movie (3).... at (4)... Movie Theater. They’re going to (5).... outside the theater at (6).... (Using an extra board) Ask Ss to work in groups of 3 students and give the result. V- Homework: - Learn by heart the dialogue and copy the dialogue in book. - Make questions for the underline parts..

(20) 1. Nga and Hoa are going to see the movie Dream City. 2. Ba will take the final exam next week. 3. We are going to have a farewell party this weekend. 4. My brother is talking to his friends on the phone. - Guide Ss to do ex 1 (P 13,14), ex 2 (P 14,15) - Prepare Speak.. Week : 03 Period: 08. Preparing day: 04/9/2011 Teaching day: 08/9/2011 Unit 2: Making arrangements Lesson 2 : Speak and Listen. A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use the structures in the situations such as leave the message, make an appointment in the talephone communication exactly. By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know more structures when we use telephone to speak. - The structures concern to telephone communication. - Using the structures: Can I leave a message for.................? Can you take a message....................? Would you like to...............................? etc B- Teaching aids: Teacher's book, cassette, tape, picture, reference books. C- Work arrangements:.

(21) Individual works, pair works, group works D- Procedure: I. Seting class: II. Checking the old lesson: 2 Ss go to the board and make up a dialogue similar to the dialogue between Hoa and Nga. Ask ss to using (to) be going to + V (bare) 1. Hoa/ see a movie 2. They / play soccer this afternoon 3. I / finish my Math homework 4. my mother / go swiming 5. Mrs. Lan / visit her mother tonight. III. New lesson: T introduces the situation of part A – Speaking speak. Pre – speaking Ask ss to look at part 1 on P 20 and answer some questions below: 1. Where is it carried out ? 1. It is carried out a communication on phone 2. What is it about ? (telephone number: 9210.752) 2. It is making an appointment to see a movie. This is the dialogue and the sentences 1. Put the sentences in the correct order. in it are in wrong order. Key: Ask ss to read the dialogue again and 1.b 5.i 9.g put the sentences in the correct order. 2. f 6.c 10.h Now work in pairs, please. 3. j 7.c 11.d Call some pairs to read the answer. 4. a 8.k T gives the correct order. While - speaking Call Ss to read the dialogue again. 2. Complete the dialogue. Now look at the picture, please. Answer This is Ba and this is Bao. Ba is Bao: May I speak to Ba, please ? calling Bao to invite Bao to play This is bao. chess. Look at Ba's sentences and base Bao: I'm fine. Thank you. And you ? on these sentences to find and Bao: Can you play chess tonight ? complete Bao's sentences. Bao: What about tomorrow afternoon ? Work in pairs please. Bao: I'll meet you at the central chess Call some pairs to read their dialogue. club ? T corrects and calls 2 Ss to read the Bao: Is 2.00 o'clock OK? dialogue. Work in pairs please , make up your own dialogues (Invite your friends to Post – speaking do smt) The topic: Call smt pairs to read the dialogues 1.Lan invites Hoa to play badminton on.

(22) aloud.. Sunday afternoon. 2. Mrs. Linh invites Mrs. Thu to go shopping tomorrow morning.. T introduces the listening by asking some questions. What will you say if you are the caller ? What will you say if you are the receiver ? What will you say if the person you want to speak to is out ?. B – Listening Pre - Listening Can I speak to.........?. OK. Now we listen to a dialogue on the phone between a woman and the secretary of the principal at Kingston Junior high school. This woman wants to talk to the principal and fill the missing information in the card. (Note: Fill short information ) Ask ss to guess individually, then compare with a partner and givr the result. Ask ss to listen the tape and fill in the missing information in the card. Ask ss to read that message aloud before the class. Eg: For the principal Ss do ex, share with their friends. Call some Ss to read their information. T corrects and gives out the correct answers. Imagine you are calling to speak to smb but he/ she is out. And you want to leave message for him/ her. Make up a dialogue with your partner. Ss work in pairs. Call some pairs to practice and correct. Yes, of course. Oh, sorry. He / She is out. Can I leave a message for...........? Can you take a message....? Would you like to leave a message ?. - Ss do. ** Listen to the telephone conversation. Fill in the missing information. Key: Date: Monday Time: 9.45 For: The Principal Message: Mrs Mary Nguyen wanted to see you at 9.45 in the morning. Tel: Number 646 837 2 0942. Post - Listening. V- Home work: - Learn by heart Model sentence, structure of invitation conversation. - Guide Ss to do ex 3, 4 (P. 16, 17) workbook - Complete this dialogue. Thanh: Hello, 565 1123 Ba: Hello. Can I (1)............to Thanh, please? I'm ba. Thanh: Hello, Ba (2)...............are you ?.

(23) Ba: Thanh: Ba: Thanh: Ba: Thanh: Ba: Thanh:. I'm fine. I'm going to see a (3) ................at the theater tonight. Would you (4).............to come ? Which play is it ? It's the adventure of the Cricket. You like it, (5)...........you ? Yes, what (6)...........can we meet ? Is 7.45 OK? The play (7).........at 8.00. Let's meet outside the theater, at the cafe corner. That's (8).......see you at 7.45. Thank you, ba. Bye, Thanh. Bye.. - Find mistakes in the following sentences and correct them. 1. Can I speak with Mr Trung, please ? 2. I'd like to do an appointment with the dentist. 3. Would you like to live a message ? 4. He will be available in Monday. Prepare new lesson: Read.. Week : 03 Period: 09 A- Objectives:. Preparing day: 11/9/2011 Teaching day: 12/9/2011 Unit 2: Making arrangements Lesson 3 - Read.

(24) By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know the information about the inventor of the telephone, Alexander Graham Bell. Ss will be able to know the meanings of some words concern to invention. B- Teaching aids: Picture, an extra board, teacher's book, reference book. Vocabulary: emigrate, deaf-mute, conduct, experiment, device, demonstrate, countless, exhibition Ss do ex T or F, and arrange the statements. C- Work arrangements: Individual, pair, group D- Procedure: I. Setting class: II. Checking the old lesson: - A student does ex4 (P.17) - A student does ex "Correct mistakes" last period. Or play a gme: Hangman It’s a useful thing which people can use for speaking to each other without meeting. Key: TELEPHONE III. New lesson: T points at the picture in book and asks Ss some questions. Look at the picture in book, please. Who's this ? What do you know about him ? What did he invent ? When ? T introduces the situation of the text and new words. When we talk about an inventor what words about his man appear in your mind ? Pre - reading Ss speak in Vietnamese. Vocab: - emigrate (v): di cư, xuất cảnh - deaf-mute (n): tật vừa câm vừa điếc - transmit (v): truyền đi - conduct (v): tiến hành - demonstrate (v): chứng minh, biểu diễn - device (n): thiết bị, dụng cụ - assistant (n): người phụ tá, người cộng sự - exhibition (n): cuộc triển lãm commercial (adj): thuộc về buôn bán.

(25) Example Translation Explaination Let Ss read some new words twice.. Ask ss to close the books and do Ex: Choose the best option. 1.What did A. G. B invent? a. telephone b. television 2. When did he invent it? a. 1876 b. 1877 3. Who was his assistant? a. Thomas Watt b. Thomas Watson 4. When was the first telephone in commercial? a. 1876 b. 1877 Askk ss to guess it individually, then compare with a partner and give the result. Ask ss to open the book, read in silent and check.. Ask ss to guess the meaning from the context. Ask ss to do it individually, then compare with a partner and give the result. (Using an extra board) Ask Ss to read the text in silence and do ex 1. Ask ss to work in pairs and give the result.. Call some Ss to read their answers. T gives correct answers.. Sentences 1. 2. 3. 4.. Prediction. Result. While - speaking Key 1–a 2–a 3–b 4–b A 1.experiment (n) 2. speech (n) 3. invention (n) 4. countless (adj) 5. distant (n) (to) come up. B a.lời nói b. sự phát minh c. khoảng cách d. tìm ra, phát hiện ra e. cuộc thí nghiệm f. vô số 1. True or False ? Check (V) the boxes. Correct the false statements. Key a. F (in Edinburgh) b. F (he worked with deaf-mutes at Boston University) c. T d. F (in 1876) e. F (not between the deaf-mutes) f. T 2. Put the events in the correct order. d–e–a–g–c–b–f.

(26) Now read the passage again and put the events in the correct order. Ask ss to work in group and give the result.. Call some pairs to read aloud their answers. T gives correct answers.. Post – reading S1: A. G. B was a famous inventor of telephone. S2: S1 + He went to lve in the United States. eg: A: Hello, Nam. How are you ? Ask ss to read the passage again and play B: Hi, Mai. I'm fine. Thank a game: Chain Game you. A: Do you know where Alexander Graham Bell born ? B: Yes, I do. He was born in - Use the main events in part 2. Work in Scotland. pairs to make a dialogue. V- Homework: - Learn by heart: Vocab - Guide Ss to do ex 5 (18) workbook - Give the correct forms of the words in the bracket. 1. Alexander Graham bell (invention) the telephone in 1876. 2. His long and boring (speech) made me fall asleep. 3. (Travel) all over the world is his dream. 4. A lot of (immigrate) came to USA last year. - Prepare new lesson: Write.. Week : 04 Period: 10. Preparing day: 11/9/2011 Teaching day: 13/9/2011 Unit 2: Making arrangements Lesson 4 - Write. A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write a message based on a passage or a dialogue. Ss will be able to know and understand the words and the structures which are used to write a message. B- Teaching aids: Card, extra board, teacher's book, work book.

(27) The structure of a message C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Procedures: I. Setting class: II. Checking the old lesson: A student goes to the board to retell the main ideas of Alexander Graham Bell's life. III. New lesson: T introduces. Pre – Writing This is a message. Now look at the Vocab: message and tell me the structure of a - delivery service (n): dịch vụ chuyển message. đồ T guides Ss to know the meaning of - furniture delivery (n): chuyển đồ each part in the message. - customer (n): khách hàng T gives the meaning of the new words. - stationary order (n): đơn đặt hàng - (to) be out: v¾ng nhµ - (to) reach at: gÆp qua ®iÖn tho¹i T introduces. 1. Read the message. Then fill in the This is the passage which was written gaps in the passage that follows with based on the above message. Now you the information. complete the passage by filling the Message most suitable word in the blank. Date: Time: T calls some Ss to read the passage. For: The others remark. Message: T gives the correct answers. Taken by: (1) telephoned (2) May 12 (3) speak (4) took (5) name (6) delivery (7) Mr Ha (8) at While -Writing Look at the passage and read. 2. Now read the passage below write Now base on the message above to the telephone message in your write the message for Mrs Van. exercise book. Call 2 Ss to go to the board and write Date: June 16 the message. Time: after midday T gives the correct message. For: Mrs Van Message: Mr Nam called about his stationery order he wanted you to call him at 8 643 082 Taken by: Mr Toan T guides Ss to do part 3. 3. Read the message form on page 23 Call 2 Ss to practice the dialogue in again, then help Lisa write a message.

(28) pairs. Now you help Lisa write a message for Nancy using the information in the dialogue. Call some Ss to read the answers aloud. T gives the correct answers.. for Nancy. Use the information from the dialogue. Date: September 20th Time: afternoon 1.30p.m For: Nancy Message: Tom called about playing tennis this afternoon. He'll come over to pick you up at 1.30 Taken by: Lisa Imagine you are receiver the telephone Post - writing and someone wants to leave the message. You write it and send it to.... - Ask ss to make their own message then compare with a partner and give the result. V- Homework: - Complete the following sentences with the best word. 1. She's out. Can I ...........your message ? 2. Her mother said that you can ...........her after lunch. 3. I am sorry. The line is...........would you like to ...........(busy/ hold on) 4. he wants to meet you...............June 23. - Learn by heart the structure of the message. - Prepare Part Language Focus Week : 04 Period: 11. Preparing day: 11/9/2011 Teaching day: 15/9/ 2011 Unit 2: Making arrangements Lesson 5 - Language focus. A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to revise the main knowledge of Unit 2 use of "be going to + inf" to talk about intentions, use of adverbs of place. Ss will be able to complete their survey and the cards given. B- Teaching aids: Pictures, cards, extra board, teacher's book. - Talk about intentions with "be going to + inf" - Adverbs of place. C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Procedure: I. Seting class: II. Checking the old lesson: Call a student to go to the board and do ex in homework and another student gives the structure of a message. - Ask ss to paly a game: Hang man - The situation: I am going to buy a birthdayu present for Lan’s birthday next week..

(29) - What am I going to buy? Key: I am going to buy a new shirt for her.. III. New lesson: T asks Ss find Nga's sentence in the dialogue What did Nga say when she had a between Nga and Hoa. intention to see a movie. "I'm going to see the movie Dream City" I'll see the movie Dream City. T gives a sentence *Note: "be going to + inf" is used to Now find the difference between 2 express an action will happen in the future. sentences. This action is prepared carefully. T explains. "will" is used to express an action will happen in the future. This action is decided to do at the time of speaking. 1. Work with a partner. Say what the Call a student to read the request of people are going to do. Follow the part 1. example sentences. New word Now you read the situations given then - fishing rod (n): cÇn c©u use "be going to + inf" to write - action movie (n): phim hành động sentences. - invite smb to + inf: mêi ai T gives the meaning of some new Key words. a. They're going fishing. Ask Ss to do exercise. b. She's going to read the new novel. Call some Ss to read aloud their c. She's going to do her homework math. sentences. d. He's going to watch an action movie on T and Ss correct TV tonight. T gives the correct sentences. e. She's going to give him a birthday present. T asks Ss to look at the table. 2.a. Copy the questionaire in you exercise How many columns are there ? book. Add 3 moer actions to the list. Then What are they ? complete th " You" column with check (V) What are you going to do on the and crosses (x) weekend ? Do you have a plan for an actions you Ss answer. are going to do ? Now look at the table. There are some activities given. First you add 3 more activities and then copy the table in your book. Please work in individual. Complete the "You" column with check (V) if you are going to do and (x) if you are not..

(30) Compare your answer with your friends. Please tell me what you are going to do and what you are not going to do. Now work in pairs, please. One asks and the other answers and complete the "Your partner" column. T and a student do model Call some pairs to do. Are you going to............ ....see a movie ? .... play sport ? .... meet your friends ? .... help your parents ? .... do your homework ?. Eg: T: Are you going to see a movie ? S: Yes, I am T: Are you going to play sports ? S: No., I am not. You V X. Your partner X. Look at "Your partner" column and Eg: Hoa is going to...... give a report. Note: the subject. 3. Complete the speech bubbles. Use T gives a picture and calls a student to each adverb in the box once. go to the board and put the flowers in Ba's playing hide and seek with his different places. cousin, Tuan. Tell me where the flowers are. Key This is Ba. Ba is playing hide and seek a. upstairs with his cousin, Tuan. Please help ba b. here find Tuan by choosing the right c. down stairs adverbs in the box to fill in the gap. d. outside Call some pairs to give the answers. c. there T gives the correct answers. d. inside IV- Consolidation: - Use "be going to + inf" to talk about the actions you intend to do tomorrow. - Call Ss to speak - Let Ss play Chain game S1: I am going to play soccer S2: I am going to play soccer and watch TV S3: etc - Let Ss to paly a game: Noughts and crosses buy do see play come go visit have tell V- Homework: - Guide Ss to do ex 5 (P.18), ex 6, 7 (P. 18,19) - Write a passage about what you are going to do next week..

(31) - Prepare Unit 3: At home: Getting started + Listen and read.. Week : 04 Period: 12. Preparing day:18/9/2011 Teaching day: 19/9/2011 Unit 3: At home Leson 1 - Getting started + Listen and read. A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to list the chores. Revise the present simple tense, the future simple tense and use of modal verbs "have to", "ought to". Ss will be able to know the reflexive pronouns and understand the content of the dialogue between Nam and his mother Mrs Vui and list things Nam has to do. B- Teaching aids: Pictures, cassette tape, work book, teacher's book Vocabulary: steamer, sink, sauce pan, frying pan,. Grammar: Revise the Present simple tense The future simple tense Modal verbs: have to, ought to Reflexive pronouns C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Procedure: I. Setting class: II. Checking the old lesson: Look at the picture (T prepared a picture ) and tell me where Nam is (Use the adverbs of place you learnt) Eg: Where is Nam ? He's upstairs. 2Ss work in pairs, ask and answer. III. New lesson: T asks and Ss answer Ss tell what they do at home. What do you often do at home ? Now look at 6 pictures in book please. What is the girl doing ? She's doing chores. Now look at picture a, please. Picture a: What is she doing ? S1: She's washing the dishes. Work in groups, please (5 groups) S2: She's doing the washing up. Ask and answer about the action of the Key girl in each picture. a. washing the dishes/ doing the washing Call some groups to practice. up T corrects. b. making the bed c. cooking.

(32) T asks Do you have to cook at home ? Who has to feed the chickens ? Do you like doing the chores ? Now write a passage about the chores you often do at home by using the pictures as prompts. You can use these phrases (T gives some more chores) Share your passage. Find your partner's mistakes and help him/her correct. Call some Ss to read their passages aloud. T and Ss correct. T introduces the situation of the dialogue between Nam and his mother, Mrs Vui. T introduces new words. d. tidying up e. sweeping the floor f. feeding the chicken Ss answer. Ss write and read aloud. Vocab: - Cupboard (n): chạn, tủ đựng b¸t đĩa - steamer (n): nåi hÊp, nåi ®un h¬i - sink (n): bån röa b¸t - sauce pan (n) c¸i ch¶o - frying pan (n) ch¶o r¸n - rice – cooker (n): nồi cơm điện - stove (n): bếp lò (to) forget: quên (to)have to = must: phải You have talked and written about the (to) ought to = should: nên chores you do at home. Now listen to the dialogue to know the chores Nam has to do. Let Ss listen to the tape and answer 1.Mrs. Vui has to go and visit Gradma after some questions below. 1? Who haas to go and visit Grandma work. 2. Nam has to cook dinner. after work? 3. He has to go to the marlet, buy some fish 2?. who has to cook dinner? 3?. What does he / she have to do for and vegetables. 1. Practice the dialouge. dinner? Ask Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs. Model sentences Call some pairs to read the dialogue + I have to go and visit Grandma after aloud. work. -Ask ss to find the model sentences. Nam: Why are you going to be home + She has to go and visit Grandma after late tonight? Mai: Why is Mrs. Vui going to be work. S + have to / has to + V (bare) home late tonight? Use: Dùng để noisminhf hay ai đó phải làm ? What is the form? gì theo các hiện tượng khách quan. ? When would you use it? + You ought to go to the market..

(33) ? What does Mrs. Vui advise Ba to do + He ought go to the market. before making dinner? Form: S + ought to / should + V (bare) ? What is the form? Use: Dùng để khuyên ai đó nên làm gì. ? when would we use it? + "You'll have to cook dinner yourself" Yourself: Chính bạn: gọi là đại từ phản thân hay đại từ nhấn mạnh. Nó thường đứng ở cuối câu. 2. Read the dialouge again. Now work in pairs and make a list of Nam has to the things that Nam has to do. - cook dinner Call Ss to give the list - go to the market and buy fish and The others correct then T corrects. vegetables. T asks. - call his aunt and asks her to meet his mother at his Grand's house. IV- Consolidation: - ?Ask ss to look at the pictures on P27 again and answer the questions. ? What do you have to do at home? I have to........ ? What should you do to learn E better? I should...... ? What is the difference beween “have to” and “must”? Have to: diễn tả công việc phải làm theo các hiện tượng khách quan. Must: diễn tả công việc mà mình nghĩ la fphair làm theo ý kiến cá nhân, diễn tả sự bắt buộc có tính quy tắc lề luật. ? What is the difference beween “ought to” and “should” Hai từ này dùng giống nhau. V- Homework: - Basing on the dialogue between Nam and Mrs Vui you make up a new dialogue about the chores you have to do at home. - Make 5 sentences with "have to" and "ought to" - Guide Ss to do ex 1 (P.20), ex 2 (P. 20,21) - Prepare part Speak and Listen.. Week : 05 Period: 13. Preparing day:18/9/2011 Teaching day: 20/9/2011 Unit 3: At home Lesson 2 - Speak. A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know some new words showing things at home. They will be able to describe the position of things by using adverbs of places they learnt. B- Teaching aids:.

(34) Pictures, posters, teacher's book, extra board Vocabulary: rug, cushion, coffee table Grammar: Let's + inf, ought to C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Procedure: I. Setting class: II. Checking the old lesson: A student says some chores he/ she does at home. 2 Ss read the dialogue between Nam and Mrs Vui and answer the teacher's questions. III. New lesson: Ask ss to give some new words though Pre – Speaking the pictures. Vocab: lighting fixture (n): dèn chùm calender (n): lịch treo tường bowl (n): cái bát plate (n): cái đĩa knife (n): con dao dish rack (n): chạn để bát đĩa counter (n): bàn quầy rug (n): tấm thảm coffee table (n): bàn uống cà phê 1.Look at the picture. Work with a partner. Talk about the position of each item. Ask Ss to retell the adverbs of place next to preposition of they learnt. place Now look at the picture in book please then tell me names of the things in the picture. Ss work in pairs. Call some pairs to speak.. T introduces the request of part 2. First look at the picture and match the words given in the box with the things in the picture. Ask ss to look at the picture on P29 and read the guiding. Ask ss to guess the meaning of the words below.. Eg: S1: The calendar is on the wall S2: The calendar is above the refrigerator. - The knives are on the wall, under the cupboard and above the sink. - The stove is under the saucepan and next to the sink. - The bowl of fruit is between the disk rack and the rice cooker. While - Speaking 2. Mrs Vui bought new furniture for her living room, but she can not decide where to put it. Work with a partner and arrange the furniture. You must reach an agreement. Matching A B 1.cushion a.ghế sa- lông dài 2. couch b. ghế bành.

(35) (Using an extra board). Call Ss to read the sentences in book first. Note the structures Ss should use to give idea. Now work in group of four. Discuss and arrange the furniture in the most suitable place. Ss work in groups. T controls Call some groups to practice. The others and teacher correct. T gives the prompt.. 3. armchair 4. chair 5. lamp. c. gối d. đèn chụp e. ghế tựa Model structures. Let's + put I think we ought to + put I think we should + put I think the coffee table should be between the couch and the armchairs Let's put the magazines on the shelf above the books. I think we should put the shelves at one of the corners, opposite the couch. Let's put the telephone next to the couch. The TV and stereo should be put on the shelves. I think we ought to put the clock on the wall, above the picture. Post - Speaking. Now draw a picture quickly to describe Mrs Vui's room after your group has arranged the positions of the things. T with some Ss mark some pictures. IV- Homework: - Write a paragraph-describing the positions of things in your room. - Guide Ss to do ex 3 (P 22) , ex 4 (P 22,23) - Prepare part Listen + language focus 3 Week : 05 Preparing day: 18/9/2011 Period: 14 Teaching day: 22/9/2011 Unit 3: At home Lesson 3 – Listen and Language focus 3. A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know the way to cook the special Chinese Fried rice by using the verbs such as fry, put, cut and nouns fried rice, pan, garlic, green pepper. Ss practice listening skill and choose the right pictures after listening. Sss will be able to use the reflexive pronouns easily. B- Teaching aids: Cassette tape, teacher's book, reference Vocabulary: fry, put, cut, fried rice, garlic, green pepper. Listening skill C- Work arrangements: Individual works, Pair works, group works D- Procedure: I. Setting class: II. Checking the old lesson:.

(36) 2 Ss go to the board and describe one of the rooms in their house (the things and the positions of theirs) III. New lesson: Look at the pictures in book and tell me A – Listen what these things are used for. Pre - Listening Ss answer a, rice (n): cơm Can you guess name of the food ? noodles (n): mì tôm, phở T introduces some new words. b, saucepan (n): chảo sốt frying pan (n): chảo rán. Now work in groups and answer the questions. What ingredients do you need to cook the special Chinese Fried rice ? Call some pairs to read aloud the ingredients. Now we are going to listen to a conversation between Mrs Tu and Lan about the necessary ingredients to cook the special Chinese Fried rice. You listen and decide which are the necessary ingredients and utensils to cook this food by choosing the correct pictures in the book. Ss listen to the tape and choose the pictures. Ss listen and choose the pictures Now share your answers. Call some Ss to give the key T gives the correct answers. Who can retell the steps to cook the special Chinese Fried rice ? Can you summary the way to make “ Fried rice”. Call some Ss to speak Ss speak T and other Ss correct. Ask ss to look at Ex 3 on page 35 and guide them to use reflexive pronouns. ? What do we call them?. c,. garlic (n): tỏi onions (n): củ hành garlic (n): củ tỏi green peper (n): ớt xanh. d,. chicken (n): thịt gà peas (n): đỗ xào ham (n): thịt lợn peas (n):. Group 1: Group 2: Group 3: While - Listening Key a. fried rice b. pan c. garlic and green pepper d. ham and peas. Post – Listening We put a liitle oil in the frying pan and wait untill it is hot and then fry the garlic and the green peppers. Then we put the ham and the peas in. Finally we put the rice and a taespoon of salt in, We’ll have delicious food. B. Language focus S R.

(37) I We You They He = Nam She = Lan It + The book. Ask ss to do Ex 3:. Myself Ourselves Yourself / Yourselves Himself Herself Itself. Chúng ta gọi nó là đại từ phản thân hay đại từ nhấn mạnh. Nếu là đại từ phản thân thì nó có thể đóng vai trò làm chủ ngữ hoặc tân ngữ trong câu. Eg1: I cut myself. Eg2: Lan and myself are good friends. Neus nó là đại từ nhấn mạnh thì nó có thể nhấm mạnh cho chủ ngữ hay tân ngữ trong câu. Eg1: I myself do it. Eg2: I buy it myself. b. (1) ourselves c. (2) myself, (3) yourself d. (4) himself, (5) themselves e. (7) yourselves. herself,. (6). IV- Homework: - Practice cooking the Special Chinese Fried Rice at home. - Learn by the ingredients and the way to cook the Special Chinese Fried Rice. - Practice speaking about the way to make salad. - Guide Ss to do ex 7 (P 26) - Prepare part Read..

(38) Week : 05 Period: 15. Preparing day:25/9/2011 Teaching day: 26/9/2011 Unit 3: At home Lesson 4 - Read. A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the content and the way to write a precaution. They will be able to do exercise T or F and answer the questions about the content of the precaution. B- Teaching aids: Pictures, posters, teacher's book Form and language in a precaution Reading skill C- Work arrangements: T=WC, pair, group, individual D- Procedure: I. Setting class: II. Checking the old lesson: T introduces In our family, there are many different subjects. Some of them may be dangerous to children if we don't keep them carefully. Now you work in groups and make a list of dangerous things and discuss what we must do to keep children safe. Ss make a list and discuss T calls some Ss to read names of things. T gives more words showing objects. Ask ss to close their books and do Ex : Matching. Ask ss to do it individually, then compare with a partner and give the result. (Using an extra board). Pre – Reading Vocab: - safety precaution (n): lời cảnh báo an toàn - object (n): vật, đồ vật - chemical (n): hóa chất - drug (n): thuốc - match (n):que diêm - electrical socket (n): ổ cắm điện - scissors (n): cái kéo - bead (n): vật tròn nhỏ Matching A B Paragraph 1 1.Talkabout Paragraph 2 electrical sockets. Paragraph 3 2. Talk about paragraph 4 matches Paragraph 5 3. Talk about all dangerous objects. 4. Talk about.

(39) chemicals and drugs. 5. Talk about the kitchen. Now look at your book and read the precautions with Mrs Quyen and check your predictions after that decide whether the following statements in part 1 true or false. Correct false sentences. Share your answers please. Call some Ss to read their answers. T corrects. While - Reading. 1. Answer. True or False ? Check (V) the boxes. Correct the false sentences. a. F (t is safe to keep medicine in locked cupboard.) b. T c. F (dangerous and place) d. F (can cause a fire) e. T 2. Ask and answer Now read the precautions again and b. Because the kitchen is a dangerous answer the questions in part 2. place. Note: Why- questions (reason) c. Because playing with matches can cause The answer begins with "Because" a fire. Let Ss play the game "Lucky numbers" 1L 2b 3c d. Because children mustn't put anything e. Because the dangerous objects can 4e 5L 6d injure or kill children (If they play with T explains these things) * mustn't -Obligation Post - Reading * Let smb to do smt Close your books and answer the questions: 1? Must we keep the children insafety? and Why? 2? What must we do to save them from the danger? IV- Homework: - Read the precautions carefully at home. - Guide Ss to do ex 5 (P 24,25), ex 6 (P 25) - Fill in the blank with the most suitable word. 1. You have to make........that you will be on time tomorrow. 2. This material is very easy to............fire. 3. All the dangerous objects must be kept out of children's........... 4. It is ............to keep medicine in locked cupboard. Key: 1. Sure 2. Cause 3. Reach 4. Safe - Prepare part Write. Week :. 06. Preparing day: 25/9/2011.

(40) Period: 16. Teaching day: 27/9/2011 Unit 3: At home Lesson 5 - Write. A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to revise nouns showing objects in their houses and the adverbs and prepositions of position. They will be able to practice writing skill describing, correct mistakes and write a passage base on a sample. B- Teaching aids: Pictures, an extra board, teacher's book, reference book Vocabulary: wardrobe, oven, on the right of , beneath. Grammar: the way to write a description. C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Procedure: I. Setting class: II. Checking the old lesson: A student goes to the board and write new words of the lesson last period. A student says something about safety precautions in the home. Ask ss to play a game: Wordssquare (prepositions) F R O M. D A P U. N E P U. I N O N. H E S D. E X I E. B T T R. O O E O.  OPPOSITE, UNDER, TO, NEXT TO  BEHIND, NEAR, IN UP, TO III. New lesson: Now tell me names of the objects in your house, please one by one. Now look at the picture in book. This is Hoa's room. What objects can you see in her room? What do you think about their position ?. Pre - writing. Objects: - a bookshelf - a desk - a chair - a bed - a wardrobe - a clock - a window - a cushion - some books Alright. Read the description of Hoa's 1. Read the description of Hoa's room. room in pairs and underline the words * Note: the position of adverbs of place in of position. a sentence..

(41) Ss read and underline the words. Eg: On the table, there is a book Call a student to read and the other There is a book on the table. points at the picture. On the table is a book 2. Now write a description of this kitchen. Look at the picture in part 2 and read the prompts given. Ss read Vocab This is Hoa's kitchen. - towel rack (n): giá để khăn mặt It's very modern, isn't it ? - beneath (prep): ở phía dưới T explains the meanings of some new - jar (n): cái lọ words. - flour (n): bột mì - vase (n): cái bình hoa While - writing Key Based on the sample paragraph about This is Hoa's kitchen. There is a Hoa's room and the pictures, you now refrigerator in the right corner of the room. write a paragraph to describe the Next to the refrigerator is the stove and kitchen by using the prompts to make oven. On the other side of the oven there is complete sentences. a sink. Next to the sink is a towel rack. The Ss write the paragraphs in individually disk rack is on the counter, to the right of the window and beneath the selves. On the selves and on the counter, beneath the Now share your writing. window, there are jars of sugar, flour and tea. In the middle of the kitchen, there is a T calls some Ss to read their paragraph table and four chairs. The lighting fixture is aloud. above the table, and directly beneath the T writes some typical mistakes on the lighting fixture is a vase of flowers. board and correct with Ss T gives the key. Post - writing Choose a room in your house and 3. Write a description of a room in your describe it. house. Refer to the above paragraphs. T controls and goes around to help Ss 1.in a livingroom Collect some Ss' writing to mark at 2. in a bedroom home. 3. in a bathroom T retells the structures of a description 4. in a diningroom of a room, the prepositions and adverbs of place. IV- Homework: - Learn by heart all the new words and make some sentences with them. - Write a description of a room in your house. - Do ex 1, 2, 3 again..

(42) - Prepare Language focus.. Week : 06 Period: 17. Preparing day:25/9/2011 Teaching day: 29/9/2011 Unit 3: At home. Lesson 6 - Language focus. A- Objectives: Help Ss revise the knowledge they learnt in Unit 3 such as reflexive pronouns, modal verbs, and use of the structure "Clause Why-because ". By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand and finish the exercises with reflexive pronouns, modal verbs, and use of the structure "Clause Why-because . Ss practice to improve the skill of doing the exercise types such as: complete the dialogues, look at the pictures and make sentences. B- Teaching aids: Pictures, work sheet, extra board, work book Reflexive pronouns Modal verbs: have to, must, ought to Why-because C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Procedure:.

(43) I. Setting class: II. Checking the old lesson: S1: read your description of a room in your house. S2: Give some questions to ask your friends about his/ her room. III. New lesson: - Look at the pictures carefully. - Read the verbs in the box - Confirm the activities in the pictures - Ss work in pairs and compare the answers with other pairs.. Vocab: fish tank (n): bể cá (to) be on diet: ăn kiêng 1. Look at the pictures. Complete the dialogue use " must"or " have to"and the verbs in the box. - Call some pairs to read the dialogue (1) must/ have to tidy aloud (2) must/ have to dust - T gives the correct answers (3) must/ have to sweep (4) must/ have to clean - Call 2 Ss to read the dialogue again (5) must/ have to empty (6) must/ have to feed * Must: obligation-personal Have to: obligation- impersonal - Ss answer Retell use of "must" and "have to" 2. Look at the pictures. Use " ought to"to In these activities what activities do give advice to these people. you have to do at home ? "ought to" is used to advice smb to do smt. Before you do ex 2 please answer my "ought to" has the same meaning as questions. "should" When do we use "ought to"? - Ss look at the pictures and read sentences What does it mean ? - Now look at the pictures and give b. You ought to get up early. advice to the people in the pictures by c. You ought to eat more fruit and using "ought to". vegetables. - Look at the picture a. It has been d. You ought to go to the dentist's done for you. +) S + should / ought to + V (bare).... - Now write the sentences in - )S + shouldn’t / oughtn’t to + V (bare)... individual. ? ) Should + S + V (bare).........? - Compare your answers. Ought to – infinitive........? - T gives correct answers. 4. Work with a partner. Ask and answer questions about Hoa, Nam, Ha, Nga and Mrs Vui using " Why-because" a, Hoa / go to school / late this morning She / watch TV late last night. - Look at picture a b, Nam / cook / dinner - Who can ask and answer with His mother / not be at home picture a ? c, Mrs. Vui / go home late - Look at the pictures carefully to She / go to see her mother confirm the cause and the result. d, Ha / fail the test.

(44) - Work in pairs please. - Call some pairs to ask and answer. She / play computer games so much e, Nga / not go to the movie She / clean / sweep the kitchen Key: b. Why does Nam have to cook dinner ? Because his mother wasn’t at home. c. Why did Mrs Vui, Nam's mother go home late ? Because she had to go to see her mother. d. Why did Ha fail her exam ? Because she didn't learn for her exam. She played computer games so much. e.Why didn't Nga go to see the movie ? Because she had to clean and sweep the kitchen.. IV- Consolidation: - T retells the grammar. - Ss make sentences with each structure. - Call some Ss to read their sentences - T and other Ss correct. V- Homework: - Learn by heart the grammars of the lesson. - Guide Ss to do ex 3 (P. 22) - Revise Unit 1 + Unit 2 + Unit 3. Read the paragraph and do these exercises. Nam lives in a big house in the countryside. There are four bedrooms, two bathrooms, a living room and a kitchen in his house. There is a flower garden in front of the house. To the left of the house, there is a lake. To the right of the house, there are tall trees. a, Decide the sentenses are True (T) or False (F): 1. Nam lives in a big house in the countryside. 2. There are four bedrooms and one living room in his house. 3. There are tall trees i front of his house. 4. Thereis a flower garden to the right of his house. 5. To the left of the house, there is a lake. b, Answer the questions about you. 6. Where do you live: in the city or in the countryside? 7. How many rooms are there in your house? What are they?.

(45) Week: 6 Period: 18. Preparing day: 10 / 10 / 2009 Teaching day: 16 / 10 / 2009 Revision from Unit 1 to Unit 3. A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to revise what they learn from Unit 1 to Unit 2 and use the structures to do exercises. B- Language contents: + Grammar: The present simple tense. the past simple tense Enough – To – infinitive (to) be going to Must = have to Ought to + should + New words: from Unit 1 to Unit2. C. Work arrangements. Individual works, pair works, group works D. Materials: Reference books, extra board E. Procedure. I. Setting class II. Warm up III. New lesson Unit 1: My friends Ask ss to find the structures in Unit 1: *****The present simple tense *****The past simple tense *****S + be + adj + enough + to – infinitive ***1. The present simple tense - Diễn tả thói quen, hành động xảy ra thường xuyên, lặp đi lặp nhiều lần ở hiện tại. Eg1. He often (be) very hungry every morning. Eg2. I always (be) happy when I get good marks. Eg3. They sometimes (be) late for school. Eg4. Nam often (go) to school by bike. Eg5. I (watch) TV every night. Eg6. The children (play) football every afternoon..

(46) - Diễn tả 1 chân lý, 1 sự thật hiển nhiên. Eg1. The sun (rise) in the east and (set) in the west. Eg2. The earth (go) round the sun. - Được dùng để nói về thời gian, thời khóa biểu hay 1 lịch trình nào đó. Eg1. The train (leave) for London at 12.30. b.Form (to) be: (am / is / are) Verb: +) S + am / is / are +……….. +) S + V (s, es) +… -) S + am not / isn’t / aren’t +….. -) S + don’t / doesn’t + V (bare) ?) Is / Are + S + …? ? ) Do / Does + S + V (bare)…? Yes, S + am / is / are. Yes, S + do / does. No, S + am not / isn’t / aren’t. No, S + don’t / doesn’t. c. Adverbs Today, now (đối với động từ to be) Every +, once / twice a week / month Always, usually, often, sometimes, never, frequently (thường xuyên), occasionally (thỉnh thoảng), seldom = rarely (hiếm khi) ****2. The past simple tense. (Thì quá khứ đơn) a.Usage. Thì QK diễn tả hđ, sv đã xảy và kết thúc trong quá khứ. +) Xét với động từ (TO BE) Eg1. It (be) hot yesterday. Eg4. He ( not be) late for school yesterday morning Eg2. I (be) in Ha Long Bay last weekend. Eg5. You (be) ill yesterday ? Eg3. They (be) in Ho Chi Minh City in 2007. + Xét với động từ thường. Eg1. I (go) to Ha Noi yesterday. Eg4. He (not get) up early yesterday morning. Eg2. He (watch) TV last night. Eg5. They (live) in Hue last month? Eg3. They (take) me to the zoo. b, Form + ) I / He / She / It + was … + ) S + Ved / Cột 2 bảng động từ bất quy tắc…. We / You / They + were ….. - ) S + wan/t / weren/t ….. - ) S + didn’t + V (bare)… ? ) Was / Were + S …….? ? ) Did + S +Ved +……? c, Adverbs. Yesterday, last + night / week / year…., In + năm tháng đã qua, Khoảng thời gian + ago. *****3. Nối câu dùng Enough A– Xét enough là 1 trạng từ. Nếu enough là 1 trạng từ thì nó luôn đứng sau 1 tính từ hoặc 1 trạng từ khác để bổ nghĩa cho tính từ hoặc trạng từ đó. 1.Xét 2 câu chung chủ ngữ. Eg1. Lan is very clever. She can make a shirt..

(47) - > Lan is clever enough to make a shirt. Eg2. They aren’t very old. They can’t go to school alone. S + (to)be (not) + adj + enough + to – infinitive. Note: Câu 1 bỏ very, too, so, quite nếu có, enough đặt ngay sau tính từ và thay cho dấu chấm. Câu 2 bỏ chủ ngữ, bỏ trợ động từ (can / can’t / could / couldn’t…..) chọn động từ chính và thêm (to) vào trước. 2. Xét 2 câu khác chủ ngữ Eg1. The ice is quite thick. We can walk on it. - > The ice is thick enough for us to walk on it. Eg2. The weather wasn’t very warm. They couldn’t go swimming. S + (to)be (not) + adj enough + for + me / us / you / them / him / her / it + to – infinitive B – Xét Enough là 1 tính từ. Nếu enough là I tính từ thì nó thường đứng trước danh từ và bổ nghĩa cho danh từ. Eg1. I have money. I can buy that house. I have enough money to buy that house. Eg2. Mai doesn’t have many books. She can’t do that kind of exercise.. S+. V + enough + Noun + to – infinitive don’t / doesn’t + V didn’t Unit 2: Making arrangements Ask ss to find the structures in Unit 2. (to) be going to Adverbs of place 1. Thì tương lai với (TO) BE GOING TO. 1.Usage: Dùng để diễn tả hđ, sv sẽ xảy ra theo kế hoạch đã định sẵn, tiên đoán điều gì chắc chắn xảy ra. +)(to) be going to: diễn tả hđ, sv sẽ xảy ra theo kế hoạch đã định sẵn (quyết định trước khi nói) Eg1. A: Are you free tonight? B: No, I (have) a party tonight. Eg2. Nam is interested in law. He (study) law. Eg3. They (visit) Ha Long Bay this summer vacation? Eg4. Hoa (not learn) English this month. + ) (to) be going to: tiên đoán điều gì chắc chắn xảy ra trong tương lai vì có dấu hiệu hay chững cứ ở hiện tại. Eg1. Look at the black clouds. It (rain) Eg2. Nam is driving too fast. He (crash) that old lady. +) S + am / is / are + Ving… -) S + am not / isn’t / aren’t + Ving… ? ) Is / Are + S + Ving….? Note:.

(48) 1) Dùng (to)be going to thường không có trạng từ chỉ thời gian đi kèm nhưng vẫn hiểu là tương lai gần. 2) (to) be going to không dùng với 2 động từ GO, COME khi đó ta phải dùng thì HTTD để diễn tả tương lai. Eg1. Nam (go) out tonight. Eg2 They (not come) to class tomorrow. 3) Thì HTTD có thể dùng để diễn tả điều gì sẽ xảy ra trong tương lai nhưng phải phụ thuôc vào trạng từ chỉ thời gian và tình huống. Eg1. I (use) my cousin’s tonight. 2. Adverbs of places on, in, at, below, under, above, behind, in front of, on the right of, on the left of, next to, beside, opposite, between, among,...... Unit 3: At home Ask ss to find the structures in Unit 3: Must / have to Ought to / should Reflexive pronouns Why – because *****1. Must / have to Eg1. I must do my homework. I have to / Lan has to ......... + ) S + must / have to + V (bare)...... _ ) S + mustn’t / don’t / doesn’t + have to + V (bare) *****2. Ought to / should Eg1. You ought to get up early. should + ) S + ought to / should + V (bare)...... - ) S + oughtn’t to / should’t + V (bare)........ *****3. Reflexive pronouns Chúng ta gọi nó là đại từ phản thân hay đại từ nhấn mạnh. Nếu là đại từ phản thân thì nó có thể đóng vai trò làm chủ ngữ hoặc tân ngữ trong câu. Eg1: I cut myself. Eg2: Lan and myself are good friends. Neus nó là đại từ nhấn mạnh thì nó có thể nhấm mạnh cho chủ ngữ hay tân ngữ trong câu. Eg1: I myself do it. Eg2: I buy it myself. S R.

(49) I We You They He = Nam She = Lan It + The book. Myself Ourselves Yourself / Yourselves Himself Herself Itself. Chúng ta gọi nó là đại từ phản thân hay đại từ nhấn mạnh. Nếu là đại từ phản thân thì nó có thể đóng vai trò làm chủ ngữ hoặc tân ngữ trong câu. Eg1: I cut myself. Eg2: Lan and myself are good friends. Neus nó là đại từ nhấn mạnh thì nó có thể nhấm mạnh cho chủ ngữ hay tân ngữ trong câu. Eg1: I myself do it. Eg2: I buy it myself. 1. I received a letter……… my aunt yesterday. (at, from, in, to) 2. Mary will …… here at Christmas. (is, be, are, been) 3. It’s very difficult …… the exam. (to pass, pass, passing, passed) 4. Do you … any help. (want, have, wish, need) 5. What does she … like? (is, see, look, do) 6. What are you going……at weekend? (do, doing, to do, did) 7. Give me a ring as….. as you come to my city. (when, soon, until, after) 8. Did it….. in the morning? (rained, rain, rains, raining) 9. Alexander G. Bell was born …. the USA. (in, at, on, over) 10. I am lucky…….to study abroad. (that, so, as, enough) 11. Can I speak….. Mary, please? (to, from, with, through) 12. Tom seems…..today. (happily, happiness, unhappily, happy) 13. Would you like…..a drink? (have, has, to have, having) 14. Lan is Mr. Sang’s………. (assist, assistant, assistance, assisting) 15. I’ll tell……..when she’s back. (her, hers, she, herself) 16. I…….to bed after I finished my homework. (go, am go, was going, went) 17. Jim stopped……to have a drink. (working, work, works, to work) 18. Don’t shout until the game…… (finish, finished, finishing, finishes) 19. Let’s meet….. the cinema. (out, outside of, outside in, outside) 20. ….., we won the game. (Lucky, Unlucky, Luckily, Unluckily) 21She is living…….. her aunt. (on, with, at, along) 22. What do you know….. that game? (with, at, about, of) 23. She often…. Dresses herself. (makes, make, is making, making) 24. ……a beautiful day! (How, When, Where, What) 25. ……..is my hobby. (Swim, Swimmer, Swimming, Swims) 26. Let’s ….to the restaurant. (go, going, went, goes) 27. Wait…..the traffic lights are green. (when, after, until, before) 28. See you…..6 pm. (on, about, until, at).

(50) 29. Who…….the telephone? (invent, inventing, invention, invented) 30. Each of us ……..a new bag. (have, having, are having, has) 31.We’ve thought of going there………..(ourselves, myself, by myself, themselves) 32. He used to ……football when he was a kid. (plays, playing, played, play) 33. We’ll organize a party…..27th May. (between, in, on, at) 34. Mai…….the book at home. (left, leave, live, lived) 35. I’ll try my……to improve my French. (better, good, best, well). Week : 7 Period: 19. Preparing day:15/10/2009 Teaching day:19/10/2009 Test 45 minutes. A- Objectives: Help Ss consolidate what they learnt and practice the skill of doing the test. By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to complete their test well and the teacher knows what Ss learn well and what they didn't learn well to teach and revise better. B- Language contents: - Vocabulary - Grammar in 3 units - The skills.

(51) - Some kinds of exercises C- Work arrangements: Individual D- Teaching aids: The questions E- Procedure: 1. Ojectives: Listening: Ss listen to a text about the position of things in house. Reading: Read a text about one friend and know something about his / her personal information. Writing: Write a paragraph about a friend in the class: the build, the characters, ….. Language: Check their pronunciation and choose the best option to complete the sentences which are about daily activities and about build or charaters of people. 2. Ma trận: Chủ đề Nhận biết Thông hiểu Vận dụng Tổng KQ TL KQ TL KQ TL KQ TL I. Listening 5 5 2 2 II. Reading 5 5 3 3 III. Language focus 5 5 10 1 1,5 2,5 IV. Writing 5 5 2,5 2,5 Tổng 5 10 5 5 25 1 3,5 3 2,5 10 3: The content: I. Listen to the tape and tick (v) the correct option (A, B, C, D) to complete the sentences. (2.5pts) 1. Ha’s bedroom is one of the ............... room in the house. A. small B. smaller C. smallest 2. There is a.......on the right of the room. A. bed B. wardrobe C. bookshelf 3. It is a ....with many things on it. A. large bed B. large wardrobe C. large bookshelf 4. The ......is opposite the............. A. bed – bookshelf B. wardrobe – bed C. bookshelf – wardrobe 5. The ......is on the wall, above the bed. A. clock B. picture C. telephone II- Read the following passage and then answer the questions. (3pts) Vichai is my pen pal. He is fourteen years old. He is a student in a small secondary school in Bangkok. He lives in a town house with his family. Both his father and mother are teachers. They teach English in a school in the center of the city..

(52) Last week, I wrote a letter to him. I introduce myself and sent him a photograph of my family. In my letter I said that I love Vietnamese food but I don't like boiled rice for breakfast. Yesterday I received his letter. In the letter he said "I usually have boiled rice for breakfast, and chicken with fried rice or a bowl of noodles for lunch. In the evening I eat the food my mother cooks. Her food is the best in the whole world " . Questions 1. Does Vichai study in a small secondary school in Bangkok ? ......................................................................................................................................... 2. Where do Vichai's parents teach ? .................................................................................................. ...................................... 3. When did you write a letter to Vichai ? ................................................................................................ ....................................... 4. Does Vichai usually have fried rice for lunch ? ................................................................................................. ....................................... 5. What does Vichai think of the food his mother cook ? .................................................................................................. ...................................... III. Choose one word (A, B, C, or D) whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the rest in each group.(2.5pts). 1. A. thank B. that C. their D. the 2. A. may B. face. C. fat D. cake 3. A. love B. home C. come D. some 4. A. spend B. pen C. she D. men 5. A. pens B. books C. chairs D. toys IV- Choose a,b or c to complete the sentences. 1. Is she going to...............you this summer ? a. visit b. visits c. visited 2. You .........to go to the market yourself and buy some food for dinner. a. must b. should c. ought 3. Last year Hoa and Lan............ to the same school. a. go b. going c. went 4. We are........to drive a car. a. old enough not b. not old enough c. not enough old 5. They should .....English pronunciation everyday. a. practise b. to practise c. practising V - Write a paragraph about one of your classmates by answering the questions below. (2.5pts) 1.What is his / her name? 2. How old is he / she? 3. What does he / she look like? 4. What is he / she like? 5. What does he / she usually do in his / her free time? ......................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................................

(53) ......................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................ . ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................ ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................. ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................. ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................ . ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................. ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................. ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................. ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................ . ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................ . ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................. ......................................................................................................................................... .............................................................................. Key and points I (2.5 points).

(54) 1. C 2. A 3. A 4. B 5. C II. (3 points) 1.Yes, he does. 2. His parents teach (English) in a school in the center of the city. 3. I wrote a letter to him last week. Last week, I wrote a letter to him. 4. No, he doesn’t. 5. He thinks her food is the best in the whole world. He thinks of the food his mother cooks is the best in the whole world. III- (1 point) 1. A 2. C 3. B 4. C 5. B IV- (1.5 points) 1.a 2. c 3. c 4. b 5. a V – (2.5pts) 0,25 for each right sentence. Tape: This is Ha’s bed room. It is one of the smallest rooms in the house. There is a bed on the right of the room. It is a large bed with many things on it: two pillows, a blanket and some books. There is a desk and two chairs on the left of the room. There are many books and toys on the table. The shelf is near the desk. To the right of the shelf there is a small window. The wardrobe is opposite the bed and the telephone is on the wall, above the bed. G- Collecting Ss' writing tests and remark the period. H- Homework: - Redo the test at home. - Prepare Unit 4: Getting started + Listen and read. Week : 7 Period: 20. Preparing day:15/10/2009 Teaching day: 21/10/2009 Unit 4: Our past Lesson 1 - Getting started + listen and read A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know more about life of Vietnamese people 100 years ago, know more vocabulary concern the topic of the lesson. They will be able to ask and answer about the content of the dialogue and understand what the fact and opinion are and confirm them exactly. B- Language contents: Talk about past events. Fact and opinion The structures: used to + inf Had to + inf What was.......like ? C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Teaching aids: Picture, cassette tape, teacher's book, reference book. E- Procedure:.

(55) I. Setting class: II.Warm up: Ask ss to play a game: Hang man. It’s a kind of old story which the old people usually tell their nieces or nephews in the evening. III. New lesson: Look at the picture "Vietnam 100 years ago" Can you guess our topic in this lesson ? T introduces the topic. Today we will learn about life in Vietnam 100 years ago. During the lesson, we will know what our great grandparents used to do, how their life was like. Firstly, we work in groups, look at the picture and make a list of the things that do not belong to the past in Vietnam 100 years ago. Who can tell me names of the things you have just found ? T gives names of the things. Continue working in groups, find things weren't in Vietnam 100 years ago you know. - Call some Ss to give words. We've just discussed the things that don't belong to the past in Vietnam 100 years ago. Now discuss and answer the question. What did young children of your age have to do 100 years ago ? We are going to listen to a dialogue between Nga and her grandma about the things that her grandma used to do when she was young. Ask ss to give some new words. Ask ss to listen to the tape and answer some questions below.. FOLKTALE. 1. Getting started - Ss look at the picture and guess. - Ss work in groups.. The TV The radio The mobile phone The lighting fixture Modern clothing/ school uniform. - Ss discuss and give opinions. 2.Listen and read. Vocab: - great-grandma (n): cụ bà - great – grandfa (n): cụ ông - modern equipment (n): thiết bị hiện đại - (to) light: châm, thắp - folktale/ traditional story(n) : truyện cổ tích, truyện dân gian Once: ngày xửa ngày xưa 1? What did Nga’s grandma use to do - Used to stay at home and help her when she was young? mom. - Used to look after younger brothers and.

(56) sisters. 2? Did Nga’s great grandfa use to tell Yes, he did. her grandma stories? - T corrects. Ask ss to practice the dialogue. Ask ss to listen to the tape and find the Eg1: I used to look after my younger model sentences. brothers and sisters. To express the activities that Nga's Eg2. She used to cook the meals. grandma did in the past but she doesn't Eg3. Dad used to tell us stories. do now. Form: What structure does she use ? Underline (+) S + used to + inf that structure . (-) S + didn't + use to + inf T introduces "used to" (?) Did + S + use to + inf ? * Used to: express habits in the past. The habits don't exist now. What did she say when she talked about Eg: I had to stay at home. the things she had to do in the past ? T explains "had to". T introduces the structure "be....like" Eg: What was life like then ? Now read the dialogue again and find new words. 2. Work with a partner . Ask and Ask ss to listen to the tape again and answer the questions. answer the questions below. a. She used to live on a farm. Work in pairs ask and answer the b. Because she had to stay at home and questions. help her mom. She used to look after her Call some Ss to read the answers. younger brothers and sisters. T corrects and gives the correct answers. c. She used to cook the meals, clean the house and wash the clothes. d. She used to lit the lamp and he used to tell them stories. e. She asked her grandmother to tell her the tale "The lost shoe". T gives 2 sentences to help Ss 3. Fact or Opinion ? Check (V) the distinguish Fact or Opinion. boxes. Eg1: I live in Quang Phuc. Eg2: It's a beautiful village. 1F 2O a. F d. F Read the sentences in part 3 and decide b. F e. O whether it is F or O. c. F f. O - Ss work in individual. - Share with a partner. T calls Ss to give opinions. T corrects. IV- Consolidation: - Ss summarize the main content of the dialogue. - Make sentences with the structures in the lesson..

(57) - Call some Ss to speak. V- Homework: - Learn by heart new words and the structures. - Read the dialogue at home. - Guide Ss to do ex4 (P. 28,29) Call a student to read the eg and ask Ss to do part b. - Guide Ss to do ex 5 (P. 29), ex 6 (P. 30) - Prepare part Speak. Week : 7 Period: 21. Preparing day:15/10/2009 Teaching day: 23/10/2009 Unit 4: At home Lesson 2 - Speak + listen. A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to speak about the difference between life in the past and life in the present. They will be able to use "used to" fluently and understand the content of the story and choose the right title. They will be able to know some vocabulary such as lay egg, amazement, foolish, greedy. B- Language contents: Used to + inf, the past simple tense C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Teaching aids: Pictures, cards, teacher's book, cassette book, reference books. E- Procedure: I. Setting class: II. Checking the old lesson: S1: Retell Nga's grandmother's things used to do when she was small. S2: Do ex 4 (P 28,29) III. New lesson: - T uses some elicit questions to attract Ss A - Speaking to the subject of the lesson. Pre - Speaking Do you remember your childhood ? What did you use to do when you were small ? Did you use to fly the kite ? go fishing ? cry ? - T calls some Ss to answer and list what they used to do when they were small. Now look at the pictures in part 1. Can you name the pictures ? 1. Work with a partner. Look at the Picture 1 ? pictures. Talk about the way things used Picture 2 ? to be and the way they are now. - Now work in groups please. P1: Life in Vietnam in the past. Groups 1,3 look at picture 1 and list the P2: Life in Vietnam nowadays..

(58) things and activities you see. Groups 2,4 do the same with picture 2. - Call some Ss to give the list. - The others add.. - Ss work in groups.. Picture 1 1.People / live in (have) small houses 2. People / work in the paddy – fields. 3. People / raise cattle for meat. Picture 2 -live in (have) big houses – tall house - work in the factory / company / office -buy food in the shop / store / supermarket 4. People / go to the market on foot - go to the market by motorbike / car 5. Children / play traditional games - play modern games: computer games 6. Children / stay at home - go to scholl all day 7. People / have no TV, traffic lights, - have TV, traffic lights, electricity electricity - Now work in pairs, looking at the picture and the words listed, talk about the differences between life in the past and now by using "used to". - Call some Ss to present. - T and Ss correct. - Work in groups and find more things you know in the past. - Call some leaders to speak.. While - Speaking. - Ss speak In the past people used to live in small houses. Now they live in big houses and buildings. Post - Speaking 2. Now tell your partner about the things you used to do last year. 1. get up late / get up early - Call a student to read the eg in book. 2. go to school on afternoons / go to * Note: "Used to" school on morning - T controls and helps Ss. 3. have lunch early / have lunch late - Call Ss to speak. 4. go to swimming in the morning / go - Find the Ss had the same activities last swimming in the afternoon year. 5. gat bed marks / get good marks Who had a lot of bad habits ? B – Listening T asks some questions Pre - Listening ? Do you always read stories ? ? Which story do you like best ? Why ? - Ss answer the questions ? What did you learn from that story ? Vocab There are a lot of Vietnamese folktales - (to) lay eggs: đẻ trứng which have precious moral lessons. We - (to) kill: giet chet are going to listen to it and decide which - amazement (n): sù ng¹c nhiªn of the following is the most suitable - (to) discover: kh¸m ph¸, ph¸t hiÖn moral lesson. - excitedly (adv): kinh ng¹c - T calls a student to read 4 moral - greedy (sdj): tham lam.

(59) lessons in book. - foolish (adj): ngu ngèc Now listen to the tape please and take notes (main contents) - Explains some new words. Ask ss to guess and decide which of the followings is the most suitable moral lesson. Ask ss to do it individually, then compare and give the result. While - Speaking Ask ss to listen to the tape and give the result. b. Don't be foolish and greedy. Call some Ss to speak the note they took. ASk ss to listen to the tape again and Post – Listening answer some questions. 1.Who lived in a comfortable life with -A farmer his family? 2. Why did he shout excitedly to his Because one of his chickens laid a gold wife? egg. 3. How did he shout? “ We’re rich, we’re rich” 4. What did he do to find more gold He cut open all the chickens. eggs? 5. Could he find any gold eggs? No, he couldn’t. 6. What happened at the end of the All the chickens are dead. story? IV- Homework: Write 3 sentences about your habits in the past. - Give the correct form of the words in the following sentences 1. We fell very (comfort) in the new house. 2. I liked (collect) stamps when I was young. 3. Everybody looked at me in (amaze) 4. It's (fool) of you to do that. Key: 1. comfortable 2. collecting 3. amazement 4. foolish - Guide Ss to do ex2 (P 27), ex3 (P. 28) - Practice telling the story you listened - Prepare part Read..

(60) Week : 8 Period: 22. Preparing day: 21/10/2009 Teaching day: 26/10/2009 Unit 4: At home Lesson 3 - Read. A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the content of the folktale, know some new words and complete the gaps and answer the questions. They will be able to tell other folktales they know. B- Language contents: The content of the story Grammar: The past simple tense C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Teaching aids: Pictures, work sheet, extra board. E- Procedure: I. Setting class: II. Checking the old lesson: S1: Retell the story you listen last period. S2: Do ex2 (P 270 III. New lesson: T asks Pre - Reading Do you like folktales ? Can you tell me name of some folktales Vocab that you remember ? - cruel (adj): độc ác We are going to read the story "The lost - chores (n): công việc nhà shoe" and we’ll learn some moral - upset (adj): buồn phiền lessons from it. - broken heart (n): sự đột tử Ask ss to give some new words. - harvest festival (n): lễ hội được mùa Synonym: housework - fairy (n): ông bụt, ông tiên Antonym: happy - gically (adv): 1 cách kỳ diệu Check - rags (n): quần áo rách R and R - Prince (n): Hoàng tử Ask ss to choose the books and do Ex: Choose the best option. Ss Prediction Result 1.What’s the name of the story? S S S a. The lost shoe 1 2 3 b. The lost shirt 1 2. What are the main charaters?.

(61) a. Little Rice and Stout Nut. 2 b. Little Pea and Stout Nut 3 3. Did two girls have the same mother 4 and father? 5 a. Yes, they did. b. No, they didn’t. 4. Who did mother make new shirt for? a. Little Pea b. Stout Nut 5. Who did the Prince marry to? a. Little Pea b. Stout Nut (Using an extra board) Ask ss to do it individually, then compare with a partner and give the result. While – Reading Ask ss to open the books, read in silent Key: and check. 1 – a; 2 – b; 3 – b; 4 – b; 5 – a Ask ss to guess the meaning from the context. Ask ss to do it individually, then Matching compare with a partner and give the A B result. 1.(to) marry a.bà vợ (Using an extra board) 2. broken heart(n) b. xuất hiện 3. wife (n) c. cưới 4. (to) appear d. yêu , phải long 5. change …into e. đánh rơi - Read the story again and complete part 6. (to) drop f. sự đột tử 1 in pairs. 7. (to) fall in love g. biến… thành - Share your answers. 1. Complete the sentences with words - Call some Ss to give answers. from the story. - T corrects and gives key. a. a farmer b. died c. used .....again d. marry/ choose - Ask Ss to read the story again and e. new clothes answer the questions in part 2. f. lost - Divide he class in to 2 teams, name the 2. Answer the questions. Write the teams and let them play the game answers in your exercise book. Lucky numbers a. She was a poor farmer's daughter. b. She made Little Pea do chores all day. - Control the game. c. Before the festival started, a fairy - Correct the answers and say the appeared and magically changed her rags winners. in to beautiful clothes. d. The prince decided to marry the girl who owned the lost shoe. After reading the story answer my.

(62) question. What Vietnamese folktale is it ? (Tam Cam) - Ask Ss to close the booksand do Ex: Put the sentences into the correct order.. e. Ss' answer. - Ss answer Post - Reading 1.The step – mother was very cruel to Little Pea. 2. The step – mother made new clothes for Stout Nut. 3. Once, a poor famer had a daughter named Little Pea. 4. The fairy appeared and changed Litle pea’s rags into beautiful clothes. 5. After her mother died, her father marriedagain. 6. The Prince found the lost shoe and decided to marry Little Pea. 7. Little Pea ran to the festival and dropped one of her shoes. 8. Little Pea had to do chores all day. Key: 3–5–1–8–2–4–7–6. IV- Homework: - Practice telling a folktale you like best in English and then give some remarks of it. - Learn by heart all the new words. - Do ex 3 (28) - Prepare part Write. Week : 8 Period: 23. Preparing day: 21/ 10 / 2009 Teaching day: 28 / 10 / 2009 Unit 4: Our past Lesson 4 - Write. A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know the folktale "How the tiger got his stripe". They will be able to know more vocabulary: graze, servant, master, wisdom, straw. Ss revise the tenses in the past they learnt and retell the main content of the folktale. B- Language contents: - Grammar: The simple past tense The past progressive tense - Vocabulary: graze, servant, master, wisdom, straw, tie, stripe C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Teaching aids: Pictures, extra board, reference books, work sheet E- Procedure:.

(63) I. Setting class: II. Checking the old lesson: S1: Retell the folktale "The lost shoe" S2: Answer the questions: 1. Who was Little Pea ? 2. Why did his father die ? 3. Who did the prince decide to marry ? 4. Do you like folktales ? Why ? III. New lesson: T asks Ss to read the request of the Pre - Writing exercise. Vocab: T uses a picture A B Look at the picture please. 1. (to) graze a.trí khôn Do you know why tigers have black 2. servant (n) b. đốt cháy stripes ? 3. master (n) c. buộc Which story tell you that ? 4. wisdom (n) d. dầy tớ Can you tell me something about it ? 5. (to) tie e. rơm rạ In this lesson, we will learn more about 6. straw (n) f. trốn thoát this story. 7. black stripe (n) g. gặm cỏ Ask ss to do Ex about new words. 8. (to) escape h. ông chủ 9. (to) burn i. vằn den - Look at the verbs in the box, please. - Read the verbs and tell me what they 1. Complete the story. Use the verbs in are in common. the box. (Past form) - Read the story in silence and complete 1. appeared 2. was the story. - Now work in pairs to fill the verbs in 3. said 4. left the gaps. 5. went - Call Ss to read the answers. 6. tied - T corrects 7. lit 8. burned 9. escaped Ask ss to erad the story again and - A farmer - > - The small man- > I change the famer into oneself. He / The farmer- > His - > my Him - > me Ask ss to read the part 2. Ask ss to work in groups , each group has a leader who write the completed story on the paper. - Work in groups of five. Read each sentence and correct it together. - Call some leaders of groups to read. 2. Now imagine you are the man. Use the words to write the story. Start like this. One day as I was in the field and my buffalo was grazing nearby. A tiger came. It asked why the strong buffalo was my servant and why I was its.

(64) their stories. - t corrects by writing wrong sentences on the board and call Ss to correct. - T gives the key.. master. I told the tiger that I had something called wisdom. The tiger wanted to see it but I told it I left the wisdom at home. Then I tied the tiger to a tree with a rope because I didn't want it to eat my buffalo. I went to get some straw that I said was my wisdom and I burned the tiger. The tiger escaped, but today it still has black stripes from the burn. - Some groups practice the dialogue.. - Work in groups, please. Post – Writing Make the sentences of the tiger and the Eg: Tiger: Are you the master ? man then practice it. Man: Yes,....etc - Call some groups to practice. -Ask ss to answer the questions below. 1. Where was the farmer when the tiger appeared ? 2. What did the tiger want to know ? 3. Why did the farmer tie the tiger to a tree ? 4. Did the tiger escape ? 5. Do you like this story ? Why ?. IV- Homework: - Learn by heart the new words. - Re do 2 exercises carefully at home. - Play the role of the tiger and tell the story. - Revise the knowledge in Unit 4. - Prepare Language focus Week : 8 Period: 24. Preparing day: 21 / 10 /2009 Teaching day: 30 / 10 / 2009 Unit 4: Our past Lesson 5 - Language focus. A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to revise the past form of some irregular verbs with the past simple tense. They will be able to complete uses of prepositions of time in sentences. Ss revise use of "used to" and complete the dialogue given with "used to + inf". B- Language contents: Grammar: + The past simple tense + Prepositions of time + Use of "used to" C- Work arrangements:.

(65) Individual works, pair works, group works D- Teaching aids: Extra board, teacher's book, reference books, port cards. E- Procedure: I. Setting class: II. Checking the old lesson: During the lesson III. New lesson: - do you want to play a game 1. Write the past simple form of each "noughts and crosses" ? verb. - Now look at the table on the board. Please choose a verb and write its past Noughts and crosses simple form. Eg: fly-> flew c. take e. have g. be 2 sides are two teams i. eat h. ride d. go Name the teams Do you remember the rule of the game Key ? c. took h. rode Start playing d. went i. ate - Call Ss to play e. had j. sat - Give the keys f. did k. came - T corrects and says the winners. g. was/ were - The class clap their hands. 2. Complete the dialogue below. Use the Look at part 2 please past simple. How many dialogues are there ? What tense is used in all the There are 4 The past simple tense dialogues ? What do you have to do in this Complete the dialogues exercise ? Key All right. Work in pairs please. Read the questions or the answers a. Did you eat fried rice this morning ? carefully and then find the suitable b. I got to school by bike. c. Where were you last night ? sentences to complete the dialogues. - Call some Ss to read their dialogues. d. I had English. - T corrects and give the keys (You can have different keys) Can you tell me names of the 3. Complete the sentences. Use the prepositions in the table. prepositions of time you learnt ? Use the postcards to help Ss remember uses of some prepositions of time (on, Key in, between, after, before) a. on Eg: ............Monday b. in What is the preposition ? - Work in pairs , use the prepositions c. between d. at, after in the table to fill in the gaps. e. before - Call some Ss to read the sentences. - T corrects and gives the key.

(66) - Look at the first picture. How many people are there ? This is Nga and this is Hoa. What are they doing ? These are Hoa's photos when she was in Hue. - Now read the verbs in the box and look at the pictures carefully. Read the dialogue in pairs and complete it using the suitable verbs given and the pictures. - Call some pairs to practice. - T corrects What is "used to" used for ? In the past Hoa said. "I used to stay in Hue" Did Nga stay in Hue ? (No, she didn't) If you were Nga what would you say. I didn't use to stay in Hue. Who can give me the forms of uses of "used to"?. 4. Look at the pictures. Complete the dialogue. Use " used to"and the verbs in the box. There are two They're seeing the photo album.. Key 1. used to have 2. used to be 3. used to live *It is used to show habits in the past and the habits have changed now.. - Ss listen and answer. Form (+) S + used to + inf (-) S + didn't use to + inf (?) Did + S + use to + inf ? Yes/ No - Ss make sentences and read aloud. - Now use the form of "used to" to make your own sentences. - t corrects IV- Consolidation: Read this passage then find mistakes and correct When I am small. I used to followed my mother to the market in Sundays. At the market I used to ask my mother to buy many things. We often comeback home before 8 o'clock because there was a movie on TV in 8 o'clock and I liked it very much. Key: am-> was Followed -> follow In -> on Come -> came In - > at 1.They go to Nha Trang and visited many beautiful places there. 2. Hoang usually gets up late in Sunday mornings. 3. We use to go to schoola in the afternoon last year. 4. What did you bought yesterday? 5. I often get up on 5.30 a.m and do some morning exercises. V- Homework: - Revise the grammar in the lesson - Guide Ss to do ex 1 (P. 27), ex 2 (P. 27), ex 3 (P. 28) and ex 7(P. 31) - Prepare : Read, reod and check the test for next period..

(67) Week :9 Period: 25. Preparing day: 31 /10 /2009 Teaching day: 2/ 10/ 2009. Correcting the test 45 minutes A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know what they learnt well and what they learnt not well to control the methods to revise the old knowledge they learnt and learn next time better. B- Correct the test: I. Yêu cầu HS xác định lại đề bài trong bài kiểm tra. II. Nhận xét: A. Ưu điểm: - HS làm bài và nộp bài đầy đủ, đúng thời gian quy định. - HS tập trung làm bài và có ý thức hoàn thành bài kiểm tra. - Có nhiều HS trình bày bài kiểm tra sạch sẽ, chữ viết đẹp. B. Nhược điểm: - Bên cạnh nhứng HS viết chữ đẹp, trình bày bài kiểm tra sạch sẽ còn có nhiều HS viết chữ cẩu thả, trình bày kiểm tra luộm thuộm. - Còn nhiều HS không học bài kĩ trước khi làm bài kiểm tra nên làm bài sai và lạc đề. - Các lớp B, còn nhìn bài của nhau. C. Thông báo kết quả: GV thông báo kết quả từ điểm cao xuống thấp theo số điểm bộ môn từ đó rút ra kinh nghiệm học bài và làm bài cho HS. Lớp <5 5-<8 8 - 10 Số lượng % Số lượng % Số lượng % 8A 1 12 14 8B 1 22 0 D. Tuyên dương, phê bình: * Tuyên dương: GV tuyên dương những HS làm bài tốt, đạt điểm cao..

(68) * Phê bình: GV nhắc nhở phê bình những HS làm bài yếu kém. III. Chữa lỗi sai: I. Loại bài tập nghe hiểu: - Hầu hêt HS làm bài này tốt vì phù hợp với trình độ của các em. - HS lớp 8A làm tương đổi tốt, HS lớp 8B làm kém vì phát âm không chuẩn. II. Loại bài tập đọc đọan văn và trả lời câu hỏi: Vẫn còn hiện tượng HS nhầm lẫn giữa câu hỏi dạng Y –N với câu hỏi có từ để hỏi. Trả lời câu hỏi Yes / No khi mở đầu câu hỏi lag Are / Is / Do / Does / Did / Have / Has. Eg1. Are you a teacher? Yes, I am. / No, I am not. Eg2. Is he a good student? Yes, he is / No, he isn’t. Eg3. Do you go to school by bike? Yes, I do. / No, I don’t. Eg4. Does Lan often get up very early in the morning? Yes, she does. / No, she doesn’t. Eg5. Did you watch TV last night? Yes, I did. / No, I didn’t. Chú ý: Khi trả lời không phải lag câu hỏi Y / N ta phải chú ý: Thường thì trong câu hỏi có chứa các từ going như trong câu trả lời vậy ta phải tìm ra sự lặp lại này để lấy câu trả lời. III. Loại bài tìm từ có cách phát âm khác so với các từ còn lại. - Nhắc lại cách phát âm với ED, S và ES. Note: Cách phát âm S, ES, ED Cách phát âm S, ES là / S /, / Z /, / IZ / - Phát âm là / S / khi động từ có tận cùng là: f, k, p, t - Phât âm là / Z / khi động từ có tận cùng là: b, d, g, l, m, n, v, r, y - Phát âm là / IZ / khi dộng từ tận cùng là: s, sh, ch, x, z Cách phát âm ED là / T /, / ID /, / D / - Phát âm là / T / khi động từ có tận cùng là: c (s), f, gh (f), k, p, s, sh, ch, - Phát âm là / ID / khi động từ có tận cùng là: t, d - Phát âm là / D / khi động từ có tận cùng là:còn lại VI. Loại bài chọn đáp án đúng. 1. a. visit (to be going to) 2. c. ought (ought to) 3. c. vent (last year) 4. b. not old enough (S + to be + not + Adj + enogh + to - inf) 5. a. practice (should + V (bare)) V. Loại bài tập hoàn thành đoạn văn về người bạn trong lớp. Phải đảm bảo các mục của một bài viết. C. Homework - Revise the knowledge you learnt not well at home..

(69) - Redo the exercise at home - Prepare part Write. Question 2: Fill in the blanks with suitable prepositions: 1. I’m reading a book (1)……history (2)………Vietnam. 2. She doesn’t work (3)………the evenings and (4)……Saturday afternoons. 3. I talked (5)……… her (6)………. the phone yesterday. 4. Every day she goes (7)……….. school (8)………. foot. 5. James lives (1)……… a small flat (2)……….. Cambridge. He lives (3)………. two other boys. They are students (4)………. Cambridge University. They work hard during the week, but (5)………….. weekends they invite a lot of friends to their house. They cook a meal (6)………. their friends, and then they go out (7)………. the pub (8)………… a drink, or they stay (9)…………….. home and listen (10)…………. music. a. Does James live in a small or big flat? …………………………………………………………………………………………. b. Who does he live with? …………………………………………………………………………………………. c. What do they do during the week? …………………………………………………………………………………………. d. Do they invite a lot of friends to their house at weekends? …………………………………………………………………………………………. e. What do they do after having a meal? ………………………………………………………………………………………….. Question 2: Fill in the blanks with suitable prepositions: 1. I’m reading a book (1)……history (2)………Vietnam. 2. She doesn’t work (3)………the evenings and (4)……Saturday afternoons. 3. I talked (5)……… her (6)………. the phone yesterday. 4. Every day she goes (7)……….. school (8)………. foot. 5. James lives (1)……… a small flat (2)……….. Cambridge. He lives (3)………. two other boys. They are students (4)………. Cambridge University. They work hard during the week, but (5)………….. weekends they invite a lot of friends to their house. They cook a meal (6)………. their friends, and then they go out (7)………. the pub (8)………… a drink, or they stay (9)…………….. home and listen (10)…………. music. a. Does James live in a small or big flat? …………………………………………………………………………………………. b. Who does he live with? …………………………………………………………………………………………. c. What do they do during the week? …………………………………………………………………………………………. d. Do they invite a lot of friends to their house at weekends? …………………………………………………………………………………………. e. What do they do after having a meal? …………………………………………………………………………………………. Week : 9 Period: 26. Preparing day: 31 / 10 / 2009 Teaching day: 4 / 11 / 2009 Unit 5: study habits.

(70) Lesson 1 - Getting started + listen and read A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask about study habits of theirs, know a little about reported speech. They will be able to revise old knowledge such as names of the subjects , "How often" and understand the content of the dialogue between Tim and his mother complete the exercises "T or F" and "answer the questions" B- Language contents: Vocabulary Grammar: reported speech, How often, modal verb: should C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Teaching aids: Cassette tape, pictures, extra board, lesson schedules, teacher's book E- Procedure: I. Setting class II. Warm up: ? How many subjects do you have at school? ? How often do you have Math and English? ? Which subject are you good at? Why are you good at it? III. New lesson: T gives out a lesson schedule and asks Getting started What is this ? How many subjects do you have a week ? What are they ? A schedule How often do you have Math ? 11 Literature ? Ss tell names os the subjects Which subject do you like best ?Why ? - Now work in groups. Please ask and answer about the subjects at school. - Call some Ss to report. In this lesson we will have further discussion on study habits. Listen and read Look at the picture in book please and Vocabulary give some new words. - habit (n): thói quen - school report (n): phiếu két quả học tập - excellent (adj): laoij xuất sắc - semester (n): term (n): học kỳ - be proud of smb: tự hào về ai - improve (v): nâng cao - Spanish pronunciation: phát âm tiếng Tây Ban Nha - (to) try one's best: cố gắng hết sức - Now look at your book and listen to the (to) believe: tin tưởng tape once, then complete the dialogue. - Ss listen Tim:Is my report card good?.

(71) Mom: Yes, it’s excellent. But there’s one thing you need to improve. Tim: What’s that, Mom? Mom: Moss Jackson said you should work harder on your Spanish pronunciation. She asked me to give you this dictionary. Tim: Yes, I know. I’ll try my best to improve them. Mom: I believe you can do it, Tim. (Using an extra board) Listen to the tape again you can repeat the difficult words, phrases or sentences. - Practice the dialogue in pairs. - Call some pairs to practice. - T correct Ss' pronunciation. - let Ss read the new words. - Read the dialogue again and do ex 2 - Call some Ss to give their opinions and explain. - Ss do ex 2 in individual - Share the answer - Corrects and gives the key. - Let Ss play Lucky numbers game 1. L. 2L. 3.c. 4.b. 5.a. 6.d. 1. Practice the dialogue with a partner.. 2, true or false ? Check (V) theboxes. Key a. F c. F e. F b. T d. T f. T 3. Answer the questions Answers a. Miss Jackson is Tim's teacher. b. She gave Tim's mother a report card. c. He studied very well this semester. d. She said Tim should work harder on his Spanish pronunciation. e. She gave him a dictionary.. - Retell the rule - Give the correct answers and count the points and say the winners. -Ask ss to isten to the tape again and find Model sentences the model sentences: 1. Miss Jackson said you should work Tìm xem câu nào la câu mà người mẹ harder on your pronunciation. Tim đã nhắc lại câu của cô giáo với Tim. 2. She asked me to give you this dictionary. Câu 1: là lời khuyên gián tiếp: S1 + said + S2 + should + V (bare)…. Câu 2: là câu yêu cầu gián tiếp. - T scans the Grammar "Reported speech" S1 + asked + O + to – inf Câu 1, câu 2 lag câu gián tiếp: lag lời nói của 1 người được người khác thuật T explains the grammar quickly lại theo ngôn ngữ riêng của mình nhưng (You'll learn this grammar carefully in ý nghĩa không bị thay đổi. Language focus) Khi chuyển từ câu trực tiếp sang câu.

(72) gián tiếp sẽ có sự thay đổi về chủ ngữ, thì của động từ, tân ngữ, trạng từ chỉ thời gian, nơi chốn và các đại từ chỉ định. IV- Consolidation: Answer the questions a. Was your school report card last semester good ? b. What subject was you good / bad at ? c. What do you need to improve ? V- Homework: - Learn by heart all the new words. - Read the dialogue many times at home. - Write a report about your study result last year. - Prepare part Speak + Listen Week : 9 Period: 27. Preparing day: 31/10/2009 Teaching day: 6/11/ 2009 Unit 5: study habits Lesson 2 - Speak + listen. A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review names of the subjects they learnt. They will be able to express their habits of studying and their methods to learn well. They will be able to know the information in the a school report and finish the report exactly after listening. Correcting test 45 minutes B- Language contents: Vocabulary: names of subjects Grammar: reported speech, The present simple tense, the present perfect. C- Work arrangements: T=WC, Individual, pair, group D- Teaching aids: Cassette tape, pictures, extra board, teacher's book, work sheet E- Procedure: I. Warm up: II. Checking the old lesson: Read you report about your study result last year. T asks some questions: What subject did you like best last year ? How did you do to learn well ? What are you going to do to learn well this year ? III. New lesson: - T asks A – Speak How many subjects do you have at Pre - Speaking school ? Vocab: What are they ? (to) watch film in English: xem phim =.

(73) - Look at 2 tables in book please. - Read the questions and the prompts then answer the questions by yourself. - T asks When do you do your homework ? Who helps you with your homework? How much time do you spend on Math ? Which subject do you need to improve ? What do you do to improve you English ? - Now work in pairs please. - Call some pairs to practice.. TA (to) go to E club: tới câu lạc bộ TA (to) speak to foreigner: nói chuyện vời người nước ngoài (to) do grammer exercise: làm bài tập ngữ pháp less than: ít hơn more than: nhiều hơn etc (etcetera): vân vân.. While - Speaking. Eg: I do my homework in the evening My brother helps me. I often spend 2 hours on Math. I need to improve English. I have to learn grammar and do exercises a lot. Post - Speaking - Look at your friend's answers then * Reported speech: report. The present simple tense -> the past Eg: Lan said she did her homework in simple tense the evening. Her brother helped her to do homework. - T explains the tense in the reported speech quickly. - T asks Ss to correct mistakes. - Now base on the prompts in book to write a passage about your study. - Troubles- Solution - Call some Ss to read and correct - Discuss about the troubles you have in your studying and help each other to solve them. - Call some Ss to speak - Look at the report card in your book B – Listen and read it in silence. Pre - Listening Vocabulary - marking period (n): thời gian đánh giá - day present (n): ngµy cã mÆt - day absent (n): ngµy v¾ng mÆt - behavior-participation (n): thái độ tham gia - co-operation (n): hîp t¸c x©y dùng bµi - excellent (a): xuÊt s¾c - good (a): giái, tèt.

(74) - fair (a): kh¸ - poor (a): ýÕu - fall (v): trît - satisfactory (a): hµi lßng - comment (n): nhËn xÐt This is Sarah's school report. Before - teacher's signature (n): ch÷ kÝ gi¸o viªn listening the conversation between the teacher and Miss Blake and Mrs Chen. Can you guess her results ? - Now listen to the tape and fill in the report. - Compare your answers. - Check your predictions. - T asks Has Sarah worked very hard this term ? Yes, she has Why did she miss of school ? Because she was sick Are her speaking and reading good or They're excellent. excellent ? How about her listening It is not good. comprehension ? How does she do to improve her She has to listen to English radio listening comprehension ? programs. - Listen to the tape again . - Work in pairs, ask and answer about what you have to fill. While - Listening - Now read the words you fill. Eg: S1: How many days present did - T gives the key. Sarah have ? S2: 87 days present. Key: (1) 87 days present (2) 5 days absent (3) participation (4) Listening C (5) Speaking A (6) Reading A (7) writing B - Now base on the information in Sarah's report card. Please write a Post - Listening passage. - Call some Ss to read. - T corrects. V- Homework: - Learn by heart all the new words. - Practice the questions in part Speak a lot. - Complete your report card - Try your best to retell the main content of the listening exercise you listened..

(75) - Guide Ss to do exercise 1 (P. 32), ex 2 (P. 33) - Prepare part Read.. Week : 10 Period: 28. Preparing day: 7/ 11 / 2009 Teaching day: 9 / 11 / 2009 Unit 5: Study habits Lesson 3 - Read. A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know some ways to learn vocabulary well. They will be able to know the statements are true or false and answer the questions given exactly. B- Language contents: Reading skill Vocabulary about learning new words. C- Work arrangements: T=WC, Individual, pair, group D- Teaching aids: Extra board, post cards, teacher's book E- Procedure: I. Warm up: II. Checking the old lesson: 2 Ss speak about their study results last year. III. New lesson: - Look at the post cards in book please Pre - Reading and tell me the topic of the lesson Vocab today. - (to) make a list: liệt kê danh sách The topic is the way to learn English - (to) mother tongue (n): tiếng mẹ đẻ vocabulary. - (to) learn by heart: học thuộc lòng How many English words do you learn - (to) stick: dán everyday ? - come across: gặp tình cờ What do you do when you read a new - ((to) underline: gạch chân word ? - (to) highlight: làm nổi bật What do you do to remember new - however : tuy nhiên words ? - instead : thay vì Ask ss to close the books and do Ex: Multiple choice 1.How many ways are there to learn. Ss. Prediction S1 S2 S3. Result.

(76) new words in the text? 1 a. 4 ways 2 b. 5 ways 3 2. Do many language learners underline 4 or highlight the words they want to learn? a. Yes, they do. b. No, they don’t. 3. How many ways are there to learn the same number of words? a. 2 ways b. 3ways 4. What is necessary in learning new words? a. Revision While – Reading b. Learn by heart. Key: 1. b; 2. a; 3. a; 4. a - Read the text again and do ex1 T or F. 1. True or false ? Check (V) the boxes. - Compare your answers with your a. F friends. b. T - Call Ss to give the answers. c. F - T corrects. d. T - Now read the text again and do ex 2 2. Answer the questions. in pairs. Answers - Call some Ss to read the answers. a. No. Learners learn words in different How do you have the answers ? ways. - T gives the correct answers. b. Such sentences help them remember the use of new words. c. To remember words better, learners write examples, put the words and their meaning on stickers, underline or highlight them. d. They may think they can't do so. Instead they learn only important words. e. Revision is necessary in learning words. Post - reading Ask ss to work in groups to discuss the f. Learners should try different ways of question “f”. learning words to find out what is the best. Ask ss report before the class. What way do you follow the ways in the text ? Why do you choose that way ? - Ss answer. V- Homework: - learn by heart all the new words. - Read the text many times at home. - Do Ex 8 (36).

(77) - Prepare part Write. Week : 10 Period: 29. Preparing day: 7 / 11 / 2009 Teaching day:11 / 11 /2009 Unit 5: Study habits Lesson 4 - Write. A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to confirm the main parts in a personal letter. They will be able to know the vocabulary and the content of personal letter. They can finish the letter in part 2 exactly. B- Language contents: The parts in a personal letter Vocabulary in a letter. C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Teaching aids: Extra board, teacher's book , worksheet E- Procedure: I. Setting class: II. Checking the old lesson: S1: write the words in the text last period. S2: Tell the ways to learn vocabulary III. New lesson: - T divides the class in to 4 groups. Pre - Writing - T gives Ss the parts of a letter which The letter were cut seperatively 18 Tran Hung Dao street - Ask Ss to discuss in groups and put (1) Hoan Kiem District, Hanoi the parts in order to make a completed November 11, 2005 letter. - The group finishes the work first. The (2) Dear Quang, Ss are in that group are winners. I am very surprised to get your letter. I didn't know you arrived back in Hanoi. Did you have a good time in Nha Trang. I am looking forward to hearing all about it. (3) Thank you for inviting me to dinner next weekend. I'm afraid. I will not be able to come on Sunday. But I'll be free the following weekend. Why don't you call me in the next few days ? Yours - Look at the letter you're rearranged (4) Lan please answer my questions. 1. Look at Hoa's letter to Tim. She wrote - Now look at the parts of a personal it at the end of term . Identify the sections, letter and put them in the correct order. Label them with correct letter. B-D-A-C.

(78) How many parts are there in a personal letter ? (4) What are they ?(Heading, Opening, Body, Closing) - Share your answers with your partner. - Call a student to read the answer. - Look at Hoa's letter and tell me the information in heading ? ? The information in Opening ? The information in Body of the letter ? The information in Closing ? - Call a student to read Hoa's letter aloud. Answer my questions. ? Who wrote the letter ? ? Who received it ? ? For what subjects did Hoa get good grades ? ? Was her Math result good ? ? What is she going to do ? - Look at the information in the box and read in silence. - Complete the sentences to make a letter. - Write all the parts of a personal letter. - Share your letters with your friends. - Call some Ss to read the letters. T corrects some typical mistakes. - T gives the answer key.. Answer - Heading: writer's address and the date. - Opening: Dear + N, (Note: comma) - Body of the letter: consist of 3 or 4 small parts (reason, suggestion, appointment) - Closing: greet at the end of the letter (eg: regards, my love etc). - Hoa wrote the letter - Tim received it - She got grades for Science, English and History. - No, it wasn't. - She's going to Hue to celebrate the festival with her grandmother. While - Writing 2. Now help Lan write a letter to her pen pal Donna in San Francisco. Use the information in the box. Lan's letter (Lan's address) (Dtae) Dear Donna, Thanks for your letter. I'm pleased to hear you had a happy Mother's Day. I received my second semester report last month. I got good grades for Geography, Physics and Math, but my English and History results were poor. My teacher told me to improve English and History. I think I'll have to study harder next school year. In a few weeks we're going to celebrate the Mid-Autumn Festival. That's a moon festival in Autumn or Fall in Vietnam. I'm going to Halong Bay with my aunt and uncle by bus this afternoon and I'm going to stay there with them until after the festival. I'll send you a postcard from there. Write soon and tell me all your news..

(79) Best, Lan - Write a letter to your friend tell her/ him about the teacher's Day in your school. - Call some Ss to read their letters. - T corrects mistakes.. Post - Writing. V- Homework: - learn by heart the parts of a personal letter. - Complete your letter at home - Guide Ss to do ex 8 (P. 36,37), ex 9 P. 37) - Prepare part Language focus. Week : 10 Period: 30. Preparing day: 7 / 11 / 2009 Teaching day:13 / 11/ 2009 Unit 5: Study habits Lesson 5 - Language focus. A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to revise use of the adverbs of manner and complete the sentences with the adverbs given. They will be able to use the modal verb "should" correctly. T helps Ss know something about reported speech and they can change the sentences from direct speech to reported speech. B- Language contents: Modal verb: should Reported speech Adverbs of manner C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Teaching aids: Pictures, extra board, teacher's book , work sheet E- Procedure: I. Setting class: II. Checking the old lesson: 2 Ss read the letter A student does ex 8 III. New lesson: Vocab: Ask ss to give some new words. (to) behave: đối xử (to) have a sore throat: đau họng (to) replant: trồng lại cây (to) pronounce: phât âm Ask ss to look at part 1 on p52 and 1. Complete the dialogues. Use the adverbs work in pairs. of manner in the box. Can you tell me the form and use of * Form:.

(80) the adverbs of manner ? Give examples.. - Most adverbs of manner are formed from adjectives. Adj (ly) -> adv Eg: beuatiful -> beautifully Bad -> badly Hard -> hard Fast -> fast * Use: used to show the manner when Work in pairs. Choose the adverbs people do smt. given to fill in the gap. a. well - Call some pairs to read the dialogue. b. hard - T corrects. c. fast d. badly e. softly Ask ss to lookm at part 2 and do it. 2. Work with a partner. Look at the picture - Look at Mr Hao's house. of Mr Hao's house. Use the words in the Is Mr Hao's house new or old ? box. Say what he should do. What do you think Mr Hao should do to repair his house ? Key: The roof is leak 1. Mr Hao / repair / roof. The doors are not good. 2. He / paint / doors / windows. The grass grows everywhere. 3. He / cut / grass. 4. He / replant / trees. - Look at the picture use the verbs in 5. He / mend / walls / doors/ kitchen / the box to advice Mr Hao. window. - Call some Ss to read the sentences. 1. Mr Hao should repair the roof. * should is a modal verb. Who can tell me the meaning and use S + should + inf of "should " ? "Should " is used to advice smb to do - T introduces something about smt. reported speech. Ask ss to look at part 3 on P53 and do 3. Work with a partner. Ex. A. Câu mệnh lệnh gián tiếp. Eg1. “ Please give Tim this dictionary.” Miss Jackson said to me. Miss Jackson told me to give you this dictionary. Eg1. “ Don’t give Tim this dictionary.” Miss Jackson said to me. Miss Jackson told me not to give you this dictionary. S + told + O + to – infinitive……. not to – infinitive….. B. Câu yêu cầu gián tiếp. Eg1. “ Can you give Tim this dictionary.” Miss Jackson said to me. Miss Jackson áked me to give you this.

(81) dictionary. Eg1. “ Can’t give Tim this dictionary.” Miss Jackson said to me. Miss Jackson áked me not to give you this dictionary. S + asked + O + to – infinitive……. not to – infinitive….. a. Miss Jackson asked me to wait outside * Note: To ask/ told smb to do smt her office. - Now change the sentences in book in b. Miss Jackson told me to give you your to reported speech. report card for this semester. - Share the answer with your partner. c. Miss Jackson told me to help you with - Call some Ss to read. your Spanish pronunciation. - T corrects. d. Miss Jackson asked me to meet her next week. - Look at part 4 and remark the 4. Work with a partner. sentence with "should". Lời khuyên gián tiếp - Read the eg and do ex. Eg1. “Tim should work harder on his - Call some Ss to read. Spanish pronunciation” Mis Jackson said. - T corrects. Miss Jackson said you should work harder on your Spanish pronunciation. S + said + S + should + V (bare) shouldn’t a. Miss Jackson said you should spend more time on Spanish pronunciation. b. Miss Jackson said you should practice Speaking Spanish everyday. c. Miss Jackson said you should listen to Spanish conversation on TV. d. Miss Jackson said you should practice reading aloud passages in Spanish. e. Miss Jackson said you should use this dictionary to find out how to pronounce Spanish words. IV- Consolidation: T guides Ss to do exercise. Eg: Teacher said to Tom "Write that exercise carefully" -> Teacher asked Tom to write that exercise carefully Change these sentences in to reported speech. 1. Mary said to John, "Open the box for me" 2." Look at the board , please", she asked. 3. She said, "I like my dog" 4. They said, "We are very tired" 5. "I must go to the post office before it closes", he said. 6. "Bill will do the work for me", she said. V- Homework:.

(82) - Learn by heart uses of adverbs of manner, the modal verb "should" - and the way to change direct speech in to reported speech. Practice the questions in part Speak a lot. - Guide Ss to do exercise 3 (P. 33), ex 5 (P. 34), ex 6 (P. 35,36), ex 7 (P. 36) - Prepare Unit 6. Getting started + Listen and read. Week : 11 Period: 31. Preparing day: 13/11/2009 Teaching day:16/11/2009. Unit 6: The young pioneers club Lesson 1 - Getting started + listen and read A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know some activities of Ho Chi Minh Young Pioneer and Youth organization. They can think of what they did and what they will do for these organization next time. Ss will beable to know some new words about this subject. B- Language contents: Vocabulary about the youth clubs. Grammar: V1 + V2ing. C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Teaching aids: Cassette tape, pictures, extra board, teacher's book, visual aids. E- Procedure: I. Setting class: II. Checking the old lesson: III. New lesson: In Vietnam, which organizations are *******Getting started there for the youth ? Ho Chi Minh Young Pioneer and Youth What can we do when we enroll this organization. organization ? Are these activities useful for you and the general public ?.

(83) - Now look at the activities in book and read them. - Check (V) the boxes you do then add more activities. - Call some Ss to read. In your school. What activities do HCM Young Pioneer and Youth organization ? Do you take part in those activities ? Which activity do you like best ? Why? - Ss answer This summer Nga enrolls for some activities given by the Youth Union. Please guess what she has to do to enroll for the activities. - Now listen to the tape then check your predictions. Who can show me new words you come across in the dialogue ? T introduces new words. - Let Ss read the new words aloud. - Checking by rub out and remember. - Let Ss listen to the tape again. - Let Ss practice reading the dialogue in pairs. - Call some pairs to read aloud - T correct Ss's pronunciation. - Let Ss listen to the tape again and complete Nga's details. - Look at the box with Nga's information. Read the details. - Call some Ss to give the details. - T corrects.. *******Listen and read. Vocab - (to) enroll: đăng ký, tham gia - an application form: đơn xin tham gia - (to) fill out: điền vào - hobby (n): = interest (n) sở thích - out door activity (n): hoạt động ngoài trời - (to) act: diễn kịch - (to) sign: ký tên - Sex (n): male(n): giới tính nam femalne(n): giới tính nữ 1. Practise the dialogue.. 2. Complete Nga’s details. Name: Pham Mai Nga Home address: 5 Tran Phu street Phone number: not available Date of birth: April 22,1989 Sex: female Interests: drawing, out door activities and acting.  Scan grammar: - Ask ss to find some model Eg1. I like drawing. sentences. Eg2. I enjoy acting. S + like / love/ enjoy - Guide Ss to take the survey in dislike / hate + V – ing….. groups. Gerund: Ving (Subject, after like, enjoy) - Look at the form and then ask your It can play the role as a noun or a verb. friends and fill it out..

(84) - Ss imagine they want to enroll the activities of Ho Chi Minh Young pioneer at school. Form: Name Mai. Home address Date of birth Interests Quang Phuc November 9, 1992 Watching TV, playing village soccer Eg:. S1: What's your name ? S2: I'm Mai S1: Where do you live ? S2: I live in Quang Phuc village. etc - Call some groups to practice. IV- Consolidation: - Checking new words by "Slap the board" Fill out. hobby enroll. Out door activity Application form. - Summarize the main content of the dialogue V- Homework: - Learn by heart all the new words. - Practice the dialogue at home. - Complete your summary - Write a passage about the HCM Young Pioneer and Youth organization in your school - Prepare part Speak. Week : 11 Period: 32. Preparing day: 13/11/2009 Teaching day: 18/11/2009. Unit 6: The young pioneers club Lesson 2 - Speak and listen A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand and use the structures "asking for favors" and "offering the assistance" and the way to answer them with the structures such as "Can/ Could you do me a favor ? May I help you ?". Ss will be able to fill the right words in the place after listening. They will understand the content of the song "Children of the World Unite" and know some new words. B- Language contents: Asking for favors and responding to favors. Offering assistance and responding to assistance..

(85) The content of the song "Children of the World Unite"- Words by Margarette, music and tune by Robin Cameron. C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Teaching aids: Cassette tape, pictures, extra board, teacher's book E- Procedure: I. Setting class: II. Checking the old lesson: 2 Ss go to the board and practice the dialogue between Nga and the secretary and say something about the activities at school. III. New lesson: - T uses 2 pictures to introduce the A – Speak situation of the lesson. Pre - Speaking Picture 1: Ask for favors and respond to favors. If you were the people in the picture 1. Asking for favors. what would you say to have help ? Could you help me , please ? Alright when you want to ask for Could you dome a favor ? favors you can use this structures. I need a favor. Can/ could you +inf ? What about the answers ? * Responding to favors. - T introduces the responding. Certainly/ Of course/ Sure No, problem Picture 2: Offering the assistance I'm sorry. I'm really busy. (t can use picture1 and change the role 2. Offering assistance. of the play) What can I do for you ? What can you say and respond in this How can I help you ? situation ? May I help you ? - T introduces the structures. Do you need any help ? Let me help you. * Responding to assistance. Yes/ No. Thank you Yes. That's very kind of you. Yes. That's very kind of you. No. - Look at dialogue a between Mrs Thank you. I'm fine. Ngoc and Hoa. - Practice it in pairs, please. What structures did Mrs Ngoc use ? Are they favors or assistance ? - Call 2 Ss to read the dialogue. - Read the dialogue b in pairs. Which structures did the receptionist use ? - Call some pairs to read. - Now look at the table in book, please. - Ask Ss to read the request and the information in the box..

(86) - Now use the information given and While - Speaking the structures you've learnt to make the Eg: T: Could you help me, please ? dialogues in pair. S: Sure. What can I do for you ? - T makes an example with a student. T: Could you show me the way to the police station ? I've lost money. S: Go straight ahead. Take the first turning then turn left. You'll see it next to the bank. T: Thank you very much. - Call some pairs to practice. * Formal favors - T expands. I Wonder whether you could help me or Do you think you could help me ? - Now think of a situation and make up Post - Speaking a new dialogue using the structures to ask and respond the favors. - T sings a sentence of the song and B – Listen asks Ss. Pre - Listening What are we going to learn ? Yes. In our lesson we will listen to an English song. - Look at the words of the song and read in silence. Who can tell me what the song is about? - Work in pairs please. Read the words again and guess the missing words. - Call some Ss to say their predictions. New word - T introduces some new words. - (to) unite: đoàn kết - (to) hold hands: bắt tay - (to) shout out: reo hò - (to) make a stand: chọn 1 chỗ đứng - peace (n): hòa bình - Ask ss to gues the missing words and - land (n): vị trí fill in. - world (n): thế giới - Ask ss to do it individually, then compare with a partner and give he result. - Ask ss to guess. - Now look at the book and listen to While - Listening the tape. - Listen to the tape again and try your Key best to complete the song by filling the 1. unite 7. Of words you hear in the blanks. 2. peace 8. World - Compare your words with your 3. right 9. Show partner. 4 love 10. Place - Call some Ss to give the words. 5. north 11. Out.

(87) - Listen to the tape again and check 6. south your answers. - T gives the key. - Ask ss to listen to the tape and play a game: Chain game - Ask ss to listen to the tape again and sing that song.. 12. World Post - Listening. V- Homework: - learn by heart all the structures the song and the new words. - Practice the questions in part Speak a lot. - Do Ex 1, 2 (38, 39 , 40) - Prepare part Read. Week : 11 Period: 33. Preparing day: 13/11/2009 Teaching day: 20/11/2009. Unit 6: The young pioneers club Lesson 3 - Read A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the content of the text and fill the missing dates and answer the questions about the content of the text. They will know some new words in the text. B- Language contents: Vocabulary concern 2 organizations the Boy Scouts and the Girl guides Association. C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Teaching aids: Extra board, work sheet E- Procedure: I. Setting class: II. Checking the old lesson: 2 Ss practice the dialogue they made last periods. 1 student sings the song "Children of the world unite" III. New lesson: - T asks Ss some questions Pre - Reading What social activities do the Y&Y in Vietnam often do ? Do you know any organizations similar to the Y&Y in other countries ? Do you know anything about the Boy Scouts and the Girl guides in the USA? What do you think they do ? In our lesson to day we'll know some Vocab more about them. - (to) build character: xây dựng nhân cách.

(88) - Look at the book and read the test - (to) encourage: khuyến khích quickly. - citizenship (n): quyền công dân - T introduces new words. - fitness (n): sức khỏe - coeducational (a): giáo dục chung cho cả nam và nữ - worldwide (n): khắp thế giới - (to) lead to: dẫn đến - Scout (n): hướng đạo sinh - Scouting (n): sinh hoạt hướng đạo - Ask ss to close the books and do ex T - Aim (n):mục đích or F individually, then compare with a partner and give the result. Ss Prediction Result 1. The Boy Scouts of America (BSA) S1 S2 S3 buids character and encourages good 1 citizenship and personal fitness. 2 2. Scouting began in England in 1906. 3. The girls could join the girl Guides 3 4 Association and started in 1910. 4. In 1994, there were more 5,400,000 5 scouts in America. 5. Scouting is popular worldwide now. (Using an extraboard) Key: - Ask ss to open the books and read in 1. T 2 . F 3. T 4. F 5. T 1. Fill in the missing dates. silent to check. - Now compare the information you a. 1907 find in the text and the information you b. 1909 c. 1910 predicted. - Read the text again and find the dates d. 1994 and events. - Call a student to read the events. - Call some Ss to read the dates. - T gives the dates. Matching - Ask ss to guess the meaning from the A B context. Matching a.Đại Tây Dương - Ask ss to do it individually, then 1.businessman (n) 2. Atlantic (n) b. Thương gia compare with a partner and give the 3. The Boy Scouts c. Hội nam nữ lửa result. of America (n) 4. The Girl Guides Association (n) 5.The Coeducational Camp Fire Boys and Girls (n) 6. (to) establish. 2. Answer - Now read the text and answer the Key. trại d. Hội nam hướng đạo sinh e. Hooin hướng dẫn viên nữ f. xây dựng, thiết lập.

(89) questions in individual. - Divide the class in to 2 teams Team : A and team : B - Let Ss play "Lucky number" - T corrects the answers and count the points. - Say the winners. - Ss clap their hands. - Call 2 Ss one asks and one answers the questions again. - T gives the key.. a. Scouting began in England in 1907. b. The meeting between a boy Scout and Mr. William Boyce led to the Scouts Association crossing the Atlantic in 1910. c. Girls can join the Girl Guides Association and camp Fire Boys and Girls. d. The three aims are building character, good citizenship and personal fitness. Post - Reading. - Close your book and summarize the main content of the text. - Call some Ss to speak. V- Homework: - Learn by heart all the new words. - Read the text again and try your best to remember main information of the text. - Write a paragraph about the Ho Chi Minh Young Pioneers. - Prepare part Write.. Week : 12 Period: 34. Preparing day: 21/11/2009 Teaching day: 25/11/2009. Unit 6: The young pioneers club Lesson 4 - Write A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know more activities of the HCM Young Pioneer and The Youth organization. They will able to write letters to say about the plan in the future base on a dialogue or an advertisement. B- Language contents: Vocabulary about activities in the community. Write a letter Revise the gerund C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Teaching aids: Extra board, reference books, work sheet E- Procedure:.

(90) I. Warm up: II. Checking the old lesson: A student answers the teacher's questions. 1. Where did Scouting begin ? 2. What led to the Scouts Association crossing the Atlantic in 1910 ? 3. How many Scouts were there in America in 1994 ? 4. Is there this organization in Vietnam ? III. New lesson: - T asks some questions concern the Pre - writing subject of the writing What is Y&Y ? Is the Y&Y in your school having some plans ? What are they ? - Look at your book. This is a notice 1. Read the passage and complete the from Y & Y to its members. You read it letter. and tell me what activities this Activities: organization is going to do. - Collecting used glass, paper and cans. - Raising funds for the poor. - Helping street children - T introduces some new words and - Plating trees and flowers phrases. Vocabulary - help the community: giúp đỡ cộng đồng - (to) encourage: khuyến khích - (to) participate: tham gia - recycling program (n): chương trình tái chế - Save natural resources: bảo vệ tài nguyên thiên nhiên - raise fund: gây quỹ - (to) register: đăng ký Key: 1. Community 6. Save 2. recycling 7. Raise 3. collect 8. Participating 4. send 9. Planting 5. recycling 10. Helping While - writing - Now read the notice again and then 2. Read the dialogue then write Hoa's complete Nga's letter to Linh. letter - Compare your letter with your partner. Dear Mom and Dad, - Call some Ss to read. I'm very happy to tell you that I'm going - T corrects. to join the Y&Y Green group of my - Call a student to read the letter aloud. school. The Green group is holding an - T introduces the situation of the environment month plan. We are going.

(91) dialogue. Hoa is talking to her aunt about the Y&Y Green group and its activities.. Now read the dialogue in pairs then imagine you are Hoa and write a letter to your parents. You can base on Nga's letter. - Compare your letters and correct mistakes for each other. - Call some Ss to read the letters. - T corrects typical mistakes.. to clean the banks of the lakes on weekends. We are going to plant trees and flowers in the school garden and water them every afternoon after class. We are planting young trees and plants to sell to other schools. We hope that we can give more green color to the city and earn some money for our school Y and Y. The program is very interesting and useful, isn't it ? I will tell you more about the group activities later. Love, Hoa Post - writing. - Answer the questions. 1. What activities does the Y&Y in your school often do ? 2. Do you like those activities ? 3. Which activity do you like best ? 4. What activities did the Y&Y do to celebrate the teacher's day ? III- Homework: - Read the letter of Nga and complete Hoa's letter. - Do the following exercise Give the correct form of the words in the brackets. 1. (Recycle) programs are very useful to protect the environment. 2. Our duty is to save (nature) resources. 3. All members in the class can enroll the Y&Y (organize). 4. You can keep these flowers fresh by (water) them everyday. - Prepare part Language focus.. Week : 12 Period: 35. Preparing day: 7/11/2010 Teaching day: 9/11/2010. Unit 6: The young pioneers club Lesson 5 - Language focus A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use the grammar above to make dialogues and complete the dialogues. Grammar: The present tense with future meaning, Gerunds, Modals : can, may, could. B- Teaching aids: extra board, teacher's book, reference books, work sheet..

(92) C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Procedure: I. Warm up: II. Checking the old lesson: Test 15' I. Complete the sentences. Use the suitable preposition.(4 pts) 1. People always go swimming ……… Sunday morning. 2. What time is it ? I want to see the news ………….seven o’clock. 3. Lan left his office 40 minutes ago. She will come back ………10 minutes. 4. The post office closes ………….9.00 p.m. If you arrive ………….9.00 pm, it will be closed. 5. All students must come there …………..13.00 and 13.30. II. Read the passage to answer the questions (6pts) Once a farmer lived a comfortable life with his family. His chickens laid many eggs which the farmer used to sell to buy food and clothing for his family. One day, he went to collect the eggs and discovered one of the chickens laid a gold egg. He shouted excitedly to his wife, “we’re rich, we’re rich !” His wife ran to him and they both looked at the egg in amazement. The wife wanted more, so her husband decided to cut open all the chickens and find more gold eggs. Unfortunately, he couldn’t find any eggs. When he finished all, the chickens were dead. There were no more eggs of any kinds for the foolish farmer and his greedy wife. Answer the questions: a) How was the farmer’s life ? ………………………………………………………………………………………… b) What did the farmer use to sell eggs to buy ? ………………………………………………………………………………………… c) What did he discover ? ………………………………………………………………………………………… d) Why did the farmer and his wife decide to cut open all the chickens ? ………………………………………………………………………………………… e) Did they find more gold eggs when they cut open all the chickens ? ………………………………………………………………………………………… Key: I. (4 pts) 1. on; 2. at; 3. in; 4. at, after; 5. between II. (6pts) 1. The farmer's life was comfortable. 2. The farmer used to sell to buy food and clothing for his family. 3. He discovered one of the chickens laid a gold egg. 4. Because the wife wanted more. 5. No, they didn't. III. New lesson:.

(93) 1. Work with a partner. Ask and answer - Look at the table questions about Y&Y spring activity - Read the activity, please program. - T introduces some new words. Vocabulary - collect and empty garbage: thu gom rác - Ss read the eg in book. - gather to support cultural-sport - Work in pairs, ask and answer about programs: tập trung cổ vũ phong trào the activities given. văn nghệ, TDTT - Call some Ss to practice.. + When do they plant the trees and water the trees along the street ? help the elderly and street children ? have a big gathering to support cultural-sport programs ? On Feb 2 Mar 26 Apr 15 + Where do they plant the trees and water the trees along the street ? help the elderly and street children ? have a big gathering to support cultural-sport programs ? In the City center streets. The rest home and orphanage. At the central stadium. What do you think about the tense is * beside "will" and "be going to" we used in this exercise ? can use the present simple tense to - T explains. express an arranged action that will happen in the future. 2. Work with a partner. - Ask Ss to look at the table and the eg in book. - Call 2 Ss to read the eg in book. Love - Remark the verbs after "love, like, Like + Ving hate" ? Hate "Ving" is a gerund. - Ask Ss to practice in pairs using the information in the table. - Call some pairs to practice. - Now copy the table in to your exercise book and complete it with information about you. - Practice in pairs. 3. Work with a partner. - T gives 2 situations and calls Ss to ask for favors and offer assistance. - T calls Ss to retell the structures they learnt..

(94) - Divide the class in to groups. Group 1: Dialogue A Group 2: Dialogue B Group 3: Dialogue C Group 4: Dialogue D - Choose a pair of each group to practice the dialogues. - T corrects. - Work in pairs to complete the dialogues with the expressions in the boxes on page 55. - Call some pairs to practice. - T corrects.. A: buy a ticket B: take me across the road. C: help me with this math problem D: water the flowers in the garden.. Can I..............? Do you need .................? Let me help you. Very kind of you.. III- Consolidation: - T retells the structures. - Guide Ss to do parts b,c of ex 1 (P. 38,39) - Call Ss to do. IV- Homework: - learn by heart all the structures - Complete ex 1 - Guide Ss to do ex 4 (P 41,42), ex 5 (P 42), ex 6 (P 43). - Revise knowledge from Unit 4 to Unit 6. Week : 12 Period: 36. Preparing day: 7 / 11/ 2010 Teaching day:13/ 11/ 2010. Revision A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to consolidate the knowledge from Unit 4 to Unit 6. Understand and use them exactly. Vocabulary concern past events, instructions, favors andassistance. Grammar: + The past simple + Prepositions of time. + Used to + Adverbs of manner. + Commands, requests and advice in reported speech. + Present simple with future meaning + Gerunds + Modals: may ,can, could B- Teaching aids: Extra board, work sheet, reference books. C- Work arrangements: Individual, pair works, group works D- Procedure: I. Checking the old lesson:.

(95) During the period II. New lesson: - T uses an extra A. Unit 4. Our past board to 1. The past simple tense consolidate the Use: actions happen in the past grammar. Form: Be Do you remember V the past simple Note: irregular verbs. tense? 2. Prepositions of time. Tell me use ? In, on , at, after, before, after, between. Who can give the form ? Give an 3. Used/ (to) be used to example. ***Used to: habits in the past. Habits have changed now. Do you remember Form: the other use of the (+) S + used to + V present simple (-) S + didn't + use to + V tense ? What is it ? (?) Did (Didn't) + S + use to + V ? Give me the form ? *** Used to: Quen dần với cái gì, vieeecj gì. (+) S + am / is / are + used to + V-ing - T gives some (-) S + am not/ isn’t / aren’t + used to + Ving sentences on the (?) Are / Is S +used to + V-ing ? extra board and B. Unit 5. Study habits. asks Ss to 1. Adverb of manner complete the - Most adverbs of manner are formed from adjectives. sentences with the Adj (ly) -> adv prepositions of Eg: beautiful -> beautifully time they learnt. Bad -> badly Retell the Hard -> hard prepositions of Fast -> fast time and uses of 2. Câu mệnh lệnh gián tiếp. them. Eg1. “ Please give Tim this dictionary.” Miss Jackson said to - Give me an eg me. with "used to". Miss Jackson told me to give you this dictionary. - Retell form and Eg1. “ Don’t give Tim this dictionary.” Miss Jackson said to use of "used to" ? me. Miss Jackson told me not to give you this dictionary. S + told + O + to – infinitive……. not to – infinitive….. 3. Câu yêu cầu gián tiếp. Eg1. “ Can you give Tim this dictionary.” Miss Jackson said to me. Miss Jackson asked me to give you this dictionary. Eg1. “ Can’t give Tim this dictionary.” Miss Jackson said to me. Retell form of Miss Jackson áked me not to give you this dictionary. adverbs of S + asked + O + to – infinitive……. manner ? Use? not to – infinitive…...

(96) 4. Lời khuyên gián tiếp Eg1. “Tim should work harder on his Spanish pronunciation” Retell names of Mis Jackson said. modal verbs you Miss Jackson said you should work harder on your Spanish learnt from Unit 4 pronunciation. to Unit 6 ? S + said + S + should + V (bare) shouldn’t C. Unit 6. The young pioneers club. 1. Present simple with future meaning Use: timetable, plan Form: be V S + am / is / are + Ving 2. Gerunds Eg1. We (start) (play) soccer 2 years ago. started playing A. Các động từ đi kèm với GERUND 1. admit: thừa nhận 2. allow: cho phép 3. avoid: tránh khỏi 4. can't stand = can’t bear: không chịu nổi 5. can’t help: không thể không 6. cancel: từ bỏ 7. consider = think about: cân nhắc, tính toán 8. discuss = talk about; bàn luận về,.. 9. deny: từ chối 10. dislike = hate = detest: không ưa, không thích 11. enjoy= like =love: thích, khoái 12. escape: trốn thoát 13. fancy: tưởng tượng 14. finish: kết thúc 15. forgive: tha thứ 16. feel like: thích 17. give up = quit: từ bỏ 18. imagine: tưởng tượng 19. involve: liên quan đến 20. keep = keep on = continute = carry on: tiếp tụ S+ 21. intend: dự định + Ving 22. mention: đề cập đến 23. mind; phiền lòng 24. miss: lỡ, nhỡ 25. need: cần được..... 26. permit: cho phép 28. postpone = delay = put off = defer: hoãn lại 29. practise: thực hành 30. prevent ( from): ngăn cản.

(97) 31. propose = suggest: đề nghị 32. prohibit: cấm đoán 32. risk; rủi ro 33. recall: gọi lại 34. remember: nhớ lại 35. regret: hối tiếc 36. stop: dừng lại 37. start = begin: bắt đầu 38. try: thử 39. look forward to: mong ngóng 40. It’s no use / good / not worth : thật vô ích B> Một số động từ đi kèm với giới từ. 1. adapt to : thích nghi với 2. adjust to : điều chỉnh cho 3. agree ( with s.o ) on : đồng ý ( với ai đó) 4. apologize ( to s.o) for : xin lỗi ( ai) 5. approve of : tán thành , bằng lòng 6. argue ( with s.o) about : giận ai về ( cái gì đó ) 7. ask about : hỏi về 8. believe in : tin tưởng 9. blame for : đổ lỗi 10. care about : quan tâm + V - ing 11. complain ( to s.o ) about : phàn nàn về 12. concentrate on : tập trung vào 13. consist of : bao gồm 14. decide on : quyết dịnh 15. depend on : fụ thuộc vào 16. disapprove of : kô tán thành 17. discourage ( someone) from : làm ( ai đó) nản lòng 18. engage in : tham gia 19. forgive ( someone ) for : tha thứ ( ai đó) về 20. help ( someone ) with : giúp đỡ (ai) C. Các cụm dộng từ đi kém với GERUND 1. looking forward to: mong ngóng 2. used to: quên dần với 3. afraid of: sợ 4. interested in: thích, quan tâm 5. fond of: thích S + (to)be + 6. bored with: chán + Ving 7. tired of: mệt 8. fed up with: chán 9. good at: giỏi về 10. bad at: tồi về 11. excited about: hào hứng về 12. proud of: tự hào về 13. ashamed of: xấu hổ về.

(98) 14. suprised at: ngạc nhiên về 15. ready for: sẵn sàng về 16. pleased at: vui vì 17. disappointed with:thất vọng với 18 accustomed to: quen với 19 capable of: có khả năng 20 fed up with: chán 21 responsible for: chịu trách nhiệm về D. Một số loại đặc biệt khác. Lưu ý: ta có thể sử dụng tính từ sở hữu trước danh động từ Ex: I dislike his looking at me. 1. After + Ving: sau khi 2. Before + Ving: trước khi 3. without + Ving: maf khoong, khoong cos 4. S + spend + (time) + Ving: dành thời gian làm gì. 5. S + have difficulty (in0 + Ving: gặp khó khăn khi làm gì Exercise T gives exercise on the extra board, asks Ss to do and then corrects. Ex1: Fill a suitable preposition of time in each gap. 1. What do you do..... Sunday ? 2. I was born .......................January 1st, 1992. 3. It often rains .....................October in Vietnam. 4. We often have English lesson .............7.00 and 8.00. 5. What are you going to do ..................2008 ? 6. I often do my homework...........the evening. 7. What do you usually do .........Sunday morning ? 8. I have lesson at 7.00 so I often go to school..........7.00. Key: 1. on 2. On 3. In 4. Between 5. In 6. In 7. On 8. Before. Ex 2: Change these sentences in to reported speech. 1. "Please lend me your dictionary, Quang", said Hoa. -> Hoa told Quang................................................................................................... 2. "Can you help me with my homework ?" Minh said to her sister . ->Minh asked Quang............................................................................................... 3. "You shouldn't translate each sentence in to Vietnamese" my brother told me. ->My brother told me ............................................................................................. Key: 1. Hoa told Quang to lend her his dictionary. 2. Minh asked Quang to help him with his homework. 3. My brother told me I shouldn't translate each sentence in to Vietnamese Ex 3: Choose a,b or c to complete these sentences. 1. I..........on a farm when I was a young boy. a. used live b. used to living c. used to live 2. My grandma...........go to school because she had to stay at home and help around.

(99) the house. a. doesn't b. didn't c. isn't 3. She used to cook the meal and ...............the garden. a. watered b. waters c. water 4. My father used to ............stories in the evening. a. say b. tell c. ask 5. I went to school today and your teacher ...............me your report card. a. give b. gives c. gave 6. You did very..............in your study. a. good b. excellent c. well 7. I am proud...........you, my son. a. of b. with c. about 8. Your teacher ..........you should work harder. a. told b. asked c. said 9. The doctor asked Mr Ba.......to bed on time. a. go b. go to c. to go 10. Students should work ..........to make their parents happy. a. hard b. hardly c. to hard 11. Could you..........me a favor, please ? a. get b. do c. make 12. What .........I do for you ? a. can b. may c. need Key: 1. c 2.b 3.c 4.b 5.c 6.c 7.a 8.c 9.c 10.a 11.b 12.a IV- Homework: - Learn by heart all the knowledge from Unit 4 to Unit 6 - Prepare for the test 45 minutes next period.. Week : 13 Period: 37. Preparing day: Teaching day:. Test 45 minutes A- Objectives: Check Ss' knowledge from Unit 4 to Unit 6. Base on Ss' results to control the method to help Ss revise the old knowledge and learn new knowledge better. Ss will be able to complete the test exactly be the end of the lesson..

(100) B- Language contents: Vocabulary Gerunds, present simple tense, past simple tense, 3 skills. C- Work arrangements: Individual D- Teaching aids: Paper E- Procedure: I. Setting class: II. Checking the old lesson: Checking Ss preparation. III. New lesson: 1. Ojectives: Listening: Ss listen to a text about the position of things in house. Reading: Read a text about Y and Y’ activities. Writing: Write a paragraph about traditional story ….. Language: Check their pronunciation and choose the best option to complete the sentences which are about daily activities and about build or charaters of people. 2. Ma trận: Chủ đề Nhận biết Thông hiểu Vận dụng Tổng KQ TL KQ TL KQ TL KQ TL I. Listening 5 5 2 2 II. Reading 5 5 2 2 III. Language focus 10 5 15 2 1 3 IV. Writing 3 7 10 1,5 3 1.5 Tổng 13 10 5 7 35 3.5 3 2 1,5 10. Cong Lac secondary school Name: …………………………... Mark. The second test of the first term Date:….Month….2009. Teacher’s remark. I - Listen to the tape then choose the best option for each gap. Circle it. (2 pts) 1. It was a ..............school. a. big b. small c. very small 2. The teacher said there were ........in the year..

(101) a. 1 b. 3 c. 4 3. The teacher said in ...............there were many flowers in the field and gardens. a. spring b. summer c. winter 4. "In winter it often ..........", said the teacher. a. walks b. cold c. rains 5. .........talked when the teacher was teaching. a. Tom b. Bob c. Mary II. Choose the word whose the underlined part is pronounced differently from the other. Identify your answer by circling the corresponding letter A, B, C or D. (1 pt) 1. a. tiger b. wife c. wisdom d. fire 2. a. named b. lived c. learned d. washed 3. a. great b. please c. greedy d. reach 4. a. young b. lunch c. enough d. humor 5. a. proud b. hour c. your d. sound III. Circle the best one (A, B , C or D) to complete each one below. (2 pts) 1. She was born ...............June ……. 1990. A. of / at B. at / in C. on / in D. in/ in 2. She was born and grew up in Vietnam, so her .................... is Vietnamese. A. mother tongue B. first language C. foreign language D. both A and B are correct 3. “May I help you?” - “ .................. ” A. What can I do for you? B. I’m afraid. I’m busy now. C. Yes. That’s very kind of you. C. How can I help? 4. I often play soccer………………Sunday afternoon . A. in B. on C. at D. for 5. Last year, Hoa and Lan………………….to the same school. A. go B. went C. goes D. to go 6. Nam must………………….his mother do the housework. A. help B. to help C. helped D. helping 7. I will be back .................. 8.30 and 9.30. A. at B. between C. from D. in 8. My elder sister enjoys ......................... A. cook B. to cook C. cooking D. cooks 9. Tam told his friend .......................... him a ride. A. give B. to give C. giving D. gives 10. My grand mother didn’t use to ........................ to school when she was young. A .going B. to go C. to going D. go IV. Read the following passage and write the answers . (2 pts) How the Y & Y members help the community. The Y & Y is planning to help the community by encouraging all members to participate in a recycling program. All you have to do is to collect used glass, paper and cans, and send them for recycling. By doing this, we can help saving natural resources and earn some money for the organization. If possible, you can participate in other programs such as raising funds for the poor, helping street children and planting trees, flowers along the sidewalk or in the parks. If you do well all the plans as shown, you will make your life become more beautiful and lively.. 1/. Do the Y & Y members collect used glass ? ………………………………………………………………………………………… 2/. After collecting cans, what do the Y & Y members do with them ? ………………………………………………………………………………………… 3/. Do they take part in the program: raising funds for the rich ?.

(102) ………………………………………………………………………………………… 4/. Where do the Y & Y members plant flowers ? ………………………………………………………………………………………… 5/. What advice does the writer give in the end ? ………………………………………………………………………………………… V. Rewrite the following sentences into reported speech.(1.5 pts.) 1. “Can you open the window?”. My brother said to me My mother ………………………………………………………………… 2. “please clean the house’’. My sister said to me. My sister ……………………………………………………………………. 3. “You should stop smoking ’’. The doctor said to him. The doctor said to him……………………………………………………….. VI. Rewrite the sentences using the words given below. (1.5 pts) 1. Once / a poor farmer / have / daughter / name / Little Pea. ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 2. After / her mother / die / her father / marry / again. ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3. The stepmother / be / cruel / Little Pea. ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 4. Little Pea / have to / do / chores / all day. ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 5. The stepmother / make / new clothes / Stout Nut. ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 6. The fairy / appear / change / Little Pea’s rags / beautiful clothes. ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 7. The Prince / find / lost shoe / decide / marry / Little Pea.. Key and points. I (2,5 pts) 1.b 2.c 3.b 4.c 5.a II (1 pt) 1. c 2. d 3. a 4. d 5. c III (2pts) 1. D 2. D 3. C 4. B 5. B 6. A 7. B 8. C 9. B 10. D IV (2 pts) 1.Yes, they do. 2. They send them for recycling. 3. No, they don’t. 4. The plant flowers along the sidewalk or in the parks. 5. If we do well all the plans as shown, you will make your life become more beautiful and lively. V. (1.5pts) 1. My brother asked me to open the window. 2. My sister told me to clean the house. 3. The doctor said to him that he should stop smoking. VI. (1.5 pts) 1.Once a poor farmer had a daughter named Little Pea. 2. after her mother died, her father married again. 3. The stepmother was cruel to Little Pea. 4. Little Pea had to do chores all day..

(103) 5. The stepmother made new clothes for Stout Nut. 6. The fairy appeared and changed Little Pea’s rags into beautiful clothes. 7. The Prince found the lost shoes and decided to marry Little Pea. Tape transcript. The best time for apples It was the first lesson after the summer holidays at a small school in England. The lesson was about the seasons of the year. "There are four seasons in the year" , said the teacher. "They are Spring, Summer, Autumn and Winter. In Spring it is warm and everything begins to grow. In summer it is hot and there are many flowers in the fields and gardens. In Autumn there are many vegetables and much fruit. Everybody likes to eat fruit. In Winter it its cold and it often rains. Sometimes there is snow on the ground." Here the teacher stopped and looked at one of the pupils, "Stop talking, Tom," he said. "Now listen to me. Can you tell us when is the best time of apples ? " "Yes, sir," answered Tom. "It is when the farmer is not at home and there is not dog in the garden".. IV- Collecting the tests and remark the period. V- Homework: - Redo the test at home. - Prepare Unit 7: Getting started + Listen and read. Week : 13 Period: 38. Preparing day: Teaching day: 4/122009. Unit 7: My neighborhood Lesson 1 - Getting started + listen and read A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know something about the present perfect tense with "for" and "since" They will have time to revise the words about neighborhood. Ss will be able to understand the dialogue between Nam and Na and complete the exercise "Complete the sentences " exactly. B- Language contents: Vocabulary concern the neighborhood. Grammar: The present perfect tense with "for" and "since" C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Teaching aids: Extra board, cassette tape, pictures, reference books. E- Procedure: I. Setting class: II. Checking the old lesson: A student makes 5 sentences with "like " and "hate" III. New lesson: - Look at the pictures in book *****Getting started There are the places in a neighborhood. Match the name of places found in a - Look at the words in the box. neighborhood with the pictures. Who can read the words aloud ? - Work in groups (each table is a group) match the names of places with Answer.

(104) the pictures. - Call some Ss to read the answers. - T corrects.. - T asks and Ss answer Where do you live, in the city or in the countryside ? What is this ? Is there a wet market near your house ? How often do you get there ? - Now work in pairs. Choose a place and make a dialogue with it. - Imagine you are at one of the place given. - Call some pairs to practice. - T corrects. - T introduces the situation of the dialogue between Nam and Na. Na has just come to a new place and now she is talking to Nam. She wants to ask for information and assistance. - Now look at the dialogue and listen to the tape. - Find new words. - T teaches new words by using simple pictures on the board by activities. - Ask Ss to practice reading new words. - Listen to the tape again. - Practice the dialogue in pairs. - Call some pairs to read. - T corrects Ss' pronunciation. - T introduces grammar. a. grocery store b. stadium c. wet-market d. drug store e. hair dresser's f. swimming-pool In the countryside A wet market Yes, there is Once a week.. *****Listen and read. Vocabulary - area (n): Vùng miền - close by: gần - corner (n): góc - (to) serve : phục vụ - pancake (n): bánh xèo - delicious (a): ngon - for (adv): khoảng - since (adv): từ 1. Practice the dialogue with a partner. 2. Complete the sentences. Use the words from the dialogue. a. new b. last week c. tired d. restaurant e. Hue - Now read the dialogue again and find f. pancakes words to fill in the gaps. Model sentences - Share your answers. 1. We've been here since last week. - Call some Ss to give answers. (We have) - T corrects. 2. We have lived here for about ten years. - Find the sentences in the present Form: perfect tense. S + have / has + P2 + since…… for………..

(105) Use: Thì hiện tại hoàn thành dùng để diễn tả hành động xảy ra bắt đầu trong quá khứ, còn liên quan đến hiện tại hoặc đang xảy ra ở hiện tại hoặc để lại kết quả ở tương lai. IV- Consolidation: - Discuss in groups. Talk about your neighborhood. - Call some Ss to speak - Ask ss to play a game: Noughts and crosses Using S + have / has + P2 + since…… for………. live learn English be a student arrive here watch this film listen to that song V- Homework: - Learn by heart all the new words. - Read the dialogue many times at home - Write a passage about your neighborhood. -Do ex 1, 2, 3 (44, 45) - Prepare Speak + Listen. play soccer wait for me visit Hanoi Capital.

(106) Week : 13 Period: 39. Preparing day: 5 / 12 / 2009 Teaching day: 7 / 12/ 2009. Unit 7: My neighborhood Lesson 2 - Speak + Listen A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know something when they want to send a letter or a parcel at the post office. After reading the sample dialogue Ss will be able to use the vocabulary given to make their own dialogues. In part Listen Ss will be able to know what Na is going to do on the weekend. They will be able to fill the right phrases given in the advertisements and to confirm the information True or False or no information. B- Language contents: Vocabulary concern sending letter or parcel and advertisements. C- Work arrangements: Individual, pair, group D- Teaching aids: Extra board, work sheet, cassette tape, pictures, reference books. E- Procedure: I. Setting class: II. Checking the old lesson: T gives 6 pictures and asks a student to say names of the pictures. 2 Ss practice the dialogue, write the structure of the present perfect tense III. New lesson: - Look at the picture in book and A. Speak answer the questions. Pre - Speaking Where are 2 women ? 1. Practice the dialogue with a partner. What is the woman in blue doing ? Do you often send parcel or letter by airmail or surface mail ? Can you tell me the charges ? - Now practice the dialogue with a partner. - T introduces some new words. Vocabulary - T uses the situation and pictures to - parcel (n): bưu phẩm help Ss know the meanings of the new - airmail (n): thư gửi bằng đường hàng words. không - surface mail (n): thư gửi bằng đường bộ - item (n): vật phẩm - weight (n): cân nămgj - (to) weigh: cân - Call some pairs to read the dialogue. - charge (n): cước phí.

(107) - Answer the questions. Who wanted to send a parcel ? What did the clerk do to know the charge of the parcel ? Did Mrs Kim send the parcel surface or airmail ? Why ?. - Look at the information. - Now base on the dialogue you're practiced and the information provided to make similar dialogues. - T calls 2 Ss to make a dialogue. - T gives notes: With the information you use charge for surface or airmail not for 2 kinds like the dialogue in part 1. - Call some pairs to practice. - T corrects mistakes. - Now work in pairs to make up more dialogues in different places such as market, bookshop... - Call some pairs to practice.. Mrs Kim wanted to send a parcel. She weighed it. She sent it surface. Because it is cheaper. Clerk: Can I help you? You: I want to send this parcel to Quy Nhon. Clerk: Do you want to send it airmail or surface mail? You: Sureface mail please. How much is it? Clerk: I'll weigh it. It's 5,000 grams. That's 19,200 dong. You: All right. Thank you. Parcel /Quy Nhon / suerface mail / 5,000g While - Speaking 2. Look at the following brochure and the information in the box. Make similar dialogues. Eg: S1: Good morning. What can I do for you ? S2: I want to send this letter to Kontum. S1: Do you want to send it airmail or surface mail ? S2: I want to send it surface mail. How much is it ? S1: It's 800 dong. S2: That's fine. S1: All right. Post - Speaking B. Listen Pre - Listening 1. Listen to the conversation then fill the blank in each of the advertisement with one phrase from the box.. - T asks Do you remember Na ?. Vocabulary A 1. town ground 2. English speaking contest (n) 3. cultural house. B a.Cuộc thi b. Rạp chiếu phim Thiên Niên kỷ c. Nhà nhiếp ảnh.

(108) - T introduces the situation of listening exercise. - Now look at the phrases and programs in your book. - T introduces some new words.. - Now read the advertisements and guess the place and program to fill the blank in the advertisement. - Now listen to the tape and fill in each of the advertisement. - Check your predictions. - Call some Ss to give the answers. - Let Ss listen to the tape again. - T corrects. - Now read the sentences and guess if they are True, False or No information. - Listen to the tape and confirm the information. - Check your predictions and compare with your partner. - T gives answer. - Let Ss play chain game to retell the main content of listening.. (n) 4. millennium cinema (n) 5. photographer (n) 6. the new comer (n): 7. vs=versus (v). d. Thi đấu với e. nhà văn hóa f. Sân vận động g. người mới đến.. While - Listening Answer 1. the new comer 2. town ground 3. English speaking contest 4. cultural house 2. Listen to the conversation again and check (V) the correct box for True, False or No information. a. True b. False c. False d. True e. True f. No information Post - Listening. - Homework: - Learn by heart all the new words. - Try your best to remember the main content of the listening. - Do ex 4, 5 (46) workbook. Ex 7 (47) workbook - Prepare part Read.. Week : 14 Period: 40. reparing day: 5/ 12 / 2009 eaching day: 9 / 12 / 2009. Unit 7: My neighborhood Lesson 3 - Read A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know the information about a shopping mall with some new words. They will be able to confirm the information T or F and answer the questions. B- Language contents: Vocabulary concern the sopping mall..

(109) Grammar: Revise the present perfect tense. C- Work arrangements: Individual, pair, group D- Teaching aids: Extra board, reference books, pictures, teacher's book. E- Procedure: I. Setting class: II. Checking the old lesson: S1: tell me something about the activities in his/ her community. S2: tell me some main contents of the listening. III. New lesson: - T asks. Pre - Reading Do you often go shopping ? If yes with whom ? Where do you often buy everything ? Do you know any big supermarkets ? Are there any supermarkets in your community ? - Look at the advertisement in book and guess the content of the text. - Read the advertisement and check your prediction. A shopping mall is open today but there are some opinions about it Vocabulary - Now look at the text. Read it and - customer (n): khách hàng try your best to guess the meanings - shopping mall (n): trung tâm thương mại of the new words. - roof (n): mái nhà - T introduces the meanings of the - convenient (a): thuận tiện new words base on the context of - hot and humid : nóng và ẩm ướt the text. - air - conditioned(a): được trang bị máy lạnh - comfort (a): thoải mái - products: sản phẩm - special discount: sự giảm giá đặc biệt -Ask ss to tick (V) before things are (to) notice: lưu tâm, lưu ý in Tran Phu shopping mall. .......1. 50 air - conditioned .......2. floors .......3. 10 restaurants .......4. 8 Tvs .......5. 4 movie theaters -Ask ss to guess individually, then compare with a partner and give the result. While - Reading - Ask ss to open the books , read in.

(110) silent and check. - Ask ss to do Ex Matching.. A B 1. owner (n) a. hàng hóa 2. (to) take one's b. ông chủ business c. sự lựa chọn 3. goods (n) d. lấy đi cơ hội làm 4. selection ăn 5. resident (n): e. tập trung 6. (to) concern f. người dân. - Ask Ss to read the text and confirm the information True or False. - Share your answers. - Call some Ss to read the answers aloud and explain why they choose T or F. - T corrects. - Read the text again - Work in pairs. Ask and answer the questions in book - Divide the class in to 2teams, name the teams - let Ss play the game "Lucky numbers" - T corrects and says the winners.. 1. True or false ? Check (V) the boxes. a. F The mall is open daily ( 7 days a week) b. F. There are 50 stores in the mall. c. F. Not everyone is pleased about the new mall. d. T e. T 2. Answer Answers a. It is very different from the present shopping area. All the shops are under one roof.. That will be very convenient, especially during the hot and humid summer months. Customers will shop in comfort and won't notice the weather. b. In the shopping mall, there are 50 air conditioned special stores , 4 movie theaters and 10 restaurants, there is also a children's play area. c. They think the new shopping mall will take their business. d. The stores in the mall will offer a wider selection of products , some kinds of goods are cheaper prices.. List the advantages and disadvantages of going shopping in a shopping mall.. Post - Reading Advantages Disadvantages Convenient Expensive. - Ask Ss to retell the main contents of the text. IV- Homework: - Learn by heart all the new words - Read the text at home and try your best to remember the main content of the text..

(111) - Revise the knowledge in Units 4,5,6 to correct test 45 minutes next period. Week : 14 Period: 41. Preparing day: 5 / 12/ 2009 Teaching day: 11 / 12/ 2009. Unit 7: My neighborhood Lesson 4 - Write A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know the structures of a notice and they will be able to write a notice with specific content in English exactly. B- Language contents: The structure of a notice, writing skill C- Work arrangements: Individual, pair, group D- Teaching aids: Extra board, work sheet, reference books E- Procedure: I. Setting class: II. Checking the old lesson: Call s student to retell the main content of the text about the shopping mall. III. New lesson: - T asks some questions before Ss Pre - writing read the notice. What do you remember about the shopping mall we learnt last period ? Besides its positive effects, does it bring about any negative ones ? What are they ? As you know, the new shopping mall 1. Read the community notice. has affected the small shops. Thus, these store owners organize a meeting to discuss the effects of the new shopping mall. You read the notice Vocabulary and tell me the notice. - store owner (n): chủ cửa hàng - T guides Ss to know the meanings of - effect (n): sự ảnh hưởng the new words. - hardware store (n): của hàng bán đồ kim khí - (to) contact: liên hệ - Look at the notice again and tell me * A notice usually includes: What information are there in a notice Topic ? Date - Ask Ss to copy the structures Time (Note: When we write a notice we Place don't write full sentences) Participants. While - writing 2. Write a notice about the English.

(112) - Look at the passage. Read it and write a notice. - Share your writing and correct mistakes. - Call some Ss to read their notices - T corrects mistakes with Ss. Speaking Contest. Notice The school English Speaking Club. Holding a speaking contest to celebrate the teacher's day. Date: November 15 Time: 7.30 p m to 10.00 p m Place: Hall 204, Building G Please contact Tran Thi Thu Hang of class 8H at the above address for more information. Post - writing 3. Write one or two notices... - Let Ss write in small groups Y & Y of 8A - Try your best to finish your notices Organizing a picnic to Ao Vua quickly. on Monday - Call some Ss to read the notice Date: October 3 - T corrects Time: 6.30 am - T gives a notice as a prompt Place starts: School gate Please contact the monitor Nguyen Anh Tuan at 747 590 for further information. IV- Homework: - Choose a topic and write a notice. - Guide Ss to do ex 3 (P. 44, 45), ex 4 (P. 45, 46); ex 5 (P. 46) - Prepare Language focus..

(113) Week : 15 Period: 42. Preparing day: 12/12 /2009 Teaching day: 14/12/2009. Unit 7: My neighborhood language focus A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to complete all the exercises using the present perfect tense and the comparison. B- Language contents: Grammar: The present perfect tense with "for" and "since" Comparison with: like; (not) as.......as; (not) the same as; different from. C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Teaching aids: Pictures, reference books, extra board E- Procedure: I. Setting: II. Checking the old lesson: S1: Read the notice last period S2: Do ex 4 (P. 45,46) III. New lesson: Note: past participle + regular verbs 1. Match each verb to its part participle. + irregular verbs - Look at the verbs in book and then be-been see-seen match each verb to its past go-gone do-done participle eat-eaten write-written - Share your answers live-lived work-worked - Call Ss to read the answer attend-attended collect-collected - T corrects. 2. Complete the expressions. Use " for"or since" " "for": a period of time "since": a point of time - Retell use of "for" and "since" in for 5 minutes for 3 hours the present perfect tense. since January for 10 weeks since 1990 since Friday - Work in pairs to complete the since the summer for 20 years expressions. - Call some Ss to read the answer 3. Complete the sentences. Use the present.

(114) - T corrects.. perfect form of the verbs in the brackets.. - Call a student to retell the structures of the present perfect tense ? (+), (-), (?) - Share your answers - Call Ss to read the sentences - T corrects. b. haven't eaten c. haven't seen d. have attended e. has worked f. has collected 4. Complete the conversation. Use the correct form of the verbs in the box. (1) have been (5) want (2) hope (6) looks (3) have lived (7) have... been - Guide Ss to do exercise (4) is (8) have seen - Ask Ss to work in pairs 5. Complete the sentences Note: the tenses. * Comparison of adjectives. - Call some Pairs to read the + Difference: complete dialogue different from - T corrects + Same: the same as Who can tell me the ways of + Equal: comparison of adjectives you (not) as/ so .......as...... learnt ? - T retells some structures. - Look at the pictures and the c. different from; not as/so cheap as adjectives in the box. d. the same as - Now complete the sentences in e. as cheap/ expensive as suitable comparison of the f. different from adjectives g. as long as (Note: some adjs can be used more h. not as modern as than once) i. not as/ so cheap as - Ask Ss to work in pairs. - Compare your answers - Call some Ss to read - T corrects IV- Consolidation: - T calls Ss to retell the structures of the lesson. V- Homework: - Redo all the exercises - Learn by heart all the structures - Guide Ss to complete the rest of the exercises in work book. - Prepare Unit 8: Getting started + Listen and read Week : 14 Period: 42. Preparing day: 12/12/2009 Teaching day: 16/12/2009.

(115) Correct test 45 minutes A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know what they learnt well and what they learnt not well to control the methods to revise the old knowledge they learnt and learn next time better. B- Correct the test: I. Yêu cầu HS xác định lại đề bài trong bài kiểm tra. II. Nhận xét: A. Ưu điểm: - HS làm bài và nộp bài đầy đủ, đúng thời gian quy định. - HS tập trung làm bài và có ý thức hoàn thành bài kiểm tra. - Có nhiều HS trình bày bài kiểm tra sạch sẽ, chữ viết đẹp. B. Nhược điểm: - Bên cạnh nhứng HS viết chữ đẹp, trình bày bài kiểm tra sạch sẽ còn có nhiều HS viết chữ cẩu thả, trình bày kiểm tra luộm thuộm. - Còn nhiều HS không học bài kĩ trước khi làm bài kiểm tra nên làm bài sai và lạc đề. - Các lớp B, còn nhìn bài của nhau. C. Thông báo kết quả: GV thông báo kết quả từ điểm cao xuống thấp theo số điểm bộ môn từ đó rút ra kinh nghiệm học bài và làm bài cho HS. Lớp <5 5-<8 8 - 10 Số lượng % Số lượng % Số lượng % 8A 8B D. Tuyên dương, phê bình: * Tuyên dương: GV tuyên dương những HS làm bài tốt, đạt điểm cao. * Phê bình: GV nhắc nhở phê bình những HS làm bài yếu kém. III. Chữa lỗi sai: I. Loại bài tập nghe hiểu: - Hầu hêt HS làm bài này tốt vì phù hợp với trình độ của các em. - HS lớp 8A làm tương đổi tốt, HS lớp 8B làm kém vì phát âm không chuẩn. II. Loại bài tìm từ có cách phát âm khác so với các từ còn lại. - Nhắc lại cách phát âm với ED, S và ES. Note: Cách phát âm S, ES, ED Cách phát âm S, ES là / S /, / Z /, / IZ / - Phát âm là / S / khi động từ có tận cùng là: f, k, p, t - Phât âm là / Z / khi động từ có tận cùng là: b, d, g, l, m, n, v, r, y - Phát âm là / IZ / khi dộng từ tận cùng là: s, sh, ch, x, z.

(116) Cách phát âm ED là / T /, / ID /, / D / - Phát âm là / T / khi động từ có tận cùng là: c (s), f, gh (f), k, p, s, sh, ch, - Phát âm là / ID / khi động từ có tận cùng là: t, d - Phát âm là / D / khi động từ có tận cùng là:còn lại III. Loại bài tập đọc đọan văn và trả lời câu hỏi: Vẫn còn hiện tượng HS nhầm lẫn giữa câu hỏi dạng Y –N với câu hỏi có từ để hỏi. Trả lời câu hỏi Yes / No khi mở đầu câu hỏi lag Are / Is / Do / Does / Did / Have / Has. Eg1. Are you a teacher? Yes, I am. / No, I am not. Eg2. Is he a good student? Yes, he is / No, he isn’t. Eg3. Do you go to school by bike? Yes, I do. / No, I don’t. Eg4. Does Lan often get up very early in the morning? Yes, she does. / No, she doesn’t. Eg5. Did you watch TV last night? Yes, I did. / No, I didn’t. Chú ý: Khi trả lời không phải lag câu hỏi Y / N ta phải chú ý: Thường thì trong câu hỏi có chứa các từ going như trong câu trả lời vậy ta phải tìm ra sự lặp lại này để lấy câu trả lời. IV. Loại bài chọn đáp án đúng. 1. My brother asked me to open the window. 2. My sister told me to clean the house. 3. The doctor said to him that he should stop smoking. V. (1.5 pts) 1. Once a poor farmer had a daughter named Little Pea. 2. after her mother died, her father married again. 3. The stepmother was cruel to Little Pea. 4. Little Pea had to do chores all day. 5. The stepmother made new clothes for Stout Nut. 6. The fairy appeared and changed Little Pea’s rags into beautiful clothes. 7. The Prince found the lost shoes and decided to marry Little Pea. C. Homework - Revise the knowledge you learnt not well at home. - Redo the exercise at home - Prepare part Write. 1. Read the text and answer the questions below: John has been worried all the week. Last Tuesday he received a letter from the local police. In the letter he was asked to call at the police station. John wondered why he was wanted by the police, but he went to the police station yesterday and now he is not worried any more. At the station he was told by a smilling policeman that his bicycle was picked up five days ago in a small village four hundred miles away. It is now being sent to his home by train. John.

(117) was very surprised when he heard the news. He was amused too, because he never expected the bicycle to be found again. It was stolen twenty years ago when he was a boy of fifteen. 1.Who received a letter from the local police? ………………………………………………………………………………………… 2. Has he been worried all the weekend? ………………………………………………………………………………………… 3. When did he go to the police station? ………………………………………………………………………………………… 4. What happened to him at the police station? ………………………………………………………………………………………… 5. Why was he surprised and amused? ………………………………………………………………………………………… 6. How old is he now? ………………………………………………………………………………………… Question 2: Fill in the blanks with suitable prepositions: 1. I’m reading a book (1)……history (2)………Vietnam. 2. She doesn’t work (3)………the evenings and (4)……Saturday afternoons. 3. I talked (5)……… her (6)………. the phone yesterday. 4. Every day she goes (7)……….. school (8)………. foot. 5. James lives (1)……… a small flat (2)……….. Cambridge. He lives (3)………. two other boys. They are students (4)………. Cambridge University. They work hard during the week, but (5)………….. weekends they invite a lot of friends to their house. They cook a meal (6)………. their friends, and then they go out (7)………. the pub (8)………… a drink, or they stay (9)…………….. home and listen (10)…………. music. a. Does James live in a small or big flat? …………………………………………………………………………………………. b. Who does he live with? …………………………………………………………………………………………. c. What do they do during the week? …………………………………………………………………………………………. d. Do they invite a lot of friends to their house at weekends? …………………………………………………………………………………………. e. What do they do after having a meal? ………………………………………………………………………………………….. Week : 15 Period: 44. Preparing day: 12/12/2009 Teaching day: 18/12/2009. Unit 8: Country life and city life Lesson 1 - Getting started + listen and read A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know more about the country life and the city life. They will be able to understand the dialogue between Na and Hoa and answer the questions about it exactly. B- Language contents:.

(118) Vocabulary concern the country life and the city life Grammar: The present progressive tense to show changes. Comparative adjectives. C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Teaching aids: Picture, cassette tape, teacher's book, reference books. E- Procedure: I. Setting class: II. Checking the old lesson: S1: Do part b of ex 6 (P. 46) S2: Do parts a,b ,c of ex 7( P. 48) III. New lesson: T asks Getting started Where do you live in the countryside or in the city ? Have you been to the countryside ? (the city ?) T uses 2 pictures P1: The scenery in the countryside City Country P2: The scenery in the city noisy Peaceful - Look at the pictures and tell me the tall buildings Fresh air subject of the lesson ? - Divide the class in to small groups. - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and ask them what they know about the country and the city to make 2 lists of things in the country. - T draws a table on the board. And guides Ss to make the list. - Call some Ss to read the things in the table. - T corrects Listen and read - T introduces the situation of the Vocabulary dialogue. - relative (n): họ hàng - let Ss listen to the tape and find new - permanently (adv): vĩnh viễn, mãi mãi words. - medical facilities (n): cơ sở vật chất+ - T uses some methods to teach new - accessible (a): có thể sử dụng được words. - change for the better: thay đổi theo - Let Ss read the words in chorus. hướng tiến bộ - Checking by "Rub out and remember" - definitely (adv): chắc chắn - Ask ss to look at the dialogue and listen to the tape, then answer some questions below. 1? Who has been to Kim Lien village? - Na 2? Does she like loving in the village? - No, she doesn't. Because........ Why?.

(119) - Ask Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs. - Call some pairs to read. - let Ss listen to the tape again and find the answers to the questions. - Compare your answers . - Call some Ss to ask and answer in pairs - T corrects. 1. Practise the dialogue. 2. Answer the questions. a. Na has been to the countryside (Kim Lien village) b. She was there for the weekend (one day) c. The countryside is peaceful and quiet and there is nothing to do. d. There are no libraries, no movies, no supermarkets etc. e. Mary remote areas are getting electricity. People can now have things like refrigerators and TV, and medical facilities are more accessible. f. Ss' answer - T scans the present progressive tense Model sentence - Ask Ss to find the sentence using the 1. Things are changing in the tense countryside. - T explains the present progressive 2. Many remote areas are getting tense to show changes. electricity. 3. TV is bringing ot only information but also entertainment. Form: S + am / is / are + Ving Use: Dùng để diễn tả SV đang diễn tả hoặc sẽ diễn ra trong tương lai. ? Which sentence is telling us the 1. Medical facilities are more easily country life is changing for the better? accessible now. ? What's the form? S + (to) be + more + longadj + than + N / Pro. IV- Consolidation: - Talk about what you like and dislike in the countryside. - Call some Ss to speak. - T and Ss correct. V- Homework: - Learn by heart new words. - Practice the dialogue at home. - Write a paragraph about what you like and dislike in the country life. - Prepare Speak + Listen..

(120) Week : 15 Period: 45. Preparing day: 20 / 12/ 2009 Teaching day: 21 / 12/ 2009. Unit 8: Country life and city life Lessone 2 - Speak and listen A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about the changes of town in 2 pictures in book and the changes in the places they live. Ss will be able to complete the dialogue with correct words and phrases. They will be able to understand the content of the dialogue between Lan and aunt Hang and to make the similar dialogue. B- Language contents: Grammar: the present progressive tense to show changes Comparative of short and long adjectives. Revise the structures using in conversation on phone. C- Work arrangements: T=WC, individual, pair, group D- Teaching aids: Pictures, reference books, teacher's book , extra board E- Procedure: I. Setting class: II. Checking the old lesson: S1: Lists the things in the country and in the city S2: Answer the question Do you prefer living in the countryside or in the city ? Why ?.

(121) III. New lesson: - Ask Ss to look at 2 pictures in book - T asks and Ss answer What do you see in 2 pictures ? - T can use eliciting questions The houses ? The vehicles ? What you see in 2 pictures are the town 5 years ago and now. - Now work in pairs , please. Talking about the changes of the town by comparing 2 pictures and using the adjectives in the box. - t guides Ss to do exercise by using the eg to explain. Eg: Look at the houses in picture 1 (They are small and short) The houses in picture 2 (they are high and modern) We have a sentence to compare the houses in 2 pictures. The houses are getting more modern. - Ask Ss to work in pairs - Call some Ss to describe the changes - T corrects - Divide the class in to small groups (4 Ss in a group) - Now discuss about the changes in your hometown using the structure in part 1. - T gives prompts + the houses ? + the people ? + the roads ? - Call some groups to give opinions. - T corrects. A. Speak Pre - Speaking Events 1. Houses 2. Means of transport 3. Traffic 4. Streets 5. Shops 6. Children 7. Trees and flowers. P1 - Short, small - Cheap, simple. P2 Large, high - expensive, modern. - Quiet - Narrow, short - Small, cheap, simple - Dirty Not very beautiful. - noisy - long, wide - large, expensive, plentiful - clean - very beautiful. 1. Talk about the changes of the town. Grammar * The present progressive tense show changes with "get" and "become". S + (to) be + getting / becoming + + short adj adj(er) + long adj more + adj + Nouns more + N. While - Speaking 2. Talk about the changes in your hometown. Answer The traffic is getting busier. There are more high buildings and houses. The town is becoming more beautiful. There are more green trees. The streets are becoming cleaner. Post - Speaking Ask ss to find and think the changes My village / neiborhood: in their village or their neighborhood. Tall houses, mordern houses, long and.

(122) - Look at the pictures in book - Answer my questions What are they doing ? Can you guess what are they talking about ? We are going to hear a dialogue on the phone between aunt Hang and Lan. There is some missing information. Firstly you read the dialogue and have a guess of the missing words. - Call some Ss to give their predictions. - Let Ss listen to the tape and complete the dialogue. - Compare the words you hear with the words you predict. - Let Ss listen again to check the answer. - Call some pairs to read the dialogue. - T corrects and gives the answers. - T asks and Ss answer the questions. Who did aunt Hang phone ? Did she phone from Hue ? Who are going to visit Lan ?. wide streets, large shops...... In my village, the life is getting better. There are more modern and tall houses. ........ Listen Pre - Listening. While - Listening Answer 1. that 2. this 3. It's 4. where 5. from 6. coming 7. week. 8. Arriving 9. Thursday 10. Late 11. Afternoon 12. Speak 13. My 14. get Post - Listening. IV- Homework: - Write a paragraph about the changes in your village. - Guide Ss to do ex 1 (P. 49), ex 5 (P. 51) - Read the dialogue between Lan and aunt hang at home - Make the same dialogue in Listen in pairs. - Prepare part Read. Week : 16 Period: 46. Preparing day: 21 / 12/ 2009 Teaching day: 25 / 12/ 2009. Unit 8: Country life andd city life Lesson 3 - Read A- Objectives:.

(123) By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the content of the text. They will know why many people in the countryside go to the city to get job. Ss will know some new words concern nature and they will finish the exercises: complete the summary and find the words have the same meaning like the words given. B- Language contents: Reading skill Vocabulary concern nature. C- Work arrangements: Individual, pair, group D- Teaching aids: Extra board, reference books E- Procedure: I. Setting class: II. Checking the old lesson: S1: Read the paragraph you wrote last period about the changes in the village. S2: do ex 5 (P. 51) III. New lesson: - T uses some questions to introduce the Pre - Reading subject of the lesson. Vocabulary Do you think many people move to live - rural (adj): thuộc về miền quê in the city ? - urban (adj): thuộc về thành phố Why do they want to go to the city ? - typhoon (n): bão (get good jobs, money, better facilities) - flood (n): lũ lụt What problems may arise when so many - drought (n) hạn hán people move to the city ? - overcrowding (adj): quá đông - T introduces new words. - strain (n): áp lực - struggle (n): cuộc chiến đấu - tragedy (n): bi kịch - - migrant (n): dân di cư - (to) live apart: sống xa nhau - Ask ss to close the books and do Ex: T or F Ss Prediction Result 1. Many people from rurral areas are 1 moving to the city nowsadays. 2. Citizen life always struggles with 2 nature and robbery. 3. There will no important problems if 3 the city is overcrowding. 4. Families sometimes have to live apart. 4 5. Governments all over the world are trying to provide facilities for these 5 migrants. While - Reading Key: 1. T; 2. F;. 3. F;. 4. T;. 5. T.

(124) - Before Ss do ex 2. Ask Ss to match the words on the board. - Ask Ss to work in pairs. Matching. - T asks Ss to read the text to know the main ideas. - Ask Ss to read the text again and complete the summary by filling the missing information. - Call 2 Ss to read the summary aloud. - T corrects mistakes.. A B 1. Well - paying a. cơ hội job b. đủ, vừa đủ 2. opportunity c. cv có thu nhập 3. supply cao 4. adequate d. áp lực 5. pressure e. sự kiện 6. event f. sự cung cấp 1. Complete the summary. 1. leaving 6.problems 2.home 7.schools 3.city 8.hospitals 4.rural 9.problem 5.city 10.world 2. Find the word..... a. rural b. plentiful c. increase d. strain e. tragedy f. urban. - Call a student to read the request of ex 2. - Ask Ss to read the text carefully and find the words have the same meanings like the words given. - Call some leaders to read the answers Post - Reading and explain - T corrects and gives answers - Divide the class in to 2 teams Well paying job Plentiful Unpleasure - Call a student to look at the board and Typhoon Drought Flood Destroy Face create say the name of the game. - Ask Ss to make a sentence with each word in the table. - Ask Ss to close the books and say something about the text (main content) - Work in pairs to talk about the problems in your village - Call some Ss to speak. IV- Homework: - Learn by heart new words - Read the text again - Try your best to summarize the main content of the text - Guide Ss to do ex 2 (P. 49, 50) - Prepare part Write Week : 16 Period: 47. Preparing day: 24/12/2009 Teaching day: /12/ 2009.

(125) Unit 8: (cont) Lesson 4 - WRITE A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write a letter to a friend about their neighborhood and they will remember the structures of an informal letter. Ss practice writing skill. B- Language contents: Structure of an informal letter Writing skill C- Work arrangements: Individual, pair, group D- Teaching aids: Extra board, work sheet, reference books. E- Procedure: I. Warm up: II. Checking the old lesson: S1: Summarizes the main content of the text last period. S2: Do ex 2 (P. 49, 50) III. New lesson: - T uses a completed letter Pre - writing - T cuts the letter in to small parts - Ask Ss to work in groups to rearrange the letter and read name of each part. - Now look at ex1 and put the parts of an informal letter in the right order. - Call 2 Ss to read the structure Heading - T corrects Writer's address Date Dear , Opening We have just revised the structure of an Body of the letter informal letter. Today we will learn Closing more about the informal letter by writing a letter to a friend telling him or her about your neighborhood. - Ss answer - T asks the questions in book - Ss write - Use the structure and the information While - witing to write your letter. The sample letter Cong Lac village - Call some Ss to read their letters Tu Ky district - T corrects mistakes and remarks Hai Duong province - T gives a letter. December 21, 2007 Dear Linh, I live in Cong Lac, a small village near An Thanh. My family has a small house with 4 rooms. My sister and I.

(126) share one bedroom. It's lots of fun. Outside my window is a pond. We don't live far from my school sp I can walk there. In my neighborhood there is a river. On the weekend, i often go swimming in the river with my friends. But the thing I like best in my neighborhood is a rice paddy. I often fly the kite there every afternoon. Do you have a rice paddy like that in your neighborhood ? Is there anything interesting where you live ? Write to me. I'd like to say goodbye now. I'm looking forwards to hearing from you soon. Your sincerely, Mai, - Ss share their letters and correct Post - writing mistakes for one another . - Call a student to retell the structure of an informal letter. - T gives the latter and lets Ss play Error hunter. IV- Homework: - Learn by heart the structure of an informal letter. - Complete your letter - Prepare part Language focus. Week : 16 Period: 48. Preparing day: 24/12/2009 Teaching day: /12/2009. Unit 8: (cont) Lesson 5 - Language focus A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use the present progressive tense to talk about the future and to show changes with "get" and "become". They will revise the comparative and superlative of adjectives. Ss will be able to finish all the exercises exactly. B- Language contents: The present progressive tense to talk about the future and to show changes with "get" and "become" C- Work arrangements: Individual, pair, group D- Teaching aids: Extra board, reference books.

(127) E- Procedure: I. Warm up: II. Checking the old lesson: S1: Retell the structure of an informal letter S2: Read the letter last period III. New lesson: 1. Read the dialogues. - T reads the dialogue aloud and explains 2 dialogues about shipping information - Ask Ss to find the sentences in the present progressive tense. - T explains. - Call Ss to practice 2 dialogues in pairs. - Ask Ss to read the shipping information in pairs. - T explains the head lines.. Eg: Is the boat to Dong Hoi leaving at 10.25 ? * The present progressive tense to talk about the future.. Vocabulary - ship name (n): tªn tµu - destination (n): nơi đến - time of departure (n): giê ch¹y - statues (n): t×nh tr¹ng - Now use the information in the table to - revised time (n): giê söa l¹i make similar dialogues in pairs. - Call some pairs to practice. - T corrects the mistakes with Ss. 2. Complete the dialogues. Use the verbs in the present progressive - Call 2 Ss to read dialogue a. tense. - Ask Ss to complete the dialogues in pairs. b. are doing - Call some pairs to practice. c. am watching - T corrects and gives the key. d. am going e. are cleaning - Call a student to read sentence a and remark f. am having use of the present progressive tense in this 3. Complete the sentences. * The present progressive tense to case. show changes "get" , "become" b .are getting weak - Ask Ss to do exercise c. is getting dark d. is becoming cold - Call Ss to read the sentence e. are getting better - T corrects. f. is becoming cleaner - Guide Ss to do exercise - Ask Ss to make sentences 4. Make comparisons. - Call Ss to read their sentences * Note: short adjs - T corrects and remarks. long - Ask Ss to read the advertisements to 5. Compare the house, the villa and the apartment. understand them. - Guide Ss to use the adjs in the box to write * Superlative adjectives..

(128) the sentences. - Call Ss to read their sentences - T corrects. IV- Consolidation: - T retells the grammar. V- Homework: - Ask Ss to redo all the exercises again. - Guide Ss to do the rest of the exercises in work book. - Revise the knowledge from Unit 1 to Unit 8. Week : 17 Period: 49. Preparing day: 24/12/2009 Teaching day: /12/2009. Revision Unit 1 + Unit 2 + Unit 3 A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to revise the knowledge from Unit 1 to Unit 4 and they will do exercises exactly. B- Language contents: Present simple tense , (not) adj + enough + to + inf, be going to, adverbs of place, reflexive pronouns, past simple tense, prepositions of time, used to. C- Work arrangements: Individual, pair, group D- Teaching aids: Extra board, English 8, reference books, work book. E- Procedure: I. Warm up: II. Checking the old lesson: During the lesson. III. New lesson: Ex1: Put the verbs in the right - T gives an exercise on the extra board. tense. - Ask Ss to do exercise in individual 1. The Sun (rise) in the east and (set) in the west. 2. My father (not like) drinking beer but yesterday he (have) two glasses of beer. He (be) happy to receive my brother's news. 3. What you (do) this weekend ? I (go) fishing. 4. Last month my brother (send) me - Now share your answers. his photographs. He (send) his - Call Ss to give the answers. photographs every year. - Ask Ss to explain why they choose each 5. Everyday Ba (go) to school at 6 am. tense in each sentence. Yesterday he (go) to school at 6.30 - Ask Ss to retell the forms and uses of am. He (be) late. each verb in exercise 1. ******* The tense******* - T uses the extra board to show the forms 1. The present simple to talk about.

(129) and the uses of the tenses to help Ss copy general truth and activities happen them in their books easily and quickly. again and again in the present. Form: (+) S + Vs, es (-) S + don't/ doesn't + V (?) Do/ Does + S + V ? { Note: (to be) you write the form yourself } 2. The simple past tense express the activities happen in the past. The activities don't connect to the present. Form: (+) S + V(past form) (-) S + didn't + V (?) Did + S + V ? { Note: (to be) you write the form yourself } 3. "Be going to" to talk about intention. Form: (+) S + be + going to + inf - T gives the key. (-)S + be not + going to + inf (?) Be + S+ going to + inf ? Key: 1. rises, sets 2. doesn't like, had, was 3. are.....going to do, am going 4. sent, sends - T gives ex 2 and ask Ss to work in pairs. 5. goes, went, was. Ex 2: Choose a, b or c to complete these sentences. 1. She is not.........to drive a car. a. old enough b. enough old c. old 2. You must clean the kitchen but you.......sweep the floor. a. mustn't b. don't have to c. don't must 3. You must try to solve it .......... a. yourself b. ourselves c. myself 4. I............up late a. used get b. used to get c. used to - Call Ss to give answers and explain getting - T gives the key. 5. My mother never goes to - t scans uses and forms of "enough", work ......Sundays. "modal verbs" , "reflexive pronouns" and a. on b. in c. at "used to", "prepositions of time". Key:.

(130) 1.a 2.b 3.a 4.b 5.a *********Some structures******** 1. Enough * With adjectives. S + be + (not) adj + enough + to + inf * with nouns. S + V + enough + N + to + inf 2. Modal verbs have to S + ought to + inf must 3. Reflexive pronouns Ss write the forms of Reflexive pronouns they learnt. Use: emphasize the subject of the actions. 3. "Used to" is used to express habits in the past they don't exist now. (+) S + used to + inf (-) S + didn't + use to inf - T gives 2 forms and asks Ss to complete (?) Did + S + use to + inf ? them with the information about them or 4. The prepositions of time. the information they imagine. On, at, in, between, after, before. (Uses of each preposition Ss write themselves) Ex 3: Complete these forms. Name: Appearance: Characters: Hobbies: Address: Family: Friends:. Message Date: Time: For: Message: Taken by:. - Call Ss to complete the forms. - T corrects IV- Consolidation: - T consolidates the knowledge of the period V- Homework: - Learn by heart all the structures in the lesson today - Redo all 3 exercises above..

(131) - Revise the knowledge from Unit 5 to Unit 8.. Test 1 A – Listening. Listen to the teacher and decide if the statements are True (T) or false (F). (2 pts) 1. Nam and Na are talking together. 2. She is a newcomer here. 3. They have been here since last weekend. 4. The mother is too tired to cook dinner, so they go to their friend’s house for dinner.. B – Grammar – Vocabulary I. Choose the best option to complete the sentence. (1.5 pts) 1. She ______ play tennis a lot many years ago. A. used B. used to C. to used to D. to use to 2. I usually go swimming ____ Tuesdays. A. at B. in C. of D. on 3. Do you _____ any help? A. want B. need C. like D. love 4. Lan enjoys ____the piano very much, so she often spends two hours a day on it. A. playing B. listening C. watching D. performing 5. The teacher asked me_______ you this dictionary. A. give B. giving C. to give D. to giving II/ Match the questions in column A with the answers in the column B(1.5 pts). A 1. Would you like to dance? 2. What are you going to do this summer? 3. Where shall we put the armchairs? 4. Why must we cover electrical sockets? 5. Is she your neighbor?. B a. So that children do not try to put anything into them. b. Oh. I’d love to. c. I am going to sing a song. d. In a store nearby. e. Actually, she’s one of my sister’s friends. f. Traveling around Vietnam with some friends. g. In the living room. h. Yes, I would. III - Complete these sentences with correct words(2 ps) 1- My uncle....us since 2001 a- haven’t visited b- hasn’t visited c- visited 2- I often play soccer...Sunday afternoon a- in b-at c- on 3- My father was good at swimming. He used to.....swimming in summer a- go b- goes c- went 4- I’ve lived in this house....1990 a- from b- for c- since 5- Mrs Chi advised me not.....him any more money a- to lend b-lends c- lending 6- ....have you lived in this town? a- When b- How c- How long.

(132) 7- The doctor asked him......a rest a- take b- to take c-took 8- Airmail is ....expensive than surface mail a- the most b- as c more 9- My mother is ...tired...cook tonight a- enough/ to b- too/ to c- so /that 10- There is nothing exciting....in the counrtyside a- to do b- do c- doing. C - Reading Read this passage carefully then answer the following questions. ( 2.5 pts ) One of the inventions made in the world of science and technology is the telephone. This instrument has become an important part in our daily life. The word “ telephone ” comes from two Greek words “ tele ” and “ phone ” .These words mean “ far ” and “ sound ”. The telephone uses electricity to carry sound over a distance. Alexander Graham Bell invented the telephone in 1876. He was born on March 3, 1847 and grew up in Edinburgh. Then he emigrated, first to Canada and then to the USA in 1870s. In America, he worked with deaf – mutes at Boston University. Soon, Bell started experimenting with ways of transmitting speech over a long distance. This led to the invention of the telephone. Since the telephone set was invented, the design of it has changed greatly. However, the way the telephone works is still the same. 1. What has become an important part in our daily life? 2. What do the words “tele” and “phone” mean? 3. Whom did Alexander Graham Bell work with at Boston University? 4. Has the design of the telephone set changed greatly? 5. Do you think the telephone is very useful? Why? or Why not?. D – Writing I - Arrange these words in to sentences(2,5ps) 1-likes/ Lan/ English/ learning .................................................... 2-always/ she/ wants/ improve/ to / English/ her .................................................................... 3-known/I/her/have/three/months/for. ........................................................... 4-The/ opens/ store/ days/ a week/ six ................................................................ 5-haven’t/ we/ eaten/ restaurant/ and/ in/ that/ two/ our/ friends/ years/ for ................................................................................................................ II. Write a description of the living room using the word cues. 1. There/ some nice things/ living room. 2. The small table/ between/ two armchairs. 3. There/ sofa/ next/ window. 4. The telephone/ behind/ sofa. 5. There/ clock/ the wall/ and/ under/ clock/ big picture. 6. In front of/ door/ there/ some plants.. Test 2.

(133) I. Which one is different ? (1) a. orphanage character directory transmit b. steamer player doctor teacher c. second third twelve seventh d. evening reading writing speaking e. escape graze chore demontrate II. Choose the best answer (2,5): a. I ... a letter from my old friend last week 1. to receive 2. recieved 3. recieves b. She is ... to drive a car to school. 1. not enough old 2. enough not old 3. not old enough c. My father enjoys ... to music on his free time 1. to listen 2. listening 3. listens d. Alexander Graham Bell was born ... Scotland ... 1847 1.on/ in 2. in /in 3. in/ on e. The children are not old enough to look after 1. themseves 2. yourseves 3. ourseves f. I ... soccer a lot, but I don't play very often now. 1. plays 2. used to play 3. am used to play g. I know you worked really ... this semester. 1. hardly 2.harder 3. hard h. Miss Jackson asked Tim ... his best to improve his English. 1. to try 2. tried 3. tries. i. It's too cold outside. ... close the doo, please? 1. do you 2. would you mind 3.can you k. My mother has worked in this factory ... 1995. 1. for 2. in 3. since III/ Reading comprehension.(2.5) I remember the days when I was a child. When the new year came, my mother used to tell me not to cry. She used to take me to the market and buy new clothes for me. She used to make sticky rice square cakes and cook them all night. She used go to the flower market to buy some beautiful flowers. My father used to paint the walls and redecorate the house. Now my parents are old and I am grow up so I do everything myself. But I still remember the days... 1. What did your mother use to tell you when the new year come? 2. Where did she use to take you and what did she use to buy you? 3. What did she use to make? 4. Where did she use to buy beautiful flowers? 5. What did your father use to do? ****************** I. Choose the word whose underline part is pronounced differently from others. 1p) 1. a. thing b. wine c. nice d. find 2. a. how b. horse c. hour d. house 3. a. celebration b. collection c. education d. question 4. A. feed 5. A. killed 6. A. home 7. A. able. B. empty B. listened B. come B. table. C. clean C. wanted C. tongue C. may. D. sweep D. preferred D. one D. rack. II/ Choose the best answer to complete the following sentences. (2ps) 1. She told me .......out. A. getting B. get C. to get D. gets 2. I haven't seen her for a long time so I .......to her. A. has to write B. must write C. writes D. to write 3. My father enjoys .......to music in his free time. A. to listen B. listening C. listen D. listens.

(134) 4. My house is different .......hers. A. to B. with C. about D. from 5. If you are a student, you can get 20 percent .......in this shop. A. discount B. effect C. resident D. selection 6. When I was alittle girl, I used to ………..my father advice. a. listen b. hear c. listen to d. hear to 7. Alexander Graham Bell ……….born on March 3, 1847 .............. Edinburgh. a. was - in b. is- at c. was - from d. are- on 8. a. I have learnt English................. 1990. a. in b. since c. for d. on 9. After a month, Hoa got used to ………in her new school. a. study b. studying c. studied d. is studying 10. I'm not rich enough .......a car. A. buy B. to buy C. buying D. buys III/ Rearrange the following sentences to make a sensibly dialogue(1p) …....Do you want to send it by airmail or surface mail? ……Oh! That's too expensive. …....All right. ……Excuse me. I'd like to send this parcel to Ha Noi. ……That's better. I'll send it surface. ……How much is airmail? ……Surface mail is cheaper. It 's only 22.000 dong. ……I'll have to weigh the parcel first. Four kilograms. That will be 43.500 dong. IV/ Each sentence below has a mistake, find out and correct it. (2ps) o. Trung meets his uncle yesterday. o/ …met… 1. We not spend our summer holiday in Da Lat last year. 1 ……………….. 2. Is Nam tallest than Viet? 2 ……………….. 3. My teacher advised me spends more two hours to do my home work 3 ……………….. every evening. 4. Mr Thanh drove careless so he had a serious accident . 4 ………………... V/ Fill in each gap with a suitable word from the box. (2p) there. in. for. more. each. has. where. be. so. can. The country is (1)…….…….. beautiful than a town and more pleasant to live in. Many people think so, and go to the country(2)……………….the summer holiday though they can’t live(3)…….......... all the year round. Some have cottage built in a village(4)…..….............. that they can go there whenever they(5)….…........... find the time. English villages arenot all alike, but(6)….…........some ways they arenot very different from(7) ….…....... other. Almost every village(8)…….………a church, the round or square tower of which can(9) …….….seen from many miles around. Surrounding the church is the church yard, (10)….. …….. people are buried..

(135)

(136)

(137)

(138)

(139)

(140) Week : 17 Period: 50. Preparing day: 31/12/2009 Teaching day: 4 / 1 / 2010. Revision Unit 4 + Unit 5 + Unit 6 A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to revise the knowledge from Unit 5 to Unit 8 and they will do exercises exactly. Adverbs of manner, reported speech, gerunds, present perfect with "for" and "since", comparison, comparative and superlative. B- Teaching aids: Extra board, English 8, reference books, work book, cards C- Work arrangements: Individual, pair, group D- Procedure: I. Checking the old lesson: During the lesson. II. New lesson: - T gives an example. Eg: She said to me "Can you help me ?" - Ask Ss to look at the eg and say what -> She asked me to help her. grammar they learnt . Direct speech and reported speech. Can you tell me the notes when we Commands , requests and advice change a sentence in to reported Form: speech ? * Commands , requests - Now change these sentences in to S + told/ asked + smb + to + inf reported speech. * Advice - Ask Ss to do exercise in individual S + said + S + should + inf - Share your answers. Ex 1: Change these sentences in to reported speech. 1. Nga said "Can you lend me the ruler ? 2. Nam said "Please help me with this exercise" 3. Mr Ba said "Tam should work harder" Key: 1. Nga asked me to lend her the ruler. 2. Nam told me to help her with the exercise. - Call some Ss to read the sentences 3. Mr Ba said tan should work harder. aloud. Ex 2: Complete the cards. - T corrects and gives the key List 3 adverbs of manner Make an example with an adverb - T gives the cards, in each card there is a grammar part..

(141) - Guide Ss to play the game "Who are excellent students ?" - Divide the class in to 2teams. - Name the teams. - A student in each team goes to the board, chooses a card and completes the request in the card. If the student can't complete it he or she reads the request in the card aloud and another student in his or her team will go to the board and complete the request. Who complete the card exactly they are excellent Ss and the team has many excellent Ss it wins.. Write form of the verb after "like, love, have" . What do we call that verb ? Respond to this favor assistance Could you do me a favor ? May I help you ?. and. Write form of the Present perfect tense Correct this sentence "I has learnt English since 3 years". Choose one of the words give to fill in each gap Same, expensive, tallest, cheap 1. My book is as.....as your book 2. This bag is more......then my bag 3. Who is the .......student in your class ? 4. Your ruler is the......as his ruler. - Count the Ss and say the winners. III- Consolidation: - T consolidates the knowledge of the period I. Choose one word in the parentheses that best fits the blank space:. 1. That singer is tall . (short/ long/ slim/ strait) 2. It’s not polite to her. ( orphan/ annoy/ joke/ straighten) 3. We like him very much because he is very . (blond/ curly/ fat/ generous) 4. We are very happy to have friends. (kinds/ slim/ sociable/ accessible) 5. A bicycle is often more than a car in towns.(difficult/ cheap/ expensive/ convenient) 6. Each of us has a different . (distance/ character/ assistance/ festival) 7. Alexander Graham Bell to Canada in 1870s. (immigrate/ emigrate/ enter/ turned) 8. Thomas Watson was Bell’s (assistant/ invention/ distance/ appearance).

(142) 9. Graham Bell successfully his invention. (intended/ demonstrated/ assisted/ experimented) 10. We should collect used paper to .(recycle/ use/ establish/ apply) 11. They can neither speak nor hear. They are (mute/ deaf/ deaf-mute/ deaf-mutes) 12. Mai couldn’t go to the movies with her friends because she had to do her (thing/ chore/ lesson/ best) Nam’s mother told him the rice was in the .(bowl/ pan/ cupboard/ stove) 13. Her mother told her how to cook in a .(saucepan/ sink/ steamer/ rice-cooker) 14. We use for cutting cloth. (knife/ scissor/ scissors/ rug) 15. There is a dirty on your shirt.(place/ mark/ piece/ rag) 16. “The lost shoe” is my favourite ______________ . (novel – short story – folk tale – writing) 17. Would you like to participate in the ___________ in Hue ? (festival – garden – temple – river) 18. These poor children always wear ____________ . (costumed – jewelry – perfume – rags) 19. The roofs of these cottages are made of ___________ (wood – bricks – straw – iron) 20. A school-year in our country has two __________ . (parts – terms – months – half) 21. We must try our best to give up bad ___________ . (habits – thing – lines – clothes) 22. His English _____________ is fair . (air – breath – pronunciation – speak) 23. My ____________ to that company for a new job has been refused . (volunteer – application – favor – association) 24. If you want to take that course , you need to __________ before the end of August . (apply – sign – offer – enroll) 25. We can put used paper in special containers instead of throwing it into the garbage can . Then this paper is collected to be ___________ . (recycled – used – established – applied). IV- Homework: - Learn by heart all the structures in the lesson today - Re do 2 exercises above. - Revise all the knowledge to do exercises next period.. Week : 17 Period: 51. Preparing day: 19 / 12 / 2010 Teaching day: 25 / 12 / 2010. Revision Unit 7 + Unit 8 A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to revise the knowledge they learnt and do the exercises exactly. Grammar, vocabulary from Unit 1 to Unit 8 B- Teaching aids: Extra board, English 8, reference books, work book, cards C- Work arrangements: Individual, pair, group.

(143) D- Procedure: I. Checking the old lesson: During the lesson. II. New lesson: The present perfect (Thì hiện tại hoàn thành) a. Usage. 1.Thì hiện tại hoàn thành diễn tả những hđ, sv xảy ra trong quá khứ nhưng không rõ thời gian. Eg1. They (meet) that person. Eg2. He (lose) his key. 2. Thì HTHT diễn tả những hđ, sv xảy ra trong quá khứ và còn tiếp tục ở hiện tại sd với FOR + period of time. Eg1. I (teach) English at Cong Lac secondary school for 2 months. Eg2. My father (work) in the factory for 10 years. 3. Thì HTHT diễn tả hđ, sv xảy ra bắt đầu từ 1 thời điểm trong quá khứ và còn tiếp tục ở hiện tại sd với SINCE + point of time. Eg1. We (study) E since 2005. Eg2. Lan (be) to Kim Lien since yesterday. 4. Thì HTHT diễn tả hđ, sv vừa mới xảy ra dùng với JUST. (JUST luôn dùng trong câu khẳng định và luôn đứng giữa HAVE / HAS và P2). Eg1. They just (meet) that person. Eg2. Tom just (come) to Hoa’s house. 5. Thì HTHT diễn tả hđ, sv diễn ra trong khoảng thời gian vẫn còn ở hiện tại dùng với TODAY, THIS MORNING / MONTH… Eg1. You (see) Lan today? Eg2. There (be) 3 accidents here this month. 6. Thì HTHT diễn tả hđ, sv đã xảy ra trong qk nhưng thời điểm không rõ ràng đi với ALREADY (đã rồi) RECENTLY = LATELY (gần đây), BEFORE ( trước kia) Eg1. He already (do) his homework. Eg2. They (see) this film 3 times before. Eg3. I (read) a newspaper about you recently. 7. Thì HTHT diễn tả những hđ, sv chưa diễn ra dùng với YET (chưa, vẫn chưa) Eg1. I (not tell) you about the accident yet. Eg2. You (meet) your new teacher yet ? 8. Thì HTHT diễn tả hd, sv bắt đầu trong qk và kéo dài đến hiện tại dùng với UP TO NOW, SO FAR Eg1. Up to now we (visit) 3 countries in the world. Eg2. He (earn) 100,000,000 dollars so far. 9. Thì HTHT diễn tả những điều chưa bao giờ làm từ trước đến nay dùng với NEVER Eg1. I (never be) to the United states. Eg2. Tom (never see) Vnamese films. 10. Thì HTHT dùng để hỏi xem hđ, sv đó đã từng xảy ra chưa dùng với EVER Eg1. You (ever read) this book? Eg2. This is the most interesting film I (ever see). 11. Thì HTHT dùng với IN THE PAST / LAST + 2 months / 3 years. FOR THE LAST / PAST + 2 months / 3 years. Eg1. There (be) a lot of changes in town in the last 2 years..

(144) 12. Thì HTHT dùng với THIS IS THE FIRST / SECOND/ THIRD + time Eg1. This is the second time I (visit) Phong Nha cave. 13. Thì HTHT dùng với FOR AGES / MONTHS / A LONG TIME SEVERAL TIMES / MONTHS Eg1. I (not see) my sister for ages. Eg2. They (read) that story several times. b, Form. + ) S + have / has + P2 - ) S + haven’t / hasn’t + P2 ?) Have / Has + S + P2…..? T gives the exercises and then asks Ss to do Ex1: Put the verbs in the brackets in the right forms. 1. Would you like (join).............my class next Sunday? I (visit)........the local museum. 2. My father (read)..........now. He always (read)........a book after dinner. 3. A friend of my brother's (call)...........him last night, but he (not be).............at home. So I (take)............a message for him. 4. Mai (telephone)..........you when she comes back. 5. My uncle (not visit) ................us since he moved to new town. Ex 2: Choose a suitable preposition given to fill in each gap. At, on, in, for, from....to, between 1. Linh's uncle left Ho Chi Minh City .......2000 and went to Hanoi. 2. The accident happened ............Monday morning when Sue was driving to work. 3. Thebirds started singing ...........half past four this morning. 4. Mr Phong has stayed here............ten days. 5. Tam works hard ..........Monday........Friday. 6. You can meet me..........7.15 and 8.00. Ex 3: Choose a,b,c or d to complete these sentences. 1. The weather ......nice yesterday. a. is b. was c. will be d. has been 2. I am going ..............the movie at 8 this evening. a. see b. seeing c. to seeing d. to see 3. Le's.........together outside in the garden of the club. A. us meet b. them meet c. the children d. meet 4. I am sorry but I can't .........chess tonight. a. to play b. playing c. play d. played 5. The woman sang the song ..........in the party. a. beauty b. beautiful c. beautifully d. beautifuly 6. There's ......... a. an action movie interesting on TV tonight b. a action movie interesting on TV tonight c. a interesting action movie on TV tonight d. an interesting action movie on TV tonight. 7. I think I will do that work ..........What do you think about that ? a. meself b. mineself c. myself d. I myself 8. Students .........their homework after class..

(145) a. have to doing b. have to do c. have do d. have to be done 9. They .......early. a. used to get up b. use to get up c. used getting up d. used to getting up 10. He always gets excellent grades because he studies ........... a. hardly b. hard c. good d. goodly 11. Do you need any help ? a. No, I don't need b. Thank you, I don't need c. Yes. That's very kind of you d. Yes. I'm fine. 12. How long .............? Since 1980 a. do you live here b. did you live here c. have you live here d. have you lived here - Call Ss to do exercises and explain - T gives the key Keys: Ex 1: 1. to join, am going to visit2. is reading, reads3. called, wasn't, took4. will telephone 5. hasn't visited Ex 2: 1. in 2. On 3. at 4. For 5. From to 6. Between Ex 3: 1.b 2.d 3.d 4.c 5.c 6.d 7.c 8.b 9.a 10.b 11.c 12.d III- Consolidation: - Ask Ss to make their own dialogues n groups , choose anything topic you like - Call some groups to practice. - t and other students correct I. Use the proper form or tense of the verbs in parentheses: 1. That girl is old enough to school.(go) 2. She spends her free time the unhappy children. (help) 3. We a birthday party next weekend. (have) 4. Why must people electrical socket? (cover) 5. They get up early yesterday. (not have) 6. He isn’t rich enough a car. (buy) 7. Her brother action movies very much. (like) 8. The moon round the earth. (move) 9. They last Tet holiday happily. (spend) 10.Lan her birthday party next Saturday.(have) 11.Those men from prison last week. nd 12.The events in the 22 Sea Games them the most. (excite) 13.Our parents us some new clothes for the Tet holidays. (buy) 14.Minh hide and seek with his friends at present. (play) 15.Do you enjoy jokes? (tell) 16.She food two hours ago. (cook) 17.They went last weekend.(fish) 18.Why do we have our lesson very carefully? (learn).

(146) 19.She ought to her parents more frequently. (write) 20.We should always the poor. (help) 21.My mother a very interesting story yesterday. (tell) 22.We used a lot of songs when we were young. (learn) 23.I anything about him two days ago. (not know) 24.Last Sunday , they __________ to the seaside . (go) 25.Let’s __________ that good student . (cheer) 26.I __________ to work early yesterday . (go) 27.They _______________ for Nha Trang next month . (leave) 28.Sue is afraid of _________ out after dark . (go) 29.Let’s __________ on the pavement . (walk) 30.Everybody __________ in a hurry in a big city . (seem) IV- Homework: - Redo all the exercises at home - Continue revising for the next period. Week : 18 Preparing day: Period: 52 Teaching day: 20 / 12/ 2010. The first term test A- Objectives: Ss will be able to finish the test exactly Vocabulary, grammar, 3 skills B - The Content A- LISTENING (2 points) Listen to the tape or the teacher and then complete the table. Name Age Job Means transport. of Hobby Interest. /. (1)..................... (2)...................... (3)...................... (4)...................... (5)................... ..... .... ..... ..... ..... B- VOCABULAYRY - LANGUAGE FOCUS (3 points) I- Choose A, B, C or D to complete each of the following sentence. (1.5 pts) 1. When my father was young, he used ....................fishing on Sundays. A. to going B. to go C. go D. going 2. She ran very ............... so I couldn't catch up with her. A. fast B. fastly C. slow D. slowly 3. My elder brother enjoys ............to music in his free time. A. to listen B. listening C. listen D. listens 4. Can I speak ............ Mrs Tam, please? A. with B. by C. about D. to 5. Carol asked Bob........... some coffee. A. making B. made C. to make D. make II- Match one line in column A with one suitable line in column B to make a sentence. (1.5 pts) A B 1. We must keep medicine in locked A. because she went there 2 days ago..

(147) cupboards.... B. because she likes sugar but I don't. 2. My sister loves cooking..... C. because children may eat or drink 3. Huong doesn't like to go to the water these things. park...... D. but she doesn't like washing dishes. 4. My sister's taste is different from E. because electricity can kill them. mine...... F. because they may cause a fire. 5. Children mustn't play with matches...... C- READING (2.5 points) Read the following passage and choose the best option (A, B, C, or D) for each question or each sentence. My best friend’s full name is Stuart Kenneth Young. His family often call him Ken but his nickname at school is ‘Sky’! He was born in Manchester, but now he lives in Newcastle. Sky is fifteen years old. He is 1.65m tall and he weighs 50 kilos. He’s got short brown hair and dark brown eyes. He is interested in all kinds of sport and music. His favorite group is U2, but his favorite singer is Bryan Adams. Sports View is his favorite TV program. Sky’s favorite food is pizza. He hates people who smoke all the time. I like Sky because he’s got a good sense of humor. I also like him because he’s a great dancer. 1. Who is Stuart Kenneth Young? A. my best friend B. the author’s best friend C. Sky’s classmate D. Sky’s next-door neighbor 2. Where does he live? A. In Newcastle B. In Manchester C. In the United State D. a & b 3. Stuart likes____________ A. all kinds of sport and music B. U2 C. Bryan Adams D. all are correct 4. Stuart is good at________ . A. music B. sport C. dancing D. all are correct 5. Which of the following is not true? A. Stuart is fifteen years old. B. Stuart’s eyes are dark brown. C. Stuart likes pizza and people who smoke all the time. D. Stuart has a good sense of humor. D. WRITING (2.5 points) Rewrite the sentences using the words given below. 1. Once / a poor farmer / have / daughter / name / Little Pea. ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 2. After / her mother / die / her father / marry / again. ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3. The stepmother / be / cruel / so Little Pea / have to / do / chores / all day. ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 4. The fairy / appear / change / Little Pea’s rags / beautiful clothes. ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 5. The Prince / find / lost shoe / decide / marry / Little Pea. ………………………………………………………………………………………………...

(148) Question A Listening 1. Lan (2 points) (a)student 4. (by) bike B Language focus (3 points) C Reading (2.5 points) D Writing (2.5 points). Week : 18. I1. B II1. C. 1. B. Key 2. 18 / eighteen (years old) 5. reading books and magazines. 2. A. 3. B. 4. D. 5. C. 2. D. 3. A. 4. B. 5. F. 2. A. 3.. Point 0.4 for each. 3. D. 4. C. 0.3 for each. 0.5 for each. 5. C. 1. Once a poor farmer had a daughter named Little Pea. 2. After her mother died, her father married again. 3. The stepmother was cruel so Little Pea had to do chores all day. 4. The fairy appeared and changed Little Pea’s rags into beautiful clothes. 5. The Prince found the lost shoes and decided to marry Little Pea.. 0.5 for each. Preparing day: 22 / 12 / 2010.

(149) Period: 53. Teaching day: 25 / 12 / 2010. Correcting the first term test A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know what they learnt well and what they learnt not well to control the methods to revise the old knowledge they learnt and learn next time better. B- Correct the test I. Yêu cầu HS xác định lại đề bài trong bài kiểm tra. II. Nhận xét: A. Ưu điểm: - HS làm bài và nộp bài đầy đủ, đúng thời gian quy định. - HS tập trung làm bài và có ý thức hoàn thành bài kiểm tra. - Có nhiều HS trình bày bài kiểm tra sạch sẽ, chữ viết đẹp. B. Nhược điểm: - Bên cạnh những HS viết chữ đẹp, trình bày bài kiểm tra sạch sẽ còn có nhiều HS viết chữ cẩu thả, trình bày kiểm tra luộm thuộm. - Còn nhiều HS không học bài kĩ trước khi làm bài kiểm tra nên làm bài sai và lạc đề. - Các lớp B, còn nhìn bài của nhau. C. Thông báo kết quả: GV thông báo kết quả từ điểm cao xuống thấp theo số điểm bộ môn từ đó rút ra kinh nghiệm học bài và làm bài cho HS. Lớp <5 5-<8 8 - 10 Số lượng % Số lượng % Số lượng % 8A 8B D. Tuyên dương, phê bình: * Tuyên dương: GV tuyên dương những HS làm bài tốt, đạt điểm cao. * Phê bình: GV nhắc nhở phê bình những HS làm bài yếu kém. III. Chữa lỗi sai: I. Loại bài tập nghe hiểu: - Hầu hêt HS làm bài này tốt vì phù hợp với trình độ của các em. - HS lớp 8A làm tương đổi tốt, HS lớp 8B làm kém vì phát âm không chuẩn. II. Loại bài chọn đáp án đúng. III. Loại bài tập nối cột A với cột B IV. Loại bài tập dọc và chọn đáp án đúng V. Loại bài tập viết câu dựa vào từ cho trước. C. Homework - Revise the knowledge you learnt not well at home. - Redo the exercise at home.

(150) - Prepare part Unit 9. I - Supply the correct form of the verbs in paretheses : ( 2 ms ) 1- ( you / see ) the football match yesterday ? 2- The moon ( go ) round the earth in about 27 days. 3- This bag looks heavy. I ( help ) you with it . 4- We used to ( live ) in a small village , but now we ( live ) in LonDon. II - Match the question in column A with the answer in column B : ( 2ms ) A B 1 - What was life like then? A - Just about ten years old 2 - What did you do in your free time? B - Very hard. in those day we didn’t use to have electricity 3 - Why didn’t you go to school? C - Wandered the fields. Flied kite or 4 - When did you started work? Played games D - Because I looked after my young 5 - How did your parents earn their brothers and sister. living? E - By farming III - Circle the best answer a, b, c or d to complete the sentence : 1- I ................ tennis a lot , but I don’t play very often now. a- used to play b- am used to play c- was playing d- play. 2- Tan is .................. his friend. a- younger b- the younger than c- younger than d- the youngest. 3- She will help you ..................... she has some free time. a- where b- how c- what d- when 4- We should wait here .................. he comes back. a- before b- after c- during d- until. 5- You should paint the house .................... . It will be cheaper. a- yourself b- herself c- ourselves d- themselves 6- She work hard ................. she could pass the final exam. a- so that b- in order to c- as result d- so as to 7- My grandma ..................... us when my parents were away from home. a- looked for b- looked at c- looked up d- looked after 8- Do you enjoy ................. sports programs? a- watch b- watching c- to watch d- in watching Week : 19 Period: 54. Preparing day: 13/1/2010 Teaching day: 15/1/2010. Unit 9: A first - aid course Lesson 1 - Getting started + listen and read A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know first- aid and they will be able to solve the problems in the situations needing first - aids. They will know some vocabulary concern the first aid and understand the dialogue between Lan and the nurse. B- Language contents: Vocabulary concern the first aid Grammar: Revise the future simple tense..

(151) C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Teaching aids: Cassette tape, pictures, reference books, English 8, teacher's book E- Procedure: I. Warm up: II. Checking the old lesson: III. New lesson: - T uses some questions to introduce the Getting started topic of the lesson. Vocab Have you ever had an accident that - towel (n): khăn tắm requires first aid ? - handkerchief (n): khăn tay Have you ever met any situations ? - cotton balls (n): cuộn bông What did you do at that time ? - bandage (n): băng gạc - Ss answer - ice bag (n): túi đá Now look at part Getting started . - alcohol (n): rượu, cồn We have 4 situations that require first - tiger balm (n): dầu con hổ aid. Who can read the situation ? Example:: A girl has a burn on her arm What you would do in these situations ? I'll put the burn under cold water. Note: You can use the things in the I'll put a handkerchief on it. pictures in book. V apply some ointment and cover it with - T provides some new words. a sterile bandage. - Ss work in individual. - T controls Ss' activities. - Call some Ss to give the solutions. Who have different ways ? We have discussed the situations that Listen and read need first - aid. Have you ever seen a Vocab: situation that requires ambulance ? - emergency (n): cấp cứu What should we do in that situation ? - ambulance (n): xe cứu thương - T introduces the new words in the -(un)conscious (a): tình trạng tỉnh táo dialogue. - (to) bleed: chảy máu - T uses the pictures, activities to teach - (to) cover the wound: băng vết thương new words. - (to) hold it tight: giứ chặt We are going to listen to a conversation - (to) fall asleep: buồn ngủ about an emergency. You listen to the Answer: tape and answer the following questions. a. A girl student is talking with a nurse Questions on the phone. a. Who are talking ? b. The nurse at Bach Mai hospital. The b. Where are they ? girl is at Quang Trung school. c. What happened ? c. A student is hurt. She fell off her bike and hit her head on the road. Topics a; b; c; e; f - Now look at your book and listen to the dialogue again. Model sentences - Practice the dialogue in pairs. 1.The ambulance will be there in about.

(152) - Call some pairs to read. 10 minutes. - Read the dialogue again. Work in 2. I promise I’ll keep her awake. groups and select the topics covered the Form: S + will + V(bare). dialogues in exercise 2. Use: Dùng để diễn tả sự việc sẽ xảy ra - Share your answers. trong tương lai, trong câu đề nghị, lời Ask ss to listen to the tape again and give hứa. model sentences - ? Find sentences which express action will happen in the future. IV- Consolidation: - Imagine a situation that need first-aid then you develop it into a dialogue with a partner. - Call some pairs to practice. - Ask ss to make some sentences with WILL. V- Homework: - Learn by heart the new words. - Practice the dialogue at home. - Guide Ss to do ex 1,2 (P. 55) - Prepare part Speak and Listen.. Week : 20 Period: 55. Preparing day:17/1/2010 Teaching day: 18/1/2010. Unit 9: (cont) Lesson 2 - Speak + Listen A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use the structures such as requests, offers, promises and responses to make dialogue with the situations in the pictures in book and the situations in life. Ss will be able to understand the text they hear and they will be able to match the letter with the words, put the words in the right order. B- Language contents: Vocabulary concern the hospital. Grammar: requests, offers, promises and responses C- Work arrangements: Individual, pair, group D- Teaching aids: Extra board, work sheet, cassette tape, pictures. E- Procedure: I. Warm up: II. Checking the old lesson: Match the word in column A with the definition in column B (on extra board) A B.

(153) 1. bleed 2. hospital 3. pressure 4. handkerchief. a. a building in which the sick, injured or infirm are treated b. lose blood from body c. a piece of cloth d. a squeezing; a crushing. 1.b 2.a 3.d 4.c -2 Ss go to the board to practice the dialogue. III. New lesson: - T introduces the situations of the structures. - Now read the structures in the table. - Call some Ss to read. - T explains some structures in the table. - Now look at picture a and read the dialogue in pairs. - Look at each picture and tell me what happen in each picture. - T gives prompts.. - Now base on the pictures and make the dialogues in pairs using the structures in the table. - Call some pairs to practice. - T corrects mistakes.. Revise: requests, offers, promises and responses. - Look at the picture in book and answer the questions. Where are the people ? What is each person doing ? - T explains the request of the exercise. - T explains the meaning of some new words.. A - Speak Pre - speaking. While - speaking b. A boy is holding his head, perhaps his head is injured or he has a headache. The mother wants to help. c. A boy has been bitten by a snake. d. The girl is in bed, perhaps she has a fever. e. A boy is holding a soccer bad, looking guilty, standing next to a broken vase, probably he has broken the vase. b. Mother: can I get you some medicine ? Boy: Yes, please. c. A: You are bleeding. What can I do for you ? B: Can you get me some bandage ? A: Sure d. A: You must have a fever. Would you like some medicine ? B: No, I'm fine. Thank you e. Boy: I promise I won't play soccer in the house again. Mother: I hope so. B – Listen Pre - listening Vocabulary - stretcher (n): cái cáng - crutches (n): cái nạng - wheel chair (n): xe lăn - scale (n): cái cân - eye chart (n): bảng đo thị lực - paramedic (n): phụ tá.

(154) - Now listen to the tape then match the letters in the picture with the words provided.. While - listening A. ambulance - Listen to the tape and check your B. wheelchair answers. C. crutches - Share your answer with your D. eye chart partner. E. scale - Listen to the tape again and put the F. stretcher words in the right order you hear. F–B–A–D–E–C. - Call some Ss to give the key. - T corrects Post - listening - Work in groups + S1: imagine you're having a problem + S2,3: Give requests or offer, promise - Call some groups to practice.. IV- Homework: - Learn by heart the structures and new words - Practice talking about the people's activities in the pictures in book. - Guide Ss to do ex 6 (P. 75), ex 4 (P. 56) Week : 20 Period: 56. Preparing day: 17/1/2010 Teaching day: 20//1/2010. Unit 9: (cont) Lesson 3 - read A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know some treatments in the cases : fainting, shock and burns and they will find the exact information in each case. B- Language contents: Grammar: Use of "so as" Vocabulary concern some treatments C- Work arrangements: Individual, pair, group D- Teaching aids: Extra board, reference books, English 8 E- Procedure: I. Warm up: II. Checking the old lesson: S1: do parts c, d of ex 6 (P. 57) S2: Do ex 4 (P. 56) III. New lesson: Last period we knew some cases that Pre - reading.

(155) need first aid. Now work in pairs and list Emergency situation: the emergency situations you know. Burns, fainting, accident, ... - Call some Ss to say and T writes the situations on the board. Today we will learn about 3 emergency situations: fainting, shock and burns. Now you work in groups and discuss What we should do in these situations ? (Each groups discuss a situation) - Call some leaders of the groups to give A B a. tØnh l¹i the opinions. 1. lying flat b. n¹n nh©n - Now read the text in silence and then 2. elevate c. gi¶m vÕt ®au predict the meanings of the words and 3. lower d. n»m th¼ng e. h·uèng phrases on the board by doing exercise 4.victim f. n©ng lªn "Matching the words in column A with 5. revise g. gi¶m tèi ®a sù h the meanings in column B" 6. minimize tissue háng c¸c m« damage - Call Ss to give their predictions 7. ease the pain - T gives the key - Ask Ss to copy the vocabulary - Now you read the text again and choose the correct case for the treatments mentioned in the book. - Share your answers with your partner - Call Ss to give answers - T corrects - T explains some structures in the text 1.d 2.f 3.e 4.b 5.a 6.g 7.c quickly. While - reading a. A b. B c. A d. C e. A - Choose an emergency situation and Grammar: give the first aid. * force smb to do smt: bắt ai làm gì - Call Ss to give first aid. Eg: He forced me to cut that tree * So as to + in order to: cốt để làm gì Eg: I open the door so as to get fresh air. Post - reading Let Ss play "Naught and crosses" in groups. Make a sentence with each word in the box. Victim Alcohol Head Lower. Ease. Cover. Drug. Fainting. revise.

(156) Or ask ss to do Ex: Complete the table Cases Fainting. Shock Burns. Do Don,t - Leave the patient lying - Do not force him / her to flat . sit or stand . , - Elevate the patients feet or lower his / her head . - Give him / her a cup of tea when he / she revives . - Do not overheat the victim with blankets or coat - Do not give the victim any food or drink or drug . - Cool the burn immediately to minimize the tissue damage . - Put the affected part under a running cold tap . - Ease the pain with ice or cold water packs . - Cover the burned area with a thick sterile dressing .. IV- Homework: - Read the text and learn by heart it - Guide Ss to do ex 7 (P. 58). - Do ex 1,2 (55) Work book. - Prepare Write. Week : 20. Preparing day: 17/1/2010.

(157) Period: 57. Teaching day: 22/1/2010. Unit 9: (cont) Lesson 4 - Write A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write a thank- you note. They will revise the structure of an informal letter. B- Language contents: The structure of a thank- you note Writing skill C- Work arrangements: Individual, pair D- Teaching aids: Extra board, work sheet, a letter and reference books. E- Procedure: I. Warm up: II. Checking the old lesson: S1: say the first aid of fainting S2: Do parts b, c, d of ex 7 (P. 58) III. New lesson: - T asks some questions Pre - writing Do you always write or receive a thank- Vocab you notes ? (to) thank S.O for Smth ? V-ing: cảm ơn On which occasions ? vì cái gì , điều gì. - T introduces and explains the request (to) cheer S.O up: làm cho ai vui. of ex 1 . (to) come out of: ra khỏi. In daily life, we usually write thank-you (to) come over: tới, qua. notes to relatives and friends. In this lesson, we will learn how to write a thank you letter. Firstly, you look at the 1. Complete the thank you note. letter on page 84. This is the letter Nga Key send to Hoa after she left the hospital. (1) was - Read the letter and complete it. (2) were - Share your latter (3) helped - Call some Ss top read the letter. (4) came - T corrects. (5) am - T explains the request of ex 2 and asks (6) will phone Ss to read the request in book. - Read the letter in ex 1 True / False Predictions - Hang the poster with the statements on the board Answer key : a. Nga writes to thank Hoa for some a. False -> flower ( not candy ) come candy . b. True , b. Hoa s gift cheered Nga up . c. False -> at her house ( not at the , c. Nga d like Hoa to see her at the hospital ) hospital . d. True.

(158) d. Nga is very bored now . e. Nga writes the letter at the hospital . - Ask Ss to read the statements and predict . - Get S to give their predictions and write them on the board .. e. False -> at her house ( not at the hospital ) While – writing 2. Write a thank - you note to a friend.. - Now answer the questions then write the letter base on the prompts. - Ss write the letter. - Share your letter. - Call some Ss to read their letters aloud. - T corrects mistakes. - Divide the class into 4 groups and 3. Use . . . choose a letter randomly in each group . - Compare their letters and correct . - Call on some more Ss to read their letters for class - Give feedback and correct. Post – writing. IV- Homework: - Ask Ss to use the same format to write another letter to another friend for another occasion . - Do the exercises in the workbook . - Complete your letter to your friends - Prepare Language focus. Week : 21 Period: 58. Preparing day: 20/1/2009 Teaching day: 25/1/2009. Unit 9: (cont) Lesson 5 - language focus A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use the structures with "in order to" , "so as to" exactly. They will be able to revise the future simple tense and use of "will" in requests , offers and promises Ss will finish the matching exercises, choose the correct answer and complete the dialogue. B- Language contents:.

(159) Grammar: in order to, so as to, the future simple tense, requests, offers, and promises. C- Work arrangements: Individual, pair, group, T=WC D- Teaching aids: Pictures, reference books. E- Procedure: I. Warm up: II. Checking the old lesson: 2 Ss read their letters. T calls Ss to remark T corrects III. New lesson: Give some new words Vocab Pictures Victim (n): chç đau của n¹n nh©n. Translation Anxiety (n): sự bồn chồn lo lắng. (to) inform: th«ng b¸o cho biÕt Mime (to) minimize: giảm đau đến mức tối Check: thiªñ R and R Tissue (n): tÕ bµo, m« Damage (n: h h¹i, thiÖt h¹i (to) pour: đổ, rót Handbasket(n): c¸i lµn 1. Match one part in column A with another part in column B, using "in - T explains the requests of the exercise. order to", "so as to". - Call a student to read the example. Eg: I always keep the window open in - Read 2 parts of the sentence. order to/ so as to let fresh air in. - Predict the meaning of "in order to" * In order to/ so as to: để, để mà and "so as to". ( showing purpose) In order to + inf - Now you do exercise, using "in order So as to to" and "so as to" to match the parts in column A and column B. Answer - Share your answer 1. in order to/ so as to f - Call some Ss to read the sentences 2. in order to/ so as to c aloud. 3. in order to/ so as to b 4. in order to/ so as to e 5. in order to/ so as to a 6. in order to/ so as to d - Call a student to read the request. 2. Complete the dialogue. Use the - T explains the request. correct word or short form. - Call 2 Ss to retell the structure and * Future simple tense. uses of the future simple tense. (+) S + will + inf - Work in pair to complete the dialogue. - Call some pairs to practice. - T corrects. (1) will (4) shall (2) will (5) will - Look at picture a..

(160) Eg: The window is closed and the old (3) won't (6) will woman looks hot. 3. Complete the sentences.. What will she request Nga ? - Call 2 Ss to read dialogue a. - Explain the use of will in "requests" - Now look at the pictures work in pairs to complete the dialogue. - Call some pairs to practice. - T corrects. b. Will you give it... c. Will you answer the telephone.... d. Will you turn on the TV, please... - T explains the request of the exercise. e. Will you pour a glass of water.. - Look at picture a and say something f. Will you get me a cushion... about it. 4. Make requests, offers or promises. Picture a: In this situation what will you say to The garbage can is overflowing your friend ? somebody should empty it. Will you - Let Ss play "Shark attacks" empty the garbage can, please ? - Divide the class in to 2 teams. Shark attacks: - Guide Ss the rules - Ss choose the number and make b. Will you paint the door, please ? requests, offers or promises. c. Will you study harder, please ? - Correct the answers. d. Will you carry the bag for me, please ? - Say the winners. e. Will you hang the washing, please ? - T gives answers f. Will you cut the grass, please ? IV- Consolidation: - T retells the structures. - Ss imagine different situations and make dialogues using the structures in the lesson (Ss work in groups) - Call some groups to practice. V- Homework: - Learn by heart the structures - Guide Ss to do the rest of the exercises in work book. - Prepare new lesson: Unit 10 Recycling Lesson 1:Getting started, listen and read Week : 21 Period: 59. Preparing day: 20 / 1 / 2010 Teaching day: 27 / 1 / 2010. Unit 10: Recycling Lesson 1 - Getting started + listen and read A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know something about recycling. Base on the meaning of some new words Ss will understand the conversation between Miss Blake with the Ss of Quang Trung school and answer the questions exactly. B- Language contents:.

(161) Vocabulary concern recycling Grammar: Revise modal verbs, can, ought to, should Passive form of the present simple tense, adj + to-inf/ noun clause C- Work arrangements: Individual, pair, group, T=WC D- Teaching aids: Cassette tape, reference books, English 8. E- Procedure: I. Warm up: II. Checking the old lesson: S1: Give 3 situations. S2: Make requests, offers or promises base on the situations given. Getting started - T gives some problems that garbage causes to the society. - Now you work in pairs to find the way to reduce the amount of garbage we produce. You can use the words in the box. - T makes an eg with a word, phrase in the box. Eg: We should use tree leaves to wrap things such as banana leaves or lotus leaves. - T gives the meanings of some new words. - Ask Ss to work in pairs. - Call some pairs to practice. - T corrects.. New word - cloth bag (n): tói v¶i - plastic bag (n): tói nhùa - fertilizer (n): ph©n bãn. Listen and read. - T pints at the symbol in book and asks Ss: Which organization does this logo Logo: friends of the earth. represent ? What does this organization do ? RRR: recycling, reduce and reuse. We've discussed and found out recycling is one of the effective ways to reduce the amount of garbage in our life. In your opinion, what is recycling ? Can you give some examples of recycling ? - T introduces the situation of the dialogue. - Let Ss listen to the tape with the Vocab.

(162) books open. - T explains new words. T uses situation and translation to introduce the new words. - Checking by rub out and remember. - T asks Ss to practice the dialogue in groups. - Call some groups to practice. - T correct Ss pronunciation. - ask ss to listen to the tape again and find model sentences. - Now read the dialogue again and find the answers to the questions in part 2. - Compare your answers with your friends. - Call some Ss to read the answers aloud. - T corrects and gives answers.. - representative (n): người đại diện - (to) protect the environment: b¶o vÖ m«i trêng - over packaged (adj) đóng gói quá nhiều - (to ) save natural resources: tiÕt kiÖm nguån tµi nguyªn thiªn nhiªn. 1. Practice the dialogue with a partner. Model sentences 1. It is not difficult (remember). to remember 2. That is easy (say). to say Form: S + (to) be + adj +to-infinitive. 3. I am pleased that you want to know more. Form: S + (to) be + adj +that + clause. Use: Dung cảm xúc, ý kiến cá nhân về con người hay sự vật. 2. Answer: a. Reduce means not buying products which are over packaged.. - T introduces the structure "adj + toinf/ noun clause" quickly. b. We can reuse things like envelopes, Eg: It is not difficult to remember glass, plastic bottles and old plastic bags. because all the three words begin with the letter R. c. Recycling means not just throwing things away. Try and find another use for them. d. We can look for information on recycling things by having a contact with an organization like "Friends of the earth", going to the local library or asking our family and friends. e. Because plastic bags are difficult to be destroyed, so the amount of garbage increases.. IV- Consolidation: Ask ss to do ex using two those structures above. 1. I / glad/ meet / you. 2. We /disappointed / see/ that film..

(163) 3. I / bored/ I /get /bad /marks on my tests. 4. He / happy / his parents / come back / next week. 5. They / afraid / there / not water or food there. V- Homework: - Learn by heart new words. - Do ex 1 (59), 7 (63) workbook - ractice reading the dialogue at home - Prepare parts Speak + Listen Week : 21 Period: 60. Preparing day: 23 / 1 / 2010 Teaching day: 29 / 1 / 2010. Unit 10: (cont) Lesson 2 - Speak + Listen A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to put the items in the picture in different groups. Ss will be able to use the structures to guide smb to do smt when they talk to each other about garbage in our life. They will be able to get the main information in the expert's talk about the way to make compost. They will understand the talk and use the knowledge they know to help their parents. B- Language contents: Vocabulary Speaking and listening skills. C- Work arrangements: Individual, pair, group D- Teaching aids: Extra board, pictures, reference books, cassette tape. E- Procedure: I. Setting class: II. Checking the old lesson: 4 Ss read the dialogue. T asks some questions about the content of the dialogue. III. New lesson: A- Speak - Look at the picture in book, please. Pre – speaking Are they old things or new things ? Yes. They are in a garbage dump. To recycle and reuse these things. What do we need to do ? That's right. We need to group or classify these old things. - Look at the picture carefully and * Paper: paper, old/ used newspapers, name the items in the picture. books, cardboard, boxes... - Call Ss to speak names of the things * Glass: bottles, glasses, jars... in the picture. * Plastic: plastic bags, bottles, wares.... - T introduces the request of the * Metal: food cans, drinking cans, tins... exercise. * Vegetable matter: fruit peels,.

(164) - Now work with a partner. Look at the pictures and decide which group each item belongs to. How many groups are there ? What are they ? - Call 4 Ss to practice the eg in book. - Practice in pairs using the structures in the examples. - Call some pairs to practice and give the groups of things. - T corrects. - T guides ss to work in more things belong to the groups above. - Call some leaders of the groups to give names of the things. - T corrects.. vegetables,... * Fabric: clothes, pieces of materials,... * Leather: shoes, sandals, school bags,... While – speaking A: Which group do old newspapers belong to? B: Put them in Paper. A: What can we do with those old newspapers? B; We can use them for recycling. another use. Post - Speaking Which group ( do Put ( them ) in fabric clothes ) belong to ? What can we do with We can ( recycle ( those clothes ) ? them and make them into paper or Is / are ( fruit shopping bags . vegetable matter ) ? That is right What will we do with We make ( it into (it ) ? compose and fertilizer our field .. B- Listen Pre - listening - T asks: Have you ever seen a compost heap ? Do you know how the compost made ? - Now work in groups to discuss the way to make a compost heap. - Call some Ss to read the ways. - Base on Ss' opinions T introduces new words.. You are going to listen to an expert talking about the way to make compost. First, you look at the questions ad have a guess of the information in the tape. - Share your prediction with friends. - Now listen to the tape and check your prediction. - Call Ss to give correct answers. - Let Ss listen again. - T gives some steps making a. vocab - compost heap (n): đống phân - tea leaves (n): l¸ chÌ - egg shell (n): votrøng - moisture (n): độ ẩm - condensation (n): sù ngng tô - shade (n): bãng r©m - grain (n): thãc lóa. While - listening a-A, b- B, c-B, d-B Post - listening Put the steps in correct order. 1. use shovels to turn the compost. 2. start a compost heap 3. water the compost 4. place the garden. 5. use as fertilizer. 6. keep for 6 months..

(165) compost heap and asks Ss to put them 2-4-1-3-6-5 in the right order. - Call Ss to give answers. - T corrects. IV-Homework: - Complete your paragraph. - Learn by heart the names of the things. - Learn by heart the ways to make compost heap. -Do ex3 (60), 8 ( 63,64) work book - Prepare part Read Week : 22 Period: 61. Preparing day: 31 / 1 / 2010 Teaching day: 1 / 2 / 2010. Unit 10: (cont) Lesson 3 - read A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the content of the article of a newspaper about environment. They'll be able to answer the questions exactly and find out main aspects of each short paragraph. B- Language contents: Vocabulary Grammar: Passive voice C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Teaching aids: Teacher's book, reference books, English 8. E- Procedure: I. Setting class: II. Checking the old lesson: A student goes to the board and retells the way to make a compost heap. III. New lesson: We are going to read an article about Pre - reading recycling facts. There are something The green Gazette which are recycled. What are they ? They’re car tires, bottles, glass, drink - Now work in groups, please and cans and compost. answer this question. What can we do with car tires ? (bottles, waste paper...) - T gives some new words Vocab Realia - Pipe (n): ống nước Picture - Floor covering (n): tấm trải sàn nhà Translation - (to) refill: làm đầy Check - Glassware (n): đồ thuỷ tinh R and R - Deposit (n): tiền đặt cọc - Dung (n): phân thú vật.

(166) - (to) be delighted: vui vẻ, thú vị A 1. Car tires 2. Bottles 3. Glass 4. Drink cans 5. Compost. B a. are then cleaned and refilled. b. is made from household and garden waste. c. can be recycled to make pipes and floor covering. d. is broken up, melted and made into new glassware. e. are brought back for recycling.. Using an extraboard Ask ss to do EX individually, then compare with a partner and give the result. Ask ss to open the books and read the text in silent and correct EX. Ask ss to read the text again and do EX 1 - Share your answers with your partner. - Call Ss to read the answers aloud. - T corrects and gives the answers.. - Look at underline parts in the answers of ex 1 and tell me the difference of this structure with the structures you learnt. - T scans the passive voice of the present simple tense. - Now read the text again then work in pairs to complete the sentences. - Call Ss to go to the board and wrote the. While - reading Key: 1 - c; 2 - a; 3 - d; 4 - e; 5 - b 1. Answer: a. People cleaned and refilled empty milk bottles. b. The glass is broken up, melted and make into new glassware. c. The Oregon government made a new law that there must be a deposit on all drink cans. The deposit is returned when people bring the cans back for recycling. d. Compost is made from household and garden waste. e. If we have a recycling store to share we can call or fax the magazine at 5 265 465. Grammar Passive voice of the present simple tense. Form: S + is / am / are + PII S + can be + PII Use: Dùng để nói người hay vật bị tác động bởi người hay vật khác. 2. Work with a partner. Complete the sentences. ...can be recycled to make pipes and floor covering. ...are cleaned and refilled. ...is broken up, melted and made in to new glass ware..

(167) completed sentences. - T corrects.. ...are bought back for recycling. ...is made in to compost. Post - reading. - Now think of another used things and the products we can make from them. e. If we have a recycling store to share - Call Ss to give opinions. we can call or fax the magazine at 5 265 - T corrects. 465.We can tell our parents, friends, teachers or adults. Ask ss to discuss in groups with the question e. IV- Homework: - Learn by heart the main content of the article vocab, model sentences, structures. - Guide Ss to do exercises 1, 2 (P. 59), ex 3, 4(P. 60, 61), 9 (64,65) workbook. - Prepare Write Week : 22 Period: 62. Preparing day: 31 1 / 2010 Teaching day: 3 / 2 / 2010. Unit 10: (cont) Lesson 4 - Write A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know the steps to recycle waste paper and used tea leaves. They'll write instructions base on the prompts and pictures exactly. B- Language contents: Vocabulary The way to write an instruction. C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works D- Teaching aids: Extra board, work sheet, pictures, English 8. E- Procedure: I. Setting class: II. Checking the old lesson: Test 15 I. Choose the best option.( 5 pts) 1. We are .... tennis tomorrow afternoon. ( play, playing, played) 2. Lan works hard.... get scholarship. ( so as to, order to, so that) 3. .......... you mind if I turned on the TV? ( Will, Do, Would) 4. They have lived here........ 1982. ( for, in, since) 5. Huong loves ...... TV. ( watch, watching, to watch) II. Change the sentences into the passive voice.( 5 pts) 1. They buy that house. 2. I clean the bedroom. 3. Mr. Ba plants these trees. 4. Thay teach English subject..

(168) 5. Lan cuts a lot of trees. Key: I. 1. playing, 2. so as to, 3. Would, 4. since, 5. watching II. 1. That house is bought. 2. The bedroom is cleaned. 3. These trees are planted by Mr. Ba. 4. English subject is taught. 5. A lot of trees are cut by Lan. III. New lesson: Last period we knew some old things Pre – writing can be recycled in to new items. What about old newspapers ? Can we recycle them in to new items ? In this lesson we will know how to recycle papers not using any machines. - Ask ss to give some new words. Vocab - (to) soak: làm ướt (- to) dry: phơi khô - (to) mix: trộn lẫn - (to) press: ấn - Bucket (n): thùng, xô - overnight (adv) - wooden spoon (n): thìa gỗ - (to) mash: nghiền nát - wire mesh (n): lưới sắt - mosquito (n): con muỗi - tray (n): cái khay Who can tell me something about this - (to) scatter: rắc method ? Now we have the recycling instructions 1. Complete the recycling instructions. but they are not completed. Use the Use the verbs in the box. verbs in the box to complete them (Try your best to predict the new words in the paragraph) 1. use 5. Wrap - Compare your answers. 2. mix 6. wait - Call some Ss to read the text aloud. 3. place 7. dry - T corrects. 4. press - T lets Ss play the game "Slap the First, soak old newspaper in a bucket board" to check the Ss' predictions overnight . about the meanings of the words in the Then, mash the paper by a wooden text. spoon . - Divide the class in to teams. Next, mix the mashed paper with water . - Say the winners After that, use a wire mesh to pull the - Ss clap their hands. mixture out , put it on the cloth and press it down firmly ..

(169) What do you do with used tea leaves ? - Call a student to read the request of ex 2. - T guides Ss to write the instructions. - Call some Ss to read the writing. - T corrects.. Finally, take the mesh out of the cloth & dry it in the sun . Notes of instruction: First, Then Next, …….. Finally,. While - Writing 2. Complete the instructions on how to prepare the tea leaves. a. First, take the used tea leaves from the tea pot. b. Next, scatter the tea leaves on a tray. c. Then dry the leaves in the sun. d. Finally, put the dry leaves in a pot for future use. - Choose a thing then give some Post - Writing instructions to guide your friends to make. (Eg: orange leaves) - Call some pairs to practice - T controls and corrects. IV- Homework: - Learn by heart the text about recycling tea leaves and old papers - Prepare Language focus.

(170) Week : 22 Period: 64. Preparing day: / 2 / 2012 Teaching day: / 2 / 2012. Unit 10: Language focus A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand use of the passive from and change the affirmative from in to passive form exactly. They will be able to revise the structure "adj + to-inf/ Noun clause" and complete the dialogues and the letter exactly. B- Language contents: Grammar: Passive forms "adj + to-inf/ Noun clause" C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Teaching aids: Extra board, work sheet, pictures and reference books. E- Procedure: I. Setting class: II. Checking the old lesson: - Write 9 numbers on he board from 1 to 9 , then devide the class into 2 teams and begin to play. 1. Lucky number 2. Say this sentence in he passive “ people speak English everywhere “ 3. Say this sentence in the active “ cartoons are liked by most children “ 4. Lucky number 5. Lucky number 6. Say this sentence in the passive “ We do not use things carefully . “ 7. Say this sentence in the active “ Are candies liked by the children ? “ 8. Say this sentence in the passive “ Mr Han teaches Maths . “ 9. Say this sentence in the passive “ Vegetables do not eat meat . “ III. New lesson: - T guides Ss to understand the request of ex - T explains the passive forms. Câu chủ động là câu mà người, vật tác động lên người, vật khác..

(171) Câu bị động là câu mà người, vật bị tác động bởi người, vật khác. Eg1. We clean the classroom everyday.  The classroom is cleaned everyday. Eg2. Lan does her homework every morning. Eg3. Nobody understands her speech. Eg4. I will give you a new bike next month. Eg5. Lan often helps me. Eg6. My father will plant the tree in the garden tomorrow morning. * Các bước chuyển sang câu bị dộng. Bc1.Xác định thành phần câu: S, V, O, ADV OF FRE, ADV OF PLACE, ADV OF TIME(nếu có) Bc2. Chuyển O trong câu chủ động sang làm S trong câu bị động. (nếu ME – I, US – WE, YOU – YOU, THEM – THEY, HIM – HE, HER – SHE, IT - IT). Bc3. Xác định xem động từ chính của câu chủ động ở thì nào thì mượn động từ (to) be tương ững với chủ ngữ ở thì đó. Động từ chính được chuyển sang QKPT. Bc4. Chuyển S của câu chủ động sang làm O của câu bị động khi đó xảy ra 4 trường hợp sau. Trường hợp 1. Nếu S là các đại từ nhân xưng (I, WE, YOU, THEY, HE, SHE, IT, SOMEONE, SOMEBODY, SOMETHING, EVERYONE, EVERYBODY, EVERYTHING, PEOPLE) thì bỏ đi không cần dùng BY. Trường hợp 2. Nếu chủ ngữ là các danh từ riêng, chức danh chỉ nghề nghiệp thì dung BY +DTR / CDNN đó. Trường hợp 3. Nếu S và O chỉ cùng 1 đối tượng mà có sd các ĐTSH có DT kèm theo (HIS, HER, THEIR) thì khi chuyển lên làm S phải thay các ĐTSH đó + DTR’s. Trường hợp 4. Nếu S là NOONE, NOBODY, NOTHING thì trợ động từ mượn vào câu bị động phải chuyển sang phủ định. 1. Thì hiện tại đơn. Eg1. Lan often helps me do the difficult exercises. Eg2. The builders build a new house. Eg3. Someone sell flowers here. A: S + V (s, es) + O P: S + am / is / are + P2 + (by + O ) 2. Thì hiện tại tiếp diễn. Eg1. The builders are building a new house now. Eg2. Mr. Nam is repairing some televisions at the moment. A: S + am / is / are + Ving + O P: S + am / is / are + being + P2 + (by + O) 3. Thì hiện tại hoàn thành. Eg1. The builders have built a new house for 5 months. Eg2. Mr. Nam has repaired some televisions since yesterday. A: S + have / has + P2 + O P: S + have / has + been + P2 + (by + O) 4. Thì quá khứ đơn. Eg1. The builders built a new house 5 months ago..

(172) Eg2. Mr. Nam repaired some televisions yesterday. A: S + V (ed) + O P: S + was / were + P2 + (by + O) 5. Tì tương lai đơn. Eg1. The builders will build a new house next 5 months. Eg2. Mr. Nam will repair some televisions tomorrow. A: S + will + V (bare) + O P: S + will be + P2 + (by + O ) 6. Một số động từ khuyết thiếu. Eg1. The builders can build a beautiful house. Eg2. The builders must build a new school. Eg3. The builders are going to build a new school. A: S + can / could must / have to / had to may / might ought to / should am / is / are going to. + V (bare) + O. P: S + can / could + be + P2 + (by + O) must / have to / had to may / might ought to / should am / is / are going to - Now change the sentences in ex1 in to 1. Work with a partner. passive then put the pictures in the a - P1. The glass is broken in to small correct order. pieces. - T guides Ss to do part f. b- P4: Then the glass is washed with a - Compare your sentences. detergent liquid. - Call Ss to go to the board and write c- P3: The glass pieces are dried sentences. completely. - T corrects. d- P5: They are mixed with certain specific chemicals. e- P2: The mixture is melted until it becomes a liquid. f- P6: A long pipe is used. It is dipped in to the liquid. Then the liquid is blown in - Call a student to read the request of ex to intended shapes. 2. 2. Use the correct form of the verbs in - Guide Ss to complete it in pairs. the brackets. - Remark the verbs in the eg. The future simple tense - Call some pairs to practice. Passive voice. - T corrects. (1) will be shown - Explain the request (2) will be built - Call a student to read the words in the (3) will be finished.

(173) box. - Look at the eg and give the structure you learnt. - Now work in pairs, choose the words in the box and use the form to complete the dialogues. - Call some pairs to practice. - T corrects. After an adj is "to + inf" beside it after an adj is also a Noun clause. - T gives an eg. - Now choose an adj in the box and a correct form of the verb "be" to complete the letter. - Call a student to read the letter aloud. - T corrects.. (4) will be made 3. Complete the dialogues. Use the words in the box. Eg: It's difficult to follow your directions. It's + adj + to + inf (1) easy to understand (2) hard to believe (3) dangerous to go (4) important to wait 4. Complete the letter. Eg: I am happy that you feel better. Noun clause (1) was happy (2) am relieved (3) is afraid (4) are sure (5) am certain. IV- Consolidation: Change these following sentences into passive voice 1. Mary does some exercises every day. 2. My aunt makes good cakes. 3. Workers repair the roof of my school. 4. The new teacher teaches English. 5. Sleepy drivers often cause accidents. 6. English people like football. 7. Alice visits her grandparents every week. 8. My grandfather keeps old photographs in those boxes. 9. Bill feeds the chickens every morning. 10. Monica found the car. 11. A violent storm destroyed the fishing village. 12. The lawyer made the decision. V- Homework: - Learn by heart all the structures - Guide Ss to do the rest of the exercises in workbook. - Prepare Unit 11: Getting started + Listen and read. Week : 22 Period: 65. Preparing day: Teaching day:. Unit 11: Traveling around Vietnam Getting started + Listen and Read A- Objectives:. / 2/ 2012 / 2 / 2012.

(174) By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know some places of interest in Vietnam. They will understand the content of the dialogue and know some vocabulary and the structure express formal request. Ss will do ex T or F exactly. B- Language contents: Vocabulary concern the scenery in the countryside of Vietnam. Grammar: formal request. Would you mind + Ving ? If + S + V (past tense) C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Teaching aids: Pictures, cassette tape, reference books. E- Procedure: I. Setting class II. Checking the old lesson: Change these sentences in to passive voice. 1. They dry the books. 2. He will use that bicycle. 3. They can not mix the liquid. III. New lesson: - T asks Getting started Have you ever been to the paces of interest in Vietnam ? If yes. Do you like them ? - Guide Ss to play Net words. In Quang Ninh In Ho Chi Minh city Famous places. In Ha noi. In Hue. - Call a student to read the phrases in the box. - Ask Ss to work in groups of 3 to match the places with names. - Call Ss to give answers. - T corrects.. 1.c 2.a 3.d 4.b. - Choose a place you know and talk Listen and read about it. Vocab - Call some Ss to speak. - front seat (n): ghế trước - T introduces some new words. - water buffalo (n): con trâu.

(175) Pictures explaination - Checking by rub out and remember.. - corn = maze (n): ngô - sugar cane (n): cây mía - luggage (n): hành lý - farmland (n): đất trang trại - (to) take a photo : chụp ảnh. - Listen and answer the questions. ? Who are talking in the conversation ? ? Where are they ?. They're Tim, Hoa, Shannon and Mr Jones They're on the way through a paddy - Let Ss listen to the tape again. field. - Ask Ss to practice the dialogue in 1. Practice the dialogue in groups. groups. Call some groups to read. - Now read the dialogue again then do ex 2. True or false. 2. a. T - Compare your answers. Ss give b. T answers. c. F (in a taxi) - T corrects. d. T e. T f. F (Sugar canes) - T introduces the grammar.. Grammar: Formal request: Note: The verbs in 2 sentences. 1 - Would you mind sitting in the front a. 40-minute drive (noun in compound seat of the taxi, Mr Jones ? adjective) Would you mind + Ving ? 2 - Would you mind if I took a photo ? Would you mind + if + S + V(ed) ? Use : Dùng để đề nghị ai làm gì một Ask ss to practice cách lịch sự. 1. Turn on the TV 2. Turn off the faucets 3 – I can see a boy riding a water - Ask ss to find combine sentences buffalo. I can see a boy. He is riding a water Sentence1 + Ving + sentence 2 buffalo. 1. This is Ba. He is playing the piano. 2. The girls are Hoa and Nga. They are playing chess. IV- Consolidation: - Close the book and answer some questions: 1. Where does Hoa meet Tim? 2. Who does Tim come to VN with? 3. How do they travel to HN? 4. How long does it take them to get to HN? 5. What does Tim like to do on the way to HN?.

(176) V- Homework: - Learn by heart new words, model sentences, structure. - Read the dialogue at home. - Do ex 1 (108), ex 3 (109) – Textbook - Do ex 1 (65 ) workbook - Prepare Part Speak + Listen. Week : 22 Period: 66. Preparing day: Teaching day:. / 2 / 2012 / 2 / 2012. Unit 11: Speak A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use the structures with "Would you mind/ Do you mind........?" in different situations and respond these requests. Ss will understand the dialogue and match the places with the positions exactly. They will revise some prepositions. B- Language contents: Grammar: Formal requests. Would you mind/ Do you mind........? Use of some prepositions. C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Teaching aids: Extra board, cards, cassette tape, reference books E- Procedure: I. Setting class II. Checking the old lesson: S1, S2: Read the dialogue and answer the questions of the teacher..

(177) S3: Write new words on the boardand make sentences with two of those new words. S4: Make suggestion with Mind: 1 – Open the door. (Key: -Can /could you open the door? - Would you mind opening the door? - Would you mind if I opened the door?) III. New lesson: A – Speak - T introduces the table in book Pre - speaking - Help Ss distinguish the structures * Yêu cầu, đề nghị làm diều gì một cách with "Ving, V (past tense)". lịch sự. - Now use the structures in the table to Close the door give request and response. A: Do you mind clothing the door? - T gives some cards containing the Would you mind situations. : Do you mind if I close the door? :Would you mind if I closed the door? Structures Do you mind + Ving ? Would you mind + Ving ? More polite Do you mind if S + V (s,es)…..? Would you mind if + S + V (ed). . .? A student wants you to do ex 1 for him While - speaking A student wants to go out You want to eat cakes T: Good morning - Call some pairs to practice S: Good morning. What can I do for you ? - T corrects T: I want to visit a market.. Would you - Guide Ss to do ex in book mind suggesting one ? - Call 2 Ss to read the situation in book S: No. I don't mind. I suggest going to - Now imagine you are A and the other Ben Thanh Market. is B. Using the information given and the structures in the table to make requests and suggestions. - T makes an eg with a student. Post - speaking - Now work in pairs to make their own 1 – Mao Dien Temple in Cam Giang dialogues (7 a.m – 11.30 a.m ; 1.30p.m – 5 p.m) - Call some pairs to practice. 2 – The Temple of Literature in HN - T corrects (6 a.m – 6 p.m) Imagine you meet a person who visits your village for the first time. He (She) wants to know some places in your village. - Work in pairs to make dialogue. - Call some pairs to practice. B – Listen.

(178) - T corrects.. Pre – listening A map The roads, streets and places.. - T gives the map and asks. What's this ? What can you see in the map ? We know one place, the others (5 Vocab places) we don't know. - highway (n): đường cao tốc - T introduces new words. - tourist information center (n): trung tâm thông tin du lịch Match the places in the box to their - T calls a student to read the requests correct positions on the map. of part Listen. - Let Ss read the places in the box and predict the places in the map. - Call Ss to give prediction. While - listening - Now listen to the tape and check your Keys: prediction. - Let Ss listen to the tape. a. restaurant - Now check your prediction. b. hotel - Listen again and correct your c. bus station predictions. d. pagoda - Share your answers e. temple - Call some Ss to read the answers. Can you tell me the sentences help you confirm the answers ? - T corrects and gives the key. Post - listening - T gives a map. Start from school - Ask Ss to work in groups and give direction to some places. - Call some groups to practice. - T corrects. IV- Homework: - Write 5 sentences with "mind" and response. - Write a paragraph showing the way to the school from your house. - Learn by heart new words. - Do ex 3, 4 (109,110) Textbook - Prepare part Read..

(179) Week : 23 Period: 67. Preparing day: Teaching day:. Unit 11: Listen. / 2 / 2012 / 2 / 2012. A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use the structures with "Would you mind/ Do you mind........?" in different situations and respond these requests. Ss will understand the dialogue and match the places with the positions exactly. They will revise some prepositions. B- Language contents: Grammar: Formal requests. Would you mind/ Do you mind........? Use of some prepositions. C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Teaching aids: Extra board, cards, cassette tape, reference books E- Procedure: I. Setting class II. Checking the old lesson: S1, S2: Read the dialogue and answer the questions of the teacher. S3: Write new words on the boardand make sentences with two of those new words. S4: Make suggestion with Mind: 1 – Open the door. (Key: -Can /could you open the door? - Would you mind opening the door? - Would you mind if I opened the door?) III. New lesson:.

(180) - Now imagine you are A and the other is B. Using the information given and the structures in the table to make requests and suggestions. - T makes an eg with a student. - Now work in pairs to make their own dialogues - Call some pairs to practice. - T corrects. Listen Pre – listening A map The roads, streets and places. Vocab - highway (n): đường cao tốc - tourist information center (n): trung tâm thông tin du lịch. - Imagine you meet a person who visits Match the places in the box to their your village for the first time. He (She) correct positions on the map. wants to know some places in your village. - Work in pairs to make dialogue. - Call some pairs to practice. While - listening - T corrects. Keys: - T gives the map and asks. a. restaurant What's this ? b. hotel What can you see in the map ? c. bus station We know one place, the others (5 d. pagoda places) we don't know. e. temple - T introduces new words. - T calls a student to read the requests of part Listen. - Let Ss read the places in the box and predict the places in the map. - Call Ss to give prediction. - Now listen to the tape and check your prediction. - Let Ss listen to the tape. - Now check your prediction. - Listen again and correct your predictions. - Share your answers - Call some Ss to read the answers. - T corrects.. Post – listening Can you tell me the sentences help you confirm the answers ? - T corrects and gives the key. - T gives a map. Start from school - Ask Ss to work in groups and give direction to some places. - Call some groups to practice.. IV- Homework: - Write 5 sentences with "Do you mind/ Would you mind" and response..

(181) - Write a paragraph showing the way to the school from your house. - Learn by heart new words. - Do ex 3, 4 (109,110) Textbook - Prepare part Read.. Week : 23 Period: 68. Preparing day: Teaching day:. / 2 / 2012 / 2 / 2012. Unit 11: Read A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know the sights, accommodation of 4 places of interest in Vietnem. They are Nha Trang, Dalat, Sapa and Halong Bay. Base on the contents of the advertisements. Ss will complete 2 exercises in book. B- Language contents: Vocabulary concern places of interest in Vietnem C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Teaching aids: Extra board, pictures, advertisements on newspaper, reference books. E- Procedure: I. Setting class: II.Warm up: Make sentences with Mind: 1. turn on the TV 2. play chess with me. ? Have you been to the tourist places in VN?What are their names? Today we are going to some famous places in VN.They are Nha Trang, Da Lat, Ha Long, Sa Pa. III. New lesson: - T introduces the lesson. Pre - reading - T introduces some new words. Vocab Pictures on pages 102 + 103 - oceanic Institute (n): viện hải dương Translation học Explaination - giant Buddha (n): tượng phật khổng lồ Check R and R - off shore island (n): Đảo xa bờ - water fall (n): thác nước - tribal village (n): bộ tộc - UNESCO (United nations Educational Scientific and cultural organization) (n): Tổ chuwcslieen hiệp quốc về văn hóa, khoa học và giáo dục - World Heritage (n): di sản thế giới - limestone island (n): đảo đá vôi.

(182) - Ask ss to do ex T or F. - Ask ss to do it individually, then compare with a partner and give the result. 1. There are giant Buddha, offshore islands and oceanic institute in Da Lat. 2. There are waterfalls, lakes, railway and flower gardens in Nha Trang. 3. There are tribal villages, beautiful mountain slopes and jungle streams in Sa Pa. 4. There are magnificent caves, beautiful limestone islands, and quite sand beaches in Nha Trang.. Sen ten Pridiction ces. Result. St1 St2 St3 St1 St2 St3 S1 S2 S3 S4. While – reading. Key: 1- F, 2 – F, 3 – T, 4 - F 1. Check (V) the topics. 1. Caves: Ha Long bay 2. flights to Hanoi: Nha Trang 3. hotels: Da Lat, Sa pa, ha Long Bay 4. local transport: 4 places 5. mini-hotels: Ha Long bay 6. mountain slopes: Sapa 7. railway: Nha Trang 8. restaurants: no place 9. sand beaches: Ha Long bay 10. tourist attractions: 4 places 11. types of food: no place 12. villages: Sapa 13. water falls: Da lat 14. world heritage: Ha Long bay 2. Answer. Where should these people go? - Call a student to read the request of a. Sapa ex2. b. Nha Trang - Guide Ss to do the ex in groups of 4. c. Nha Rong harbor Now read the brochures again and read d. ha Long the information about Andrew, Mary, e. Da lat John, Janame and Donna then check (V) the boxes. - Call Ss to give answer and explain. - T corrects. Post – reading - Now read the brochures quickly and check the ex 1 T or F. - Ask Ss to read the advertisements again and do Ex1: - Share your answers. - Call Ss to give answers. - T corrects.

(183) - Ask Ss to discuss 2 questions below. Andrew should go to Sapa because Sapa 1. What should Andrew / Mary / John / is a mountainous resort and has many Joanne / Donna spend their coming tribal villages. summer vacation in VN? Why? - Call some Ss to speak. - ask ss to retell something about some famous places in VN.. IV- Homework: - Read the brochures again, learn by heart new words. - write a paragraph about famous places in VN: Beginning. In VN, there are many famous places but I like ………….. the best.Because - Guide Ss to do ex 1 (P. 65); ex 2 (P. 65); ex 8 (P. 68) - Prepare part Write.. Week : 23 Period: 69. Preparing day: Teaching day:. Unit 11: Write. / 2 / 2012 / 2 / 2012. A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write a paragraph to describe something in chronological time order or space order. Ss will put the events in order and write about them..

(184) B- Language contents: Vocabulary concern adventures. Narrative writing C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works D- Teaching aids: Extra board, work sheet, pictures, reference books. E- Procedure: I. Setting class: II. Checking the old lesson: S1, 2, 3, 4: tell something about Sapa, Da Lat, Nha Trang, Ha Long Bay. Where should you go if you had a chance to go on a tourist? Why? III. New lesson: Pre – writing Give some new words Vocab Pictures Paddle (n): mái chèo Mime (v) chèo Check: R and R Canoe (n) xuồng, ca nô (to) rescue:cứu (to) lean:nghiêng (to) overturn: lật úp (to) drop: làm rơi (to) stumble: vâp, trượt chân - Ask ss to look at part 1 and answer (to) go off: reo ầm vang some questions. Pool(n): vũng nước - 1. What did the Browns go last week?. - They went to Xuan Huong lake in Da Lat. - 2. What was the weather like? - It was bad. Ask Ss to retell an event happened 1. Put the sentences in correct order. yesterday. Key: - base on the story he/ she told c-a-g-d-f-b-e - Call a student to read the request of ex 1. - Now read the sentences in silence and put them in right order. - Compare your answers. - Call some Ss to give answers. - T corrects. - T emphasizes the time. - Call a student to read the whole story. - Ask ss to look at the pictures on pages 2. Put the events in correct order then 106 + 107.These pictures are about complete the story. Uyen’s memorable day. - Now work in pairs to put the pictures d - b - e - h - a - f - c - g in the correct order. - Compare your answers..

(185) - T calls Ss to give answers. - T corrects. - Now use the words given to complete Uyen's story. - Go round the class and help them if necessary. - Call Ss to go to the board and write sentences. - T corrects.. Uyen had a day to remember last week. d. She had a math exam on Friday and she got up late. b. She realized her alarm clock didn't go off. e. As she was leaving home, it started to rain heavily h. Uyen tried to run as fast as she could a. Suddenly she stumbled against a rock and fell. f. Her school bag went in to pool of water and everything got well. c. Strangely, the rain stopped as she got to her classroom g. Luckily, Uyen had enough time to finish her exam. Post – writing S1: One day our class had a trip in Hung Temple last month. - Ask ss to make their own story by S2: Huong , one of my friends got lost. . playing a game:Chain game …… S3: IV- Homework: - Write your stories in your notebooks - Guide Ss to do ex 9 (P. 69) - Prepare Language focus. Week : 24 Period: 70. Preparing day: Teaching day:. / 2 / 2012 / 2 / 2012. Unit 11: Language focus A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use "-ed" and "-ing" participles to make full sentences base on the pictures given. They will be able to give the suggestions and responses in different situations with "Would you mind.....?" and "Do you mind......?" B- Language contents: Grammr: "-ed" and "-ing" participles Request with Would you mind if...............? Do you mind if...............? Would you mind + Ving? Would you mind + Ving? C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Teaching aids:.

(186) Extra board, reference books, pictures E- Procedure: I. Setting class: II. Checking the old lesson: S1: Read the story you wrote at home S2: Read the story in ex 9 (P. 69) III. New lesson: - Give some new words Vocab Pictures on pages 108 + 109 (to) step: bước lên Realia Doorstep (n): bậc thang Check: R and R (to) keep in: ở bên trong (to) put out: bỏ đi, vứt đi Cigarette(n): thuốc lá Dollar (n): đồng đô la - T asks Ss answer about activities of 1. Look at the picture. Say who each people in the picture person is. What is the boy in green shirt doing ? Eg: The boy is Ba. He is reading a book What is the teacher doing ? under a tree. -> The boy reading a book under the tree is - Ss make similar sentences with the Ba. people in the rest of pictures. * Note: Ing- participles (active participle) - Call Ss to read the sentences. is used to shorten the adj- clause. - T corrects. The man walking up the stairs is Mr Quang. The woman carrying a bag is Miss Lien. The boy standing next to Miss Lien is Nam. The girls playing chess are Nag on the right and Hoa on the left. The girl standing by the table is Lan. - Call a student to read the request of 2. Describe the goods for sale. ex 2. - T asks How much is the lamp ? The lamp is $5. Where is it made ? It is made in Japan. - T explains use of "-ed" -> The lamp made in Japan is $5. * Note: ed-participle (passive participle) - Now look at the picture and describe is used to shorten the adj-clause. the goods. The green painted box is $1. - Compare your sentences. The truck made from recycle cans is $2. - Call Ss to read the sentences aloud. The doll dressed in pink is $2. - T corrects. The flowers wrapped in yellow paper are $1. The toys kept in a cardboard box are $10. - Guide Ss to do ex 3 3. Make and respond to request. - A student retells the form of the (V): agree request with "Would you mind ....?" (X): disagree - Call 2 Ss to read the eg - Now work in pairs. b. Would you mind putting out your.

(187) - Call some pairs to practice.. cigarettes ? No, of course not. c. Would you mind getting me some coffee ? I'm sorry d. Would you mind waiting a moment ? I'm sorry I can't. - Call 2 Ss to read the eg in book. 4. Work with a partner... - Now look at the pictures then ask c. Do you mind if I postpone our meeting ? and answer. Not at all. - Call some pairs to practice. d. Do you mind if I turn off the stereo ? I'd rather you didn't. e. Do you mind if I turn on the airconditioner ? Please do. f. Do you mind if I watch TV while eating lunch ? No, of course not. IV- Consolidation: - Retell the structures in the lesson. - Ask Ss to work in groups using the structures in the lesson to make a dialogue with different situations. - Call some groups to practice. V- Homework: - Redo all the exercises at home. - Guide Ss to do ex 4 (P. 66), ex 5 (P. 67 - Make sentences with: Mind, Ed, Ing - Prepare: Revision.

(188) Week : 24 Period: 71. Preparing day: Teaching day:. / 2 / 2012 / 2 / 2012. Revision A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to revise what they learn from Unit 9 to Unit 11 and use the structures to do exercises. B- Language contents: + Grammar: - in order to / so as to. - Make requests, offers & promises. - Passive voice. - Adj followed by an infinitive/ clause. - -ed/ -ing participles. - Request Would you/ Do you mind if ........? Would you/ Do you mind + V- ing....? + New words: from Unit 9 to Unit11. C. Work arrangements. Individual works, pair works, group works D. Materials: Reference books, extra board E. Procedure. I. Setting class II. Warm up III. New lesson * Revision the main Grammar and structure grammar. 1. Unit 9. A first aid course - T asks Ss to retell the 1. In order to/ so as to. structures. - ''in order to/ so as to'' is followed by a verb to show the - T summarizes and purpose. writes on the board. Sentence1,2 + so as to + verb(of sentence2,1). T asks and Ss answer in order to When do we use ''in Eg:We learn E in order to/ so as to communicate with.

(189) order to/ so as to'' ? Give an example.. people in the world.. - T gives the situations and Ss give the 2. Make requests, offfers & promises. requests, offers or - ''Will'' is expressed the intention in the future and promises. requests. Eg: Will you get me a newspaper? Would you like some coffee? (offer) I'll help you when you need. (promise) Will you go to the zoo with me? (invitation) 2. Unit 10. Recycling 1. Passive voice. * Form: - The present simple tense( thi hien tai đơn) - Guide Ss to remember Eg1. Lan cleans the classroom. the way to change S V O positive sentences in to -> The classroom is cleaned by Lan. passive forms. S+ am / is / are + participle + by + O - T gives examples to - The future simple tense (thi tuong lai đơn). explain Eg1. Lan will clean the classroom. S v o - > The classroom will be cleaned by Lan. Note the objects are S+ will be + participle + by + o. object pronouns * Note: the objects - I -> me -It-> It - you-> you - We-> us - he-> him - They-> them - she-> her 2. adj is followed by a bare infinitive S + (to) be+ adj + to + V... S+ (to) be + adj + that + clause….. Tell me the parts after Eg: It's easy to do this ex. an adjectives ? + adj is followed by a clause Give examples. * S + tobe+ adj + that cl. Eg:They 're afraid that you refuse their invitation. 3. Unit 11 Traveling around VN 1. Request + Do/ Would you mind + V- ing ? + Do you mind if + S + V (s,es) ? Retell the requests with + Would you mind if + S + V (ed) ? "mind" ? Eg: Do you mind closing the door? Would you mind if she phoned you? 2. Present participle/ past participle. * - ING- Participle (the present participle) is formed by adding "ing" after verbs. Eg: Reading the book.

(190) -Eg: The boy reading the book in the library is my friend. * -ED participle (past participle) The way to form Eg: The book put on the table is mine. Present participle/ past participle. Exercise Give example ? Ex1: Combine the sentences, using '' in order (not)to/ so as(not)to.'' 1. He always drives carefully. He doesn't want to cause accidents. - He always........in order not to/ so as not to cause accidents. - Ask Ss to practice 2. The boys stood on the beaches. They wanted to get doing some ex. better view. - T guide Ss to do, - The boys stood on the beaches in order to/ so as to corrects and get...... emphasizes the notes. 3. She wears warm clothes. She doesn't want to get cold. -She wears warm clothes so as not to get cold. Ex2: Ex 5/ p.61 in workbook. + Key. b. The bottles are cut in to small pieces. c. The small pieces are mixed with .......... d. The mixture is heated into ....... e. The liquid is blown into ...... Ex3.: Combine the sentences using V-ing/Ed. 1. The baby is crying for her mother. She's sitting in an armchair. - The baby sitting an armchair is crying for her mother. 2. The boy was taken to the hospital. He was injured in the accident. - The boy injured in the accident was taken to the hospital. 3. ''Romeo & Juliet'' is the best tragedy I have ever seen. It was written by Shakespeare. - R&J written by Shakespeare. is the best tragedy I have ever seen. IV- Homework: Revise all the knowledge and redo the exercises in work book for the test next period..

(191) MA trËn NhËn biÕt Chủ đề. Listening Sè c©u hái Sè ®iÓm. TNK Q. TL. TNK Q. TL. VËn dông ThÊp Cao TNK TL TNK TL Q Q. 5. Céng. 5 2.0 20%. 2.0. Vocabulaty and grammar Sè c©u hái 5 Sè ®iÓm 1.2 language function Sè c©u hái Sè ®iÓm. Th«ng hiÓu. 5. 10 2.5 25%. 1.3. 10. 10 2.0. 10 2.0 20%. 2.0. reading Sè c©u hái Sè ®iÓm. 2. 3 1 .0. 5 1.5. 2.5 25%. writing Sè c©u hái Sè ®iÓm. Tæng sè c©u 22 hái Tæng sè ®iÓm. 10. 10 2.0 20%. 2.0 8 5.2. 10 2.8. 2.0.

(192) Week : 24 Period: 72. Preparing day: Teaching day:. / 2 / 2012 / 2 / 2012. Test 45 minutes A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to revise what they learnt from Unit 9 to Unit 11 and finish the test correctly. Ss will be able to find out what they learnt well and what the learnt not well to revise after the period. B- Language contents: Vocabulary, Grammar, 3 skills: listening, writing and reading. C- Work arrangements: Individual D- Teaching aids: The content of the test. E- Procedure: I. Warm up: II. Checking Ss' preparation. A. The test I- Listen then choose a ,b ,c or d for each sentence. (2pts) 1. Who wrote the letter ? a. Hung b. Trang c. Mai d. Loan 2. Hung sent Trang a.............. a. cat b. dog c. book d. postcard 3. Trang feels very ....................now. a. sad b. happy c. unhappy d. bored 4. Trang will........Hung on Sunday. a. chat b. write c. invite d. phone II. Circle the word which has underline part is pronounced different from the others. (1pt) 1. A. beaches B. goes C. fishes D. kisses 2. A. enjoyed B. invented C.mended D. lasted 3. A. wear B. we C. who D. walk 4. A. railway B. daily C. train D. airport 5. A. crutch B. hurt C. hurry D. cup III. Choose the best word to complete each sentence below. (2pts) 1. He usually does morning exercises ………….. have good health. (so as, in order to, because) 2. …………. you mind if you went out with me? (Do, Would, What) 3. Do you mind …………. the computer?.

(193) (repair, repairing, repaired) 4. The classroom…………. everyday. (cleans, is clearned, will be cleaned) 5. The girls ……… chess are Hoa and Mai. (playing, play, are playing) 6. It’s difficult……….your math test. (do, to do, doing) 7. The doll …………in China is 5 dollars. (make, making, made) 8. I’ve learned English…………. 2 years. (for, since, in) 9. Look Shannon! I can see a boy………..a water buffalo. (ride, riding, ridden). 10. Do you mind if I …….the window? It is very cold here. (closeing, closing, close) B – The answers I. (2pts) One correct word has 0,5pts. 1 – b, 2 – a, 3 – b, 4 – c. II. (1pt) One correct word has 0,2pts. 1 – B, 2 -A, 3 –C, 4 –D, 5 - B III. (2pts) One correct word has 0,2pts. 1 – in order to 6 – to do 2 – Would 7 - made 3 – reparing 8 - for 4 – is cleaned 9 - riding 5 – playing 10 – close IV. (2.5pts) One correct sentence has 0,5pts. 1. John Baines is interested in all thing to do with environment and the need to protect it. 2. Tow years ago, he got his bicycle out of the garbage and repaired it. 3. He always walks to the shops. 4. Yes, he does. 5. He takes these bags to places where they can be recycled. V. (2.5pts) One correct sentence has 0,5pts. 1. Last week, we had a vacaton in Da Lat. 2. It was an adventure. 3. One afternoon, we decided to hire a canoe. 4. We climbed in and paddled out to the middle of Ho Xuan Huong lake. 5. Unfortunately, dard clouds appeared and then rained heavily.. Tape transcript. Dear Hung, Thank you very much for the cat you sent me while I was in Da Lat. The cat is very intelligent and I like it very much. Now I am in Hanoi. My parents are in Hanoi too.

(194) and I feel very happy. Next Sunday I'm going to have a party to celebrate my 14th birthday and I'd like to invite you to my house. I hope you will come. I'll phone you. Yours Trang IV- Collecting the papers and remark the period V- Homework: Redo the test at home and prepare Unit 12: Getting started + Listen and read.. Week : 25 Period: 73. Preparing day: Teaching day:. / 2 / 2012 / 2 / 2012. Unit 12: A vacation abroad Lesson 1 - Getting started + Listen and read A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to match the flags with the countries. They will have knowledge about vacation abroad base on the content of the dialogue between Mrs Smith and Mrs Quyen. Ss will revise the present progressive and invitations..

(195) B- Language contents: Vocabulary Grammar: the present progressive and invitations. C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Teaching aids: Cassette tape, pictures, reference books. E- Procedure: I. Warm up: II. Checking the old lesson: 2 Ss make a short dialogue with any topic using "Would you mind/ Do you mind ?" III. New lesson: Look at the pictures in book. - Read the words in the box then work in pairs to match the countries with the flags. - Compare your answers. - Call some Ss to give answers. - T corrects and asks some questions. Why do you know it is the United States of America ? Have you ever been to the United States of America ?. Getting started 1. Matching names with flags.. a. The United States of America b. Australia c. Thailand d. Britain e. Canada f. Japan. - Ask 2 Ss to read the dialogue in book. - Now choose one of the countries above and make similar dialogues in pairs. - Call some pairs to practice.. 2. Tell your partner which country you mind like to visit and why ? Eg: A: Which countries do you like to visit ? B: I like to visit Thailand. A: Why ? B: Because there are a lot of old pagodas - Now look at the pictures in book then there. answer my questions. Listen and read Who are in the picture ? They're Mrs Smith and Mrs Quyen. What are they doing ? They're talking on the phone. Where are they ? Mrs Smith is in the USA. Mrs Quyen is in Ha Noi. - T introduces some new words. - Checking by rub out and remember.. Vocab - (to) include: bao gồm - suitable (adj): thích hợp - (to) pick up: đón, rước ai - business meeting (n): cuộc họp bàn về kinh doanh - unfortulately (adv): không may.

(196) - the following evening: tối hôm sau - Ask ss to listen to the tape and answer somes questions. 1. Where are they going on Monday? 2. Will they stay at Mrs Smith’s house? 3. Who is always working? - Now work in pairs to read the dialogue. - Call some pairs to practice. - T corrects pronunciation - Listen to the tape again and complete Mrs Quyen's schedule. - Compare your table. - Call Ss to go to the board and complete the table. - T corrects.. Date Schedule. -> San Francisco -> No, they won’t. -> Mr Thanh.. 1. Complete Mrs Quyen's schedule.. Mrs Quyen's schedule Monday 25 Tuesday 26 Wednesday 27 Coming to San Going out Francisco. - Now work in pairs to answer the questions. - Compare your answers. - Call Ss to answer (give the sentences in the dialogue). Thursday 28. Having dinner Leaving San with the Smiths Francisco. 2. Answer the following questions. a. No, they won't. Because they are coming on a tour, and their accommodation is included in the ticket price, so they will stay at a hotel. b. No, he won't. Because he will have a business meeting in the evening that day. - T asks Ss to read the dialogue then c. Mrs Smith will pick her up at her show the invitations. hotel. - T explains Grammar: He is always working. Form: S + (to )be + always + V-ing Use: always luôn dùng ở thì tiếp diễn để diễn tả ý phàn nàn. IV- Consolidation: - Summarize the main content of the dialogue in a short paragraph. - Call some Ss to read their paragraph. V- Homework: - Learn by heart new words..

(197) - Practice reading the dialogue at home - Make sentences with the structures in Grammar - Prepare parts Speak + Listen. Week : 25 Period: 74. Preparing day: Teaching day:. / 2 / 2012 / 3 / 2012. Unit 12: Speak A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to make a plan for themselves on a vacation. They will know the vocabulary which are often used in tourist advertisements. They will be able to listen to the weather forecast and fill in the information in the gap exactly. Ss will have a chance to revise the adjectives about the weather. B- Language contents: Vocabulary Grammar: making plan. C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Teaching aids: Extra board, reference books, posters, brochures, cassette tape. E- Procedure: I. Warm up: II. Checking the old lesson: 2 Ss read the dialogue. 1 student writes new words and make sentences on the board. III. New lesson: A – Speak.

(198) Have you ever been abroad ? - Now imagine you're going abroad - Look at the brochures and flight information to write itinerary. - Call 2 Ss to read the dialogue in book and ask them to complete the itinerary. - Now look at the brochures. - T explains new words.. Pre - speaking. Vocab - rate per night: giá phòng một đêm - via (v): đi qua - gym (n): phòng tập thể dục - business center (n): trung tâm thương mại - art gallery (n): phòng triển lãm nghệ - Now work in pairs to complete the thuật itinerary. - Call some pairs to practice. While - speaking Eg: Depart Los Angeles: 14.00 A: Where shall we stay ? Arrive Boston: 18.00 B: We'll stay at Atlantic hotel. The price Accommodation: The Atlantic Hotel there is reasonable and it also has a Sight seeing: Boston University, art swimming pool. galleries A: What time shall we leave Los Depart Boston: Thursday. Angeles ? B: The flight will depart at 14.00 on Monday and we'll arrive in Boston at 18.00. As scheduled, we'll leave Boston on Thursday. A: What are we going to do then ? B: We'll visit Boston University, art galleries and eat seafood. Hong Ngoc hotel Tel: o4 5657432 Fax: 04 5658907 Rates per night: 100-120 VND, single 150-180 VND, double Facilities: restaurants, swimming pool - T corrects.. Post - speaking Bus information From Hai Phong to Hanoi Every 15 minutes, two hour trip Via Hai Duong and Hung Yen Price: 23.000 VND/ ticket. - T remarks and corrects.. IV- Homework: - Learn by heart new words. - Complete your weather forecast. - Guide Ss to do ex 3 (P. 71), ex4 (P. 71, 72) 400F = 4,50C 750F = 240C.

(199) 500F = 100C 570F = 140C - Prepare part Read.. Week : 25 Period: 75. 800F = 270C 900F = 320C. Preparing day: Teaching day:. / 2 / 2012 / 3 / 2012. Correcting the test 45 minutes A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know what they learnt well and what they learnt not well to control the methods to revise the old knowledge they learnt and learn next time better. B- Correct the test: I. Yêu cầu HS xác định lại đề bài trong bài kiểm tra. II. Nhận xét: A. Ưu điểm: - HS làm bài và nộp bài đầy đủ, đúng thời gian quy định. - HS tập trung làm bài và có ý thức hoàn thành bài kiểm tra. - Có nhiều HS trình bày bài kiểm tra sạch sẽ, chữ viết đẹp. B. Nhược điểm: - Bên cạnh những HS viết chữ đẹp, trình bày bài kiểm tra sạch sẽ còn có nhiều HS viết chữ cẩu thả, trình bày kiểm tra luộm thuộm. - Còn nhiều HS không học bài kĩ trước khi làm bài kiểm tra nên làm bài sai và lạc đề. - Các lớp B, còn nhìn bài của nhau. C. Thông báo kết quả: GV thông báo kết quả từ điểm cao xuống thấp theo số điểm bộ môn từ đó rút ra kinh nghiệm học bài và làm bài cho HS. Lớp <5 5-<8 8 - 10 Số lượng % Số lượng % Số lượng % 8A 8B D. Tuyên dương, phê bình: * Tuyên dương: GV tuyên dương những HS làm bài tốt, đạt điểm cao..

(200) * Phê bình: GV nhắc nhở phê bình những HS làm bài yếu kém. III. Chữa lỗi sai: I. Loại bài tập nghe hiểu: - Hầu hêt HS làm bài này tốt vì phù hợp với trình dộ của các em. II. Loại bài tìm từ có cách phát âm khác so với các từ còn lại. - HS lớp 8A làm tương đổi tốt, HS lớp 8B làm kém vì phát âm không chuẩn. - Nhắc lại cách phát âm với ED, S và ES. III. Loại bài chọn đáp án đúng. 1. in order to (structure) 2. Would (structure) 3. repairing (structure) 4. is cleaned (structure) 5. playing (structure). 6. to do (structure) 7. made (structure) 8. for (structure) 9. riding (structure) 10. close (structure). IV. Loại bài tập đọc đọn văn và trả lời câu hỏi: Vẫn còn hiện tượng HS nhầm lẫn giữa câu hỏi dạng Y –N với câu hỏi có từ để hỏi. V. Loại bài tập hoàn thành câu truyện với các từ gợi ý cho sẵn. 1. Last week we had a vacation in Dalat. 2. It was an adventure. 3. One afternoon, we decided to hire a canoe. 4. We climbed in and paddle out in the middle of Ho Xuan Huong lake. 5. Unfortunately, dark cloulds appeared and then rained heavily. C. Homework - Revise the knowledge you learnt not well at home. - Redo the exercise at home - Prepare part Listen.. Week : 26. Preparing day:. / 2 / 2012.

(201) Period: 76. Teaching day:. / 3 / 2012. Unit 12: Listen A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to make a plan for themselves on a vacation. They will know the vocabulary which are often used in tourist advertisements. They will be able to listen to the weather forecast and fill in the information in the gap exactly. Ss will have a chance to revise the adjectives about the weather. B- Language contents: Vocabulary Grammar: making plan. C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Teaching aids: Extra board, reference books, posters, brochures, cassette tape. E- Procedure: I. Warm up: II. Checking the old lesson: 2 Ss read the dialogue. 1 student writes new words and make sentences on the board. III. New lesson: Have you ever been abroad ? - Now imagine you're going abroad. B – Listen Pre - listening It's cold and rainy. Hong Ngoc hotel Tel: o4 5657432 Fax: 04 5658907 Rates per night: 100-120 VND, single 150-180 VND, double Facilities: restaurants, swimming pool What's the weather like today ? What's the weather like in spring, summer, fall and winter in Viet Nam ? Do you often listen to the weather forecast ? What information does the weather forecast provide you ? - T uses pictures to introduce the vocabulary.. Vocab - minus degree : độ âm - zero degree: không độ - degree centigrate: độ C Listen to the weather reports. Then fill in the table with the information you hear.. City. While - listening Weather. temperat ure Low. High.

(202) - Call a student to read the request of part "Listen" - Call a student to read the words in the table "weather" - Check the meaning of some words. - Now look at the table "temperature" and read the information in silence. We are going to listen to a weather broadcast. You listen and complete the table with the weather information you hear about the big cities in the world. The information include weather characteristics and details of temperature in the cities. - Ask ss to guess some words. - Now listen to the tape, please. - Compare what you hear with your friends. - Listen to the tape again and check your answers. - Call Ss to give answers. - Let Ss listen to the tape to finish difficult parts. - T corrects.. Sydney Tokyo London Bangkok Newyork P aris. Dry, windy Dry, windy Humid, cold Warm, dry Windy,cloud y Cold, dry. 20 15 -3 24 8 10. 26 22 7 32 15 16. Post – listening - Divide the class in to 4 groups then prepare a weather forecast about a big city in Viet Nam. - Call some Ss to read the weather forecast.. - T remarks and corrects. IV- Homework: - Learn by heart new words. - Complete your weather forecast. - Guide Ss to do Ex in the workbook - Prepare part Read.. Week : 26 Period: 77. Preparing day: Teaching day:. / 3 / 2012 / 3 / 2012. Unit 12: Read A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know more about the famous places of interest in the USA. They will use the information they read to complete the table What Mrs Quyen did and saw in each of the places and answer the questions exactly. B- Language contents: Vocabulary Grammar: The past progressive tense. C- Work arrangements:.

(203) Individual works, pair works, group works D- Teaching aids: Pictures, post cards, reference books. E- Procedure: I. Warm up: II. Checking the old lesson: S1: Report the information about the weather of Hanoi in the weather forecast you watched or heard yesterday. S2: Do parts b, c, d of ex 4 (P. 71,72) III. New lesson: - T asks Pre - reading Do you remember Mrs Quyen ? Vocab Mrs Quyen is in the USA now. - volcano(n): núi lửa Can you guess what places she and - lava(n): dung nham, nham thạch her husband visited. - (to) pour out: tưôn trào - As you know Mrs Quyen and her - overhead (adv): phía trên đầu husband went on a holiday in YSA. - wharf (n): cầu cảng, cảng They visited a lot of famous places of - valley (n): thung lũng interest. - prision (n): nhà tù - Give some new words - (to) carve: chạm khắc Pictures on p116 + 117 Mime Check: R and R - Ask ss to open the bok and do Ex T Predition Result or F. S1 S2 S2 S1 S2 S3 1. They saw lava pouring out when they flew overhead at Kilauea volcano. 2. They went on a six – hpur tour which included Fisherman’ wharf, the Napa valley and the famous prision. 3. There ar five heads of 5 American presidents are carved into the rocks of Mount Rushmore. 4. Chicago is called “ The snowy city”. 5. Mr Thanh was visiting the State of Liberty and the Empire State Building while Mrs Quyen went shopping. While – reading - Ask ss to open the book and read in Key: 1 – T, 2 – F, 3 – F, 4 – T, 5 - T silent and correct Ex T or F. - Ask ss to guess the meaning from the context. Matching - Ask ss to do it individually, then a. Ngư phủ compare with a partner and give the 1.Island (n) 2. Fisherman (n) b. bờ (hồ) result..

(204) - Call a student to read the request of ex 1. - Now read the postcards again then fill the information in the table. - Compare the table with your friends. - Call Ss to give answers. - T corrects.. - Call a student to read the request of ex 2. - Now read the postcards then find the answers. - Compare your answers. - Call Ss to read the answers. - T corrects. - T introduces grammar.. 3.wine growing(n) c. Tượng nữ 4. (to) situate thân tự do 5. shore(n) d. Đảo 6.Statue of e. trồng nho liberty(n) f. đặt để 1. Write what Mrs Quyen did and saw in each of these places. Place What she did and saw a. Hawaii - went swimming, visited Kilauea Volcano b.New york - went shopping, bought lots of souvenirs c. Chicago - Saw lake Michigan d.Mount - saw the head of 4 Rushmore American Presidents e.San - visited Fisherman’s Francisco wharf, the Napa valley, wine – growing area, and the Alcatraz prision. 2. Answer the following questions. a. She went there by plane. b. She saw the famous prison on the island of Alcatraz. c. It is amount where the heads of 4 American presidents are carved in to the rock. d. It is also called "The windy city" . e. She went shopping. Post – reading Grammar:. -> The lava was pouring out when we flew ? How did Mrs Quyen write when she overhead. ? While Mr Thanh was visiting the Statue saw the lava poured ? ? What did Mrs Quyen do while her of liberty and the Empire State Building, husband was visiting the Statue of she went shopping. Form: S + was / were + V – ing liberty? Use:Dùng để diễn tả những sự việc đang diễn ra tại thời điểm xác định trong quá khứ.. 1. Lan / listen / music / when / I / come 2. They / phone / while / we / have dinner..

(205) IV- Homework: - Learn by heart the places in the lesson, vocab, structures - Ask ss to do ex 1 (119) textbook, 6 (P. 74) workbook - Find a postcard and write about the place in the postcard. - Prepare Write. Week : 26 Period: 78. Preparing day: Teaching day:. / 3 / 2012 / 3 / 2012. Unit 12: Write A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to complete the postcard of Mrs Quyen. They will know the content of the words in the postcard and write postcards to friends by themselves. C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Teaching aids: Postcard, reference books, extra board. E- Procedure: II. Checking the old lesson: S1: Retell the places Mrs Quyen visited and what she saw in the places.S2: Read the words in the postcard you write at home. III. New lesson:.

(206) - Divide the class in to 2 teams and ask Pre – writing them to make a list of activities on Activities on holiday holiday. + go sight seeing - Call Ss to read the activities + take photographs + buy postcards + send postcards + eat special food + meet friends + visit relatives 1. Do you always send postcards to 1. Complete the postcard Mrs Quyen your friends or relatives when you're on send from the USA. holiday ? 1. in 2. people What do you write on the postcards ? 3. weather 4. visited - Now read Mrs Quyen's postcard then 5. her 6. nice complete tit. 7. bought 8. for - Check your answer. 9. heaviness - Call Ss to read the postcard aloud. 10. soon - T corrects. 2. Write a postcard to a friend about your trip. Key: Dear John, I am having a wonderful time in HLB. The people are very friendly and hospitable. The weather has been warm and sunny. In HLB, I visited my old friends Lan and her family. It was nice to see them. - Call a student to read the request of ex I bought a lot of souvenirs,interesting 2. books for the members in my family. - Now read the information on a I saw a lot of beautiful sightseeing, postcard and write. caves and. . . . - Ask ss to write it individually, then See you soon, compare with a partner and read aloud Love before the class. Tom Post – writing Dear Lan, We’re having a well time on Catba island. The Islanders is very friendship and helpful.The weather has been suny and wind..

(207) In Catba town, I visited my aunt, Mrs Lien and his children.I spend the whole - T gives a letter with 10 mistakes and morning to play with the kids. asks ss to find them , then correct them. I bought llots of souvenirs and two - Ask ss to do it in groups bottle of fish sauce.Shopping here are wonderful. There are a lot to buying. See you soon, Yours truthly Tuan IV- Homework: - Learn by heart vocab, structure of a postcard - Guide Ss to do ex 7 (P. 75) - Stuff (n): đồ vật - Lantern(n): đèn lồng - Prepare Language focus. Week: 27 Period: 79. Preparing day: Teaching day:. / 3/ 2012 / 3 / 2012. Unit 12: Language focus A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know formation and usage of the past progressive tense with "When" and "While", the present progressive tense with "always". Ss will be able to make sentences with the pictures and match 2 halfsentences provided. B- Language contents: The past progressive tense with "When" and "While", the present progressive tense with "always" C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Teaching aids: Reference books, extra board. E- Procedure: II. Checking the old lesson: S1: Read the postcard. S2: Do ex 7 - Ask ss to give V - ing of the verbs below. 1. eat 2. read 3. write 4. walk.

(208) 5. talk sound. 6. sleep. 7. cook. 8. rain. 9. cheer. 10.. III. New lesson: - Give some new words Vocab Race (n): cuộc đua Mailman(n): người đưa thư Schooldrum (n): tiếng trống trường (to)sound: vang lên Crowd (n): đám đông - Look at picture in Ex1 and answer 1. Look at the pictures, Say what each my questions. person was doing at 8 o' clock last ? What was Ba doing at 8 o'clock last night. night ? a. Ba was taking shower at 8 o' clock last - T explains smt about the past night progressive tense. b. Hoa was eating at 8 o' clock last night - Call a student to read the request. c. Bao was reading a comic at 8 o' clock - Now work in pairs, one asks and one last night answers. d. Nga was writing a letter at 8 o' clock - T does part b with a student last night T: What was Hoa doing at 8 o'clock e. Na was walking with her dog at 8 o' last night ? clock last night S: She was eating at 8 o'clock last f. Lan was talking to her grandmother at 8 night. o' clock last night. - Call some pairs to practice *Thì quá khứ tiếp diễn diễn tả hành The usage ? động đang diễn ra tại một thời điểm xác định trong quá khứ. 2. Match 2 half sentences. - Now look at the pictures then read a - C d-B the half sentences in 2column then b - F e-D match. c-E f-A - Compare your answers. Conjunction: - Call Ss to read the sentences cloud. *Thì QKTD diễn tả hành động đang xảy - T corrects ra thì hành động khác bất ngờ xảy đến When do we use "When" or "While" ? trong quá khứ.Mệnh đề này luôn đứng sau When và chia ở QKĐ. * Thì QKTD diễn tả những hành động song song xảy ra trong quá khứ.Mệnh đề này luôn đứng sau While và chia ở thì QKTD..

(209) (+) S + was/ were + Ving (-)S + was/ were + not + Ving (?) Was/ Were + S + Ving ? Yes/ No - T explains the request of the exercise 3. Look at the pictures. Write the 3. sentences say what the people are - Look at picture a then make a always doing. sentence note the usage of " always " a. Bao is always forgetting his homework. in the present progressive tense. b. Mrs Nga is always losing her umbrella. - Ask sss to play agame.Ns and Cs c. They are always missing the bus. g. They / come late / school. d. Nam is always watching TV. h. Ba / forget / his birthday. e. Na is always talking on the phone. i. My father / listen / the radio. f. Liem is always going out. a b c d e f g h i - Now write the sentences for the pictures in your books. - Compare your sentences. - Call Ss to read the sentences aloud. - T corrects. IV- Consolidation: - Free talk using QKTD - Ss ask and answer about what they and the members in their family were doing at 7 o'clock yesterday morning. - Call some pairs to practice. - T corrects. V- Homework: - Redo all the exercises. Learn by heart the structures. - Guide Ss to do the rest of the exercises in workbook..

(210) Week: 27 Period: 80. Preparing day: / 3 / 2012 Teaching day: / 3 / 2012 Unit 13: Getting started + listen and read A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know some traditional festivals in Vietnam through the festivals: rice cooking, fire making contest, water-fetching contest and rice-cooking contest. They will answer the questions about the content of the dialogue by doing ex T or F. Ss will revise the passive form of the present simple tense. B- Language contents: The passive form of the present simple tense Compound words. C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Teaching aids: Pictures, reference books, extra board, cassette tape E- Procedure: I. Setting class: II. Warm up: Ask ss to play a game: Network. Can you tell me names of some festivals in Vietnam that you know ? Cook – fighting festival. Lim festival Vietnamese festival. III. New lesson:.

(211) Imagine that we have 5 friends coming to Vietnam from different countries each person has a hobby. You work in pairs and help them to find suitable places to visit in Vietnam.. - Now work in pairs - Call some pairs to practice. - T corrects. Tom David - Do Son or Sam Son in the North. - Nha Trang, Vung Tau in the South. - Hue - Old streets in Hanoi. Getting started Eg: 1. Tom likes swimming and sunbathing. S1: Should Tom go to Do Son ? S2: That's a good idea. Do Son is a very beautiful beach and it's not very far from Hanoi and in Do Son there is the bullfighting festival.. Huckleberry. Oliver. Robinson. - Sapa -Yen Tu mountain. - Batrang village - Some villages in BinhDuong and Ninh Thuan. - Ho Chi Minh city - Hanoi - Big cities in Vietnam.. We have discussed the tourist attractions in Vietnam. One of the reasons that attracts tourists is the traditional festivals. Today we'll learn some festivals - Look at the dialogue and answer my questions. Who are talking ? Where are they ? - T introduces some new words.. - Checking by rub out and remember.. Listen and read They're Liz and Ba. They're at the rice-cooking festival. Vocab - rice-cooking festival: hội thi nấu cơm - water-fetchingcontest : hội thi lấy nước - fire – making contest: hội thi nhóm lửa - starving position (n): điểm xuất phát - (to) yell: la hét - (to) rub: chà, cọ xát - husk (n): vỏ trấu - judge (n): giám khảo - council leader (n): hội đồng contest What they do.

(212) - Now look at your book and listen to the tape. Ask ss to listen and do it individually, then compare with a partner and give the result. - Now practice the dialogue in pairs - Call some pairs to read aloud - T corrects Ss' pronunciation. - Now read the dialogue in silence then decide the sentence is T or F then correct false sentences. - Compare your answer with your friend. - Call some Ss to read aloud the sentences. T introduces Grammar quickly. - Confirm part of speech of each word. The grammar structure is used in the sentence ?. 1. Water – - run to the river, take fetching the bottles of water and return to the starting position. 2. Fire – - To make fire by making rubbing pieces of bamboo together. 3. Rice - - separate therise from cooking the husk and then cook the rice. 1. Practice the dialogue. 2. True or False. a. F. one team member b. F. one water bottle c. T d. F bamboo e. F the judges f. T. Grammar: * Compound words. 1. Rice-cooking festival noun + Ving + noun * Passive form: 1. The fire is made in traditional way. 2. All the points are added. S + (to) be + P2 * Indirect/ statement speech 1. The council leader just said that he was pleased to award the prize to the Thon Trieu team. S + said that + S + clause… IV- Consolidation: - Retell the main content of the rice-cooking festival. - Call some Ss to speak. V- Homework: - Write a paragraph about a festival you know. - Guide Ss to do ex 1 (76), 5 (P. 80) workbook1,2,3 (128 – 130) textbook - Learn by heart the vocabulary, practice reading the dialogue - Prepare parts Speak and Listen.. Week: 27 Period: 81. Preparing day: Teaching day:. Unit 13: speak A- Objectives:. / 3 / 2012 / 3 / 2012.

(213) By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about the preparations for Tet and other festivals. They will be able to put the sentences in the correct order to make a complete dialogue. They will listen to the tape and complete the sentences and the card. B- Language contents: Speaking and Listening skills C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Teaching aids: Pictures, reference books, extra board., cassette tape. E- Procedure: I. Setting class: ` II. Checking the old lesson: S1. Write 3 new words and make sentences with them. Complete the words: 1. CO_ PET _ TION 2. FE_ T_ VAL S2. Write the structures and make sentences with them. * Choose the best answer. 1. Vietnam is a............................. country. a. rice - exporting b. rice - export c. exporting - rice 2. The grnd prize is .............. to the Thon Trieu team. a. awards b. Awarding c. awarded S3 and S4 practise the dialogue and answer the questions. S3. 1. How many competitions are there in the rice - cooking festival? - What are they? S4. 2. How many people are there in the rice - cooking contest? - What do they have to do? III. New lesson: - Give some new words A – Speak Pictures Pre - speaking realias Vocab - pomegranate (n): quả lựu - tailor (n): Thợ may - T asks and Ss answer. - peach blossom (n): cành đào What do you usually do before Tet ? - marigold(n): hoa cúc What is the most important thing to - apricot blossom(n): hoa mai.

(214) prepare for Tet ? - dried watermelon seed(n): hạt dưa - T explains the request of ex 1. - sweetie : con yªu - Now work in pairs to put the sentences in the correct order. - Call some pairs to practice the 1. Put the sentences in the correct complete dialogue aloud. order. - T corrects 2. Make up your own dialogues. A–F–C–H–D–J–B–G–E-I - Ask ss to practice impairs, make a similar dialogue for one of the While – speaking following festivals. a school festival - Give some main ideas for ss - decorate the classroom - Ask them to work in pairs. - clean all the windowns and doors. - Cover the teachers’ table with the - Ask ss to make their own dialogues plastic towel. about a village festival. - Buy some flowers. Imagine we're going to celebrate Tet - Make red bands with some words. holiday. Post – speaking - Work in groups of four. Make a list of a village festival food, fruit and flowers people want to - decoratemthe hall. buy for Tet. - clean the windowns, doors and walls. 1. What kind of food do you have to - prepare to sing or dance. prepare for Tet? 2. What kind of fruit do you have to Food: sticky rice cakes, candies, dried prepare for Tet? watermelon seed, jam, spring roll. 3. What kind of flower do you have to Fruits: bananas, prapefruits, papaya…. prepare for Tet? - Call Ss to give answers. Flowers: peach blossoms, apricot - T and Ss correct. blossoms Ask ss to retell smth about the Robinsons preparing for Tet. - Ask ss to say smth which they prepare for the Lunar New Year. IV- Homework: - Write a paragraph about activities of the members in your family before Tet holiday. - Learn by heart all the new words. - Guide Ss to do ex 1 (P. 76), 3 (78), 4 (79) workbook.

(215) - Prepare part LISTEN. Week: 28 Period: 82. Preparing day: Teaching day:. / 3 / 2012 / 3 / 2012. Unit 13: Listen A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about the preparations for Tet and other festivals. They will be able to put the sentences in the correct order to make a complete dialogue. They will listen to the tape and complete the sentences and the card. B- Language contents: Speaking and Listening skills C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Teaching aids: Pictures, reference books, extra board., cassette tape. E- Procedure: I. Setting class: ` II. Checking the old lesson:.

(216) S1. Write 3 new words and make sentences with them. Complete the words: 1. CO_ PET _ TION 2. FE_ T_ VAL S2. Write the structures and make sentences with them. * Choose the best answer. 1. Vietnam is a............................. country. a. rice - exporting b. rice - export c. exporting - rice 2. The grnd prize is .............. to the Thon Trieu team. a. awards b. Awarding c. awarded S3 and S4 practise the dialogue and answer the questions. S3. 1. How many competitions are there in the rice - cooking festival? - What are they? S4. 2. How many people are there in the rice - cooking contest? - What do they have to do? III. New lesson:.

(217) B – Listen - T introduces the content of the dialogue Ss are going to listen. The Robinson family are making preparations for Tet. They want to buy things for Tet. - Now listen to the tape and find out what Mrs Robinson wants her husband and Liz to do. - Compare your answer. - Let Ss listen again then complete the sentences. - Now listen to the tape again and complete "Things to do" note of the Robinson before Tet. - Call Ss to give answers. - T and Ss correct. Ask ss to retell smth about the Robinsons preparing for Tet. - Ask ss to say smth which they prepare for the Lunar New Year.. Pre – listening. Food: sticky rice cakes, candies, dried watermelon seed, jam, spring roll. Fruits: bananas, prapefruits, papaya…. Flowers: blossoms. peach. blossoms,. apricot. While – listening 1. Listen to the conversation and fill in the gaps. a. Mr Robinson , flower market b. traditional c. dried watermelon seed d. make 2. Complete the notes. Mr Robinson: go to the flowermarket to buy peach blossoms and a bunch of marigolds. Liz: go to the market to buy some candies and a packet of dried watermelon seed. Mrs Robinson: go to Mrs Nga’s to llearn how to make Spring Rolls. Post – listening. IV- Homework: - Write a paragraph about activities of the members in your family before Tet holiday. - Learn by heart all the new words. - Guide Ss to prepare part: READ Week : 28 Preparing day: / 3 / 2012 Period: 83 Teaching day: / 3 / 2012. Unit 13: Read A- Objectives:.

(218) By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know more information about the greatest festival in western countries Noel. They will be able to complete the table and answer the questions about the content of the text exactly. B- Language contents: Reading skill C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Teaching aids: Pictures, reference books, extra board. E- Procedure: I. Setting class: II. Checking the old lesson / Warm up S1: Represent the activities you often do before Tet. S2: Retell activities that the members in the Robinson did before Tet. Ask ss to play a game: Guessing game. 1. This is a biggest festival in Western countries. 2. People often decorate a tree and exchange best wishes by giving cards to each other. 3. It’s on 24th Eve and 25th of December : C H RI S T M A S. III. New lesson: - T introduces new words. - Checking by Rub out and remember.. Pre - reading Vocab - Christmas tree (n): cây thông noel - Christmas card (n): thiệp mừng noel - Christmas carol(n): bài thánh ca noel - Santa Claus (n): ông già noel - Patron Saint (n): thánh đỡ đầu - (to) spread through : lan rộng - fat jolly man (n): người đàn ông mập vui tính. - Ask ss to guess some sentences T or F Predition Result S2 S2 S1 S2 S3 1. The Christmas tree was decorated and S1 put the market place in the USA on one Christmas Eve in the early 1500s. 2. The Christmas Card was designed in the mid- nineteenth century..

(219) 3. The Christmas songs were poems put to music. 4. Santa Clausis based on the description of Saint Nicholas in a poem called “A visit from Saint Nicholas”. While - reading. - T introduces the text. Key: - Now read the text and complete the table. 1 – F, 2 – T, 3 – F, 4 – T - Compare your answers. 1. to) have someone a.không phù - Call Ss to go to the board to fill the to design hợp information in the table. b.phổ biến 2. Unsuitable (adj) c.sự diễn giải 3. Popular (adj) d.giáo sư 4. Red suit (n) e.yêu cầu, 5. Professor (n) nhờ ai đó 6. Description (n) thiết kế f. đồng phục màu đỏ 1. Complete the table.. Christmas specials The Christmas tree The Christmas card Christmas carols Santa Claus. Place of origin Riga England No information USA. Date Early 1500s mid-19th century 800 years ago 1823.

(220) - T corrects - Read the text again and answer the questions in pairs - T asks question a. Ss answer. - Call some pairs to ask and answer. - T corrects.. 2. Answer the questions. a. More than a century ago. b. he wanted to send Christmas greetings to his friends. c. 800 years ago. d. An American professor Clement Clarke Moore. e. On the description of Saint Nicholas in professor Moore's poem. Post – reading. - Close your book and retell the main content of the text by playing chain game. - Call some Ss to speak. IV- Homework: - Learn by heart all the new words, and make sentences with them. - Try your best to summarize the main content of the text. - Guide Ss to do ex 8 (P. 82) - Prepare part Write.. Week : 28 Period: 84. Preparing day: Teaching day:. / 3 / 2012 / 3 / 2012. Unit 13: Write A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know more information about the traditional festivals in Vietnam. They will be able to complete the report about the rice cooking festival and use their knowledge to write about other festivals they know. B- Language contents:.

(221) Writing skill, Form of areport. C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Teaching aids: Pictures, reference books, extra board , worksheet E- Procedure: I. Setting class: II. Checking the old lesson: S1. Write new words and make sentences with them. Match a with B: 1. (to) have someone a. không phù hợp to design b. phổ biến 2. Unsuitable (adj) 3. Popular (adj) c. sự diễn giải 4. Red suit (n) 5. Professor (n) d.giáo sư 6. Description (n) e.yêu cầu, nhờ ai đó thiết kế f. đồng phục màu đỏ Call a student to go to the board read the text and answer the questions 1. What do people send to his friends at Christmas ? 2. When were Christmas songs performed ? 3. How is the Santa Claus ? III. New lesson: - T gives Ss 3 cards Pre - Writing Each group chooses a card 3 cards - Now work in groups and talk about - warter fetching contest the topic in each card. - fire making - Call Ss to speak. - rice cooking - T corrects. Vocab - Call a student to read the request of Councilor (n): thành viên ex 1. Communal (n): đình làng - Look at the picture Gand prize (n): giải nhất Which festival is it ? (rice cooking) 1. Use the information in the dialogue on - Now read the dialogue on page 121 page 121 to fill in the gaps in this report. again then complete the report in 1. rice cooking pairs. 2. one/ a - Share your completed report. 3. water fetching.

(222) - Call Ss to give answers - T corrects.. 4. run 5. water 6. traditional 7. bamboo 8. six 9. separate 10. added. - Now look at ex 2. While - Writing - Now think of a festival we are going 2. Write a similar report. to write about it. - Work in pairs to ask and answer the questions given. 1. What is the name of the festival? This report shows how the rice – cooking And your festival? festival was held. = a school festival 2. Where was the festival held? In the communal house yard. In the school yard. 3. How long did the festival last? 4. How many activities were there? 5. How were the activities organized? 6. How many people took part in each activity? 7. What did you think about the festival? - Call some pairs to practice - Using the information in your answers to write a report. - Ss write. - Share your reports then correct mistakes for each other. - Call some Ss to read the reports Post - writing - Let Ss change the reports then ask and answer about the content. IV- Homework: - Complete your report at home. - Guide Ss to do ex 9 (P. 83), 1, 2 (128, 129) - Prepare Language focus..

(223) Week : 29 Period: 85. Preparing day: Teaching day:. / 3 / 2012 / 3 / 2012. Unit 13: Language focus A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand and do exercises using the passive form, compound nouns and reported speech exactly. B- Language contents: The passive form, compound nouns and reported speech C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Teaching aids: Reference books, extra board. E- Procedure: I. Setting class: II. Checking the old lesson: S1: Read the report you wrote at home. S2: Do parts a, b, c of ex 9 III. New lesson: - T introduces new words Vocabulary - dried mushroom (n):nấm khô - industry (n): ngành công nghiệp - (to) export: xuất khẩu.

(224) - (to) jumble : làm lộn xộn - faucet (n): vòi nước - (to) scatter: rải, rắc - Guide Ss to do ex 1 1. Complete the sentences. Who can write the passive form of the S + am/ is/ are + PII present simple tense? S + was/ were + PII the past simple tense ? S + will + be + PII - Call a student to read the verbs in the a. were performed box. b. was decorated/ put - Now choose the verb and put it in the c. will be held right tense of each sentence. e. was awarded - Share your sentences in pairs f. was written - Call Ss to read the sentences. - T corrects. 2. Complete the conversation. The passive form of the present perfect - Now look at the picture. tense Which room is it ? S + have/ has + been + PII What are there on the floor ? 1. jumbled Are the bowls and dishes broken ? 2. broken Who made all this ? 3. scattered - Now use the verbs in the box to 4. pulled complete the conversation in pairs. - Call some pairs to practice. - T gives the keys. 3. Write the sentences in your... Form of compound nouns - Call a student to read the eg in book. Noun + Ving + N Who can tell me form of a compound Lucky Numbers noun ? - Work in pairs to do the exercise. - Let Ss play "Lucky numbers" b. It is a bull-fighting festival. - Guide Ss to play c. It is a car-making industry. - T corrects and say the winners. d. It is a flower arranging contest. e. It is a rice -exporting country. f. It is a clothes- washing machine. 4. Report what the man told Mrs Thu. b. He said he could fix the faucets. c. He said the pipes were broken d. He said new pipes were very - Retell some rules when we change a expensive..

(225) direct speech in to reported speech. One tense back - Ask Ss to do ex in individual. - Call Ss to read the sentences - T corrects.. e. He said I had to pay then. * Là thuật lại lời nói của người nào đó theo ngôn ngữ của gười thuật lại mà nghĩa câu không bị thay đổi. S + said (that) + S + was / were V(ed) Modal V (in past) Nếu must -> had to Now -> then IV- Consolidation: - Ss retell the structures. - Ss make sentences with the structures. Ex 1: Change the sentences in the reported speech. 1. “ They don’t like film.” Lan said. 2. “ I am a famous singer.” Thanh Lam 3. “ We must finish our homework” They said. Ex 2. Put A, B, C, D, E in the blank to complete the dialoguge. A. I was there, let’s see, for ten days. B. Sound interesting. I’ll go there next summer. C. It was wonderful. I had a great time! D. Oh, yes, I did.Hue is the city of the World’ Cultural heritage. I walked around a lot of pagodas and tombs. They were fantasic! E. Sure. It’s the World’s natural Heritage. It’s marvelous. Mary: Hi! When did you get back from Vietnam? Jone: (0) Two days ago. Mary: How was your trip? Jone: (1)…………………………………………………………… Mary: How long were you there? Jone: (2) …………………………………………………………… Mary: Did you go Hue? Jone: (3) …………………………………………………………… Mary: Did you go to Ha Long Bay? Jone: (4)…………………………………………………………… Mary: Were you in a group? Jone: No, I took a cheap flight and stayed with some friends in Vietnam. Jone: (5) …………………………………………………………… V- Homework: - Learn by heart the structures - Guide Ss to do the rest of the exercises in the work book..

(226) - Prepare Unit 14: Getting started + Listen and read.. Week :29 Period: 86. Preparing day: Teaching day:. / 3 / 2012 / 3 / 2012. Unit 14: Getting started + Listen and Read A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know about wonders of the world. They will be able to match the words given with the pictures and complete the summary after listening and reading the dialogue of Hoa, Nga and Nhi. Ss will be able to play the game "Guessing game" Vocabulary concern the wonders. Grammar: question words before to -infinitive. B- Teaching aids: Pictures, reference books, extra board., cassette tape. C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Procedure: I. Checking the old lesson: S1. Write the structures of the passive voice of: the present / the past / the future tenses: Change the sentences into the passive voice: 1. Mai wrote a note on the board. ……………………………………………………………………............................................ 2. They will recycle the waste paper in a local factory. ……………………………………………………………………............................................ 3. Mr. Ba grows vegetables in his small garden. ……………………………………………………………………............................................. S2. Write the structure of the compound noun and then give 2 examples: -.... -...... S3. Write the structure of the reported speech and then do ex: 1.“ I want my room to look nice at the festival” Hoa said. 2. “ We are going to the rice – cooking contest. “ Said Hoa. 3. “ You have to take at the least two bottles of water.” Tam’s father said. 4. “ I will clean all the class windows. “ said Hoang. II. New lesson: - T gives Ss some pictures and asks Ss - The Great Wall of China to write names of the places in the - The leaning Tower of Pisa. pictures. - The Empire State of Buyiding Do you know where the places are ? - The Eiffel Tower..

(227) - T corrects.. - The Golden Gate Bridge - The Taj Mahal Monument. What do we call these places ? * Getting started (wonders of the world) a. The pyramids - Now look at Getting started b. Sydney Opera house We have 3 famous world land marks. c. Stone henge Work in pairs and match the pictures with the words. - T calls Ss to match. - T corrects - T asks and Ss answer. Where are the pyramids ? Who built them ? Do you know how they built them ? Do you want to play a game ? Today we'll know a game after we read the dialogue in Listen and read. - T introduces new words * Listen and read - Checking by "Rub out and Vocab remember" - wonder (n): kì quan - (to) guess: đoán - clue: gợi ý - Now listen to the tape and answer - Asia (n): Châu Á ¸ the questions: 1. What are Hoa, Nhi and Nga going 1. They are playing the game. to do? 2. It is called Guessing game. A student 2. What is it called? And how do you thinks of a famous person or place, then explain this game? another student has to ask him or her some - Call Ss to give answers questions (Y or N) to find out Who or - T corrects What it is. - Let Ss listen to the tape again Ss find a place or person quickly will be the winners - Now practice reading the dialogue in 1. Practice the dialogue. group of 3. - Call Ss to read - Now read the dialogue again then 2. Complete the summary. complete the summary. 1. game 5. America - Share your answers. 2. place 6. Golden - Call Ss to read the summary. 3. clue 7. right.

(228) - T corrects. 4. Vietnam 8. was - T introduces grammar Grammar When Nga didn't know the rule of the Question words before to-inf play what did she say ? Eg: I don't know how to play it - T explains quickly Form: S + V + how + to - Inf - Let Ss play the Guessing game with what / who the famous places in Vietnam. III- Consolidation: Choose the best option to complete the sentences. 1. Hoa, Nhi and Nga played a………… a. guessing game b. Finding someone who c. Finding something what 2. …….didn’t kow how to play it. a. Hoa b. Nhi c. Nga 3. …….explained the rule. a. Hoa b. Nhi c. Nga 4. Nga thought of a place and gave her friends some………. a. rules b. questions c. clues 5. Hoa found out the place was……. and it was wrong. a. The Golden Gate Bridge b. The Statue of Liberty c. Fisherman’s wharf 6. Nhi was right and found out the place was ……….and it was right. a. The Golden Gate Bridge b. The Statue of Liberty c. Fisherman’s wharf IV- Homework: - Learn by heart the vocabulary, the structure - Find more famous places in the world. - Do ex 3, 4 (137) in the textbook, 5, 6 (87) in the workbook - Prepare parts Speak and Listen. Week : 29 Period: 87. Preparing day: Teaching day:. / 3 / 2012 / 3 / 2012. Unit 14: Speak _LISTEN A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know more famous places in Vietnam and in the world. Ss will talk about it and practice reported speech with "If, whether" Ss will know the structures in an advertisement. Ss will be able to correct mistakes and copy the paragraph in the book. Reported speech, the structures in an advertisement.

(229) B- Teaching aids: Cassette tape pictures, reference books, extra board. C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pairworks, group works D- Procedure: I. Checking the old lesson: * 3 Ss read the dialogue And answer the questions: * 2 Ss play the Guessing game with a place they choose. * Write new words and make sentences with them. II. New lesson: - Look at 10 famous places in your A – Speak book and tell me the places you know Pre - speaking - Call Ss to speak 1. Think of 10 famous places. Ask and - T gives ex Matching to help Ss know answer. more about 10 places . - Now work in pairs. Match the information in column A with the places in column B. A 1. It's in the center of Viet Nam, and it was recognized as a world heritage in 2003. 2. It was constructed in Paris in 1889 in the 100th celebration of French revolution. 3. It was built more than 2000 years ago with the length of 4500 miles and it is the only man made structure that can be seen from the space. 4. It's one of the world heritages of Viet Nam. It consits of nearly 2000 islands with magnificent caves. 5. It's the great clock in London gives the GMT (Greenwich mean time) 6. It's the sky scraper in New York. It was constructed in 1930 with 102 stories. 7. It's the highest mountain in the world located in Nepal. The mountain is 8848 meters high and was named after the man who first reached the peak of the mountain. 8. It's in central Viet nam. The city is famous for Huong river and Bai Tho mountain. 9. It's currently the highest building in the world, located in. B a. Great wall of China b. Empire State Building USA c. Petronas Twin Towers d. Great Barrier Reef e. Hue citadel f. Ha long Bay g. Phong Nha care h. Eiffel Tower i. Mount Everest j. Big Ban.

(230) Malaysia. 10. It's the world's first coral reefs occurred about 500 million years ago in Southern Europe. While – speaking 2. Talk about classmate's answers with your partner. Eg: Is Phong Nha cave in Southern Viet nam ? I asked Hoa if/ whether Phong Nha was in Southern Viet Nam. She said that it was. Form: S + V (past tense) + O + if/ whether + S + V (one tense back) + O Post – speaking - Rewrite these sentences using the words given keep the same meaning. 1. Is Phong Nha in Quang Tri province ? -> The tourist asks........... 2. Does it have the most beautiful cave in Viet Nam ? -> The tourist asks........... 3. Is it very far from Hanoi ? -> The tourist asks........... - Call Ss to give answers Answers. - T corrects 1g, 2h, 3a, 4f, 5j, 6b,7i, 8e, 9c, 10d - Now work in individual to write Yes/ No questions about the places we've talked about or other places you know Eg: Was it built more than 2000 years (Look at the questions in the table) ago ? (Great Wall of China) - Check some tables of students - Work in pairs ask and answer the B – Listen questions in your table. Pre - listening - Call some pairs to practice. Vocab - T guides Ss to know the reported - jungle (n): rừng speech. - crystal -clear water (n): nước trong như - Look at the eg in book please and read pha lê it. - coral sea (n): biển san hô - T introduces new words. - snorkel (v): bơi lặn có sử dụng ống thở - Checking by What and Where - inn (n): quán trọ - Look at the picture While - listening T asks: Do you know this place ? Listen to the tape. Correct the Where is it ? mistakes. Can you tell me something about it ? - Now look at the paragraph and read it. 1. Southern-> far north - Ask ss to guess the mistakes in the 2. Inn -> hotel advertisement. 3. Jungle -> rain forest - You will hear a conversation about the 4. 6824 -> 6924 trip to Queensland. You listen to the tape.

(231) and find out the mistakes in the advertisement and correct them - Compare your answers with your Post - listening friends. - Call Ss to correct - T corrects. - Choose a famous place and write an advertisement about it. - Call Ss to read - T corrects. III- Homework: - Learn by heart the form of reported speech. - Write a paragraph about one of the famous place in Viet Nam - Guide Ss to do ex 1, 2 (pages 84,85) - Prepare part READ . Week : 30 Period: 88. Preparing day: Teaching day:. /4 / 2012 / 4 / 2012. Unit 14: Read A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know about 7 wonders of the world and other wonders. They will able to understand the text ad complete the sentences given correctly. Vocabulary Relative pronouns B- Teaching aids: Information about 7 wonders of the world, pictures, reference books, cards C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Procedure: I. Checking the old lesson: Ask s to play a game: Guessing game: 1. It’s 4,500 miles long. 2. It’s the only man- made thing that can be seen from the space. 3. It’s in Asia. 4. Key: Great Wall of China II. New lesson: - Let Ss play net work Pre - Reading 2 teams play. Wonders of the world Go to the board and write names of the.

(232) wonders of the world. - T corrects and says the winners. - Look at the list you have made and 7 wonders of the world find out names of 7 wonders of the 1. The Pyramids of Egypt world following Antipater. 2. The Hanging Gardens of Babylon. - T corrects 3. The 12-m (40-ft) statue of Zeus. 4. The temple of Artemis at Ephesus. - Copy in your notebook 5. The Mausoleum of Halicarnassus In lesson today we will learn more 6. The Colossus of Rhodes about the world heritages. 7. The Pharos of Alexandria. - T introduces some new words. Vocabulary - Checking by "Rub out and remember" - (to) compile: biên tập, biên soạn - Ask ss to do ex T or F - (to) claim: khẳng định 1.A man – named Antipater of Silon in - honor (n) danh dự Egypt compiled a list of what he (v) : tôn kính thought were the seven wonders of the - Zeus (n): thần Dớt world. - Taj Mahal (n): cung điện Tai Mahal 2. The Pyramid is the only wonder we - Buddhist religious center (n): trung tâm can still see today. phật giáo 3. Angkor Wat was built around the - Royal capital city (n): kinh thành year 1200 to hornor a Hindu God. - King (n):Nhà vua 4. In the 1400s, the Khmer King chose - Queen (n): Nữ Hoàng Phnom Penh as the new capital. - citizen (n): người công dân - Now read the text then choose a, b, c While - Reading or d to complete the sentences Key: - Share your answers 1. F 2. T 3. F 4. T - Call Ss to read the answers aloud. A B 1. Ancient Greece a. Đế Thiên - T corrects b. Đế Thích - Now choose a card then close the 2. Hanging c. Hi Lạp cổ đại books and talk about the things in your Gardens of Babylon d. Vườn Treo card - Ss work in groups (Use the 3. Angkor Watt 4. Angko Thom information in the text.) Complete the sentences a–C b–A c–D d-B - Call Ss to speak Post - Reading - T and other Ss correct - Ask ss to retell something about the S1......S2........ content of the text. - Ask ss to play a game: Chain game.

(233) III- Homework: - Learn by heart the new words. - Read the text at home and try your best to remember the main content of the text. - Guide Ss to do ex 1 (P. 84), ex 5 (P. 87) - Prepare part Write. Week : 30 Period: 89. Preparing day: Teaching day:. / 4 / 2012 / 4 / 2012. Unit 14: Write A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know about a famous place that is Grand Canyon and complete the letter. They will be able to write a letter to their friends about a place they have visited. Writing skill B- Teaching aids: Letter , reference books, extra board C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works. D- Procedure: I. Checking the old lesson: S1. Write 3 new words and make sentences with them. - Do Ex: Fill the suitable letter to finish some words. K __ NG CI __ __ ZEN S2: Retell the main content of the text last period. 1. Which wonder in 7 wonders of the world can we still see today ? 2. Why is Angkor Wat a wonder of the world ? S3. Read the text and answer the questions. 1. When was it built ? 2. What did the Khmer rulers do in the early 15th century ? II. New lesson: - T asks and Ss answer Pre - Writing Have you ever written to your friends after your trip to a famous place ? What do you tell him/ her in your latter ? T introduces the purpose of part 1. Today we are going to learn how to Vocab write a letter to a friend telling him/ her - canyon (n): khe nói.

(234) about your last trip to a famous place. Firstly you read Tim's letter to his friend. - T introduces new words - Checking by What and Where -. - sea level (n): mực nước biển - park ranger (n): người trông coi công viên. - guided hike (n): cuộc đi bộ có hướng dẫn viên - edge (n): rìa, mép - original inhabitant (n): cư dân gốc Ask ss to look at the letter on p 135 and - stone Age (n): thời đại đồ đá do ex. 1. Complete Tim's letter. - Ask ss to work in group and give the Key: C – B – D - A result. - Ask ss to read the letter again aloud before the class. Base on Tim's letter, you now write a While - Writing letter to your friend telling him or her 2. Write your letter. about your last trip to a famous place. - Now look at the prompts and read them. 1. Where have you just returned from? 1.We have just returned from Cuc 2. How far is it from your city to Cuc Phuong national park. Phuong national park? 2. It’s about 100 km from my city. 3. How did you get there? 3. We got there by bus. 4. What have you seen there? 4. We have seen many beautiful sights. 5. What was the weather like? 5. The weather was sunny and windy. 6. How are you feeling now? 6. I am very happy. - Write the outline on waste paper and then use the outline to write the latter. - T asks Ss to follow the parts of a letter (formal letter) - Share your writing, find mistakes and correct for each other. - Call some Ss to read their letters. - T corrects typical mistakes - T gives Ss some letters and Ss correct Post – Writing mistakes in the letters in groups. December 10, 2008 - T corrects. Dear Hoa, A. It is a beach in Thanh Hoa province I was very happy to receive your letter and about 120 km from HN. (1). B. I am looking forward to hearinh My family has just been back from a.

(235) from you. C. We built several sand castles on the beach and took many photographs as well. D. And I was even happier to know that you have successfully passed your exam.. four – day trip to Sam Son beach (2). It wa a wonderful trip and we had lots of memories there. We went swimming every morning with my mom. It is a very nice beach with white sand and crystal – clear water (3) . What about your plan for summer vacation? Are you doing anything special? (4). Your friend, Linh Key: 1 – D, 2 – A, 3 – C, 4 - B. III- Homework: - Complete your letter at home. - Learn by heart new words, and the structure of the letter. - Prepare language focus.. Week : 30 Period: 90. Preparing day: Teaching day:. / 4 / 2012 / 4 / 2012. Unit 14: language focus A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to change the active in to the passive, direct questions in to indirect questions with if and whether . Using the word cues to.

(236) write full sentences using question words before to-inf. They will complete the passage use "to-inf" or "bare-inf". - Passive forms. - Indirect questions with if and whether - Question words before to-inf - Verb + to-inf. B- Teaching aids: Pictures, reference books, extra board. C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Procedure: I. Checking the old lesson: S1: Read the letter you wrote last period. S2: Write new words. II. New lesson: Vocab: - T introduces the request of the (to) construct: xây dựng, kiến tạo exercise. (to) present: giới thiệu, tặng - T asks: (to) reach: đạt tới Do you remember Sydney Opera House Summit (n): đỉnh, tột đỉnh ? Expedition (n): cuộc thám hiểm When did people complete Sydney Civil engineer (n): kỹ sư công trình Opera House ?(1973) - Compare with the sentences in book. 1. Complete the sentences. Use the Who can retell the passive form of the passive form of the verbs in the box. past simple tense ? Passive from of the past simple tense. - Now complete the sentences b, c, d, e S + was/were + PII by + agent - Call Ss to read the sentences aloud. a. was completed - T corrects b. was constructed - T introduces and explains the situation c. was designed of ex 2. d. was presented - Call 2 Ss to read the eg in book e. was reached - Now report the questions in pairs. - call some pairs to read 2. Report the questions Nhi asked Nga. - T corrects b. Nhi asked Nga if it was far from - Call a student to retell the use of Hanoi indirect questions with if/ whether. c. Nhi asked Nga if My Son was in - Call a student to read the eg in book Quang Nam province. - Give me your remark about this d. Nhi asked Nga if many people lived at.

(237) structure - Give the form - Complete the sentences - Share your sentences with your friends - Read the sentences aloud. - T corrects. - Explains the request of the exercise - Now using "to-inf" or "bare inf" form of the verbs to complete the passage - Share your answers - Call Ss to read the passage Why do you use "to-inf" or "bare inf" form ? - T corrects.. My Son. e. Nhi asked Nga if many tourists visited My Son f. Nhi asked Nga if she wanted to visit My Son. 3. Write about the information. S + V + (O) + question word + to + inf. b. Nga showed Nhi where to get tickets. c. Nga pointed out where to buy souvenir. d. Nga advised Nhi how to go from Myson to Hoi an e. Nga told Nhi what to do there during the visit. 4. Complete the passage. 1. to jog 2. go along 3. together 4. to rain 5. to reach 6. to continue 7. get. III- Consolidation: - Each student make 2 sentences for each structure - Call Ss to read their sentences. - T corrects and consolidates the structures in the lesson. - Guide Ss to do the rest of the ex in work book. IV- Homework: - Learn by heart the structures. - Guide Ss to do the rest of the ex in work book. - Revise the lessons from Unit 12 to Unit 14..

(238) Week : 31 Period: 91. Preparing day: Teaching day:. / 4 / 2012 / 4 / 2012. Revision A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review the knowledge they learnt from Unit 12 to Unit 14 Vocabulary, Grammar, Skills B- Teaching aids: Reference books, extra board. C- Work arrangements: Individual, pair, group D- Procedure: I. Checking the old lesson: During the lesson II. New lesson: Ask Ss to retell use of the main grammar from Unit 12 to Unit 14 and go to the board and write the structures. T and Ss correct Grammar: I. Unit 12: A vacation abroad. 1. The past progressive tense (Thì quá khứ tiếp diễn) a, Usage.

(239) + ) Thì QKTD diễn tả những hđ, sv đang diễn ra tại 1 thời điểm xác định trong QK, hoặc 1 hành động đang xảy ra thì 1 hành động khác xảy đến, hoặc các hành động song song xảy ra cùng lúc. + ) QKTD diễn tả hđ, sv xảy ra và kéo dài trong 1 khoảng thời gian trong QK. Eg1. Yesterday, Mr Nam (work) in the library all the morning. Eg2. We (clean) the house from 3 p.m to 6 p.m yesterday. Eg3. They (repair) your house all the morning yesterday? Eg4. Lan (not study) English from 7 a.m to 10 a.m last Sunday. + ) QKTD diễn tả hđ, sv xảy ra tại 1 thời điểm xác định trong QK. Eg1. Lan and Hoa (do) their homework at 6 p.m last Monday. Eg2. I (practise) English with my friend at that time. + ) QKTD diễn tả hđ, sv đang xảy ra thì 1 hđ khác bất ngờ xảy đến. Eg1. Last night when I (do) my homework, the electricity (go) off. Eg2. As you (cross) the street, the policemen (shout) at us. Eg3. I and Mai (learn) our lessons when Lan (come). + ) QKTD diễn tả 2 hay nhiều hđ, sv song song xảy ra cùng 1 lúc trong QK. Eg1. Last night, while I (go) swimming at the pool, my father (visit) the city museum, my mother (take) some photos, my younger brother and sister (ride) wood horses. b, Form. + ) S + was /were + Ving….. - ) S + wasn’t / weren’t + Ving….. ? ) Was /Were + S + Ving…? c, Adverbs. From ……to……, at + số giờ…….+ yesterday / last Sunday, At that time, when , while, as 2. Always: luôn luôn Ta dùng always trong các thì tiếp diễn để diễn tả sụ phàn nàn ai đó thường hay làm gì theo hướng tiêu cực. Always luôn đứng sau động từ TOBE. II. Unit 13. Festivals. 1. The passive: 1. Thì hiện tại đơn. Eg1. Lan often helps me do the difficult exercises. Eg2. The builders build a new house. Eg3. Someone sell flowers here. A: S + V (s, es) + O P: S + am / is / are + P2 + (by + O ) 2. Thì hiện tại tiếp diễn. Eg1. The builders are building a new house now. Eg2. Mr. Nam is repairing some televisions at the moment. A: S + am / is / are + Ving + O P: S + am / is / are + being + P2 + (by + O) 3. Thì hiện tại hoàn thành. Eg1. The builders have built a new house for 5 months. Eg2. Mr. Nam has repaired some televisions since yesterday. A: S + have / has + P2 + O.

(240) P: S + have / has + been + P2 + (by + O) 4. Thì quá khứ đơn. Eg1. The builders built a new house 5 months ago. Eg2. Mr. Nam repaired some televisions yesterday. A: S + V (ed) + O P: S + was / were + P2 + (by + O) 5. Thì quá khứ tiếp diễn. Eg1. The builders were building a new house when I came. Eg2. Mr. Nam was repairing some televisions at that time. A: S + was / were + Ving + O P: S + was / were + being + P2 + (by + O) 6. Thì quá khứ hoàn thành Eg1. The builders had built a new house before we came. Eg2. Mr. Nam has repaired some televisions before we came back. A: S + had + P2 + O P: S + had + been + P2 + (by + O) 7. Tì tương lai đơn. Eg1. The builders will build a new house next 5 months. Eg2. Mr. Nam will repair some televisions tomorrow. A: S + will + V (bare) + O P: S + will be + P2 + (by + O ) 8. Một số động từ khuyết thiếu. Eg1. The builders can build a beautiful house. Eg2. The builders must build a new school. Eg3. The builders are going to build a new school. A: S + can / could must / have to / had to may / might ought to / should am / is / are going to P: S + can / could must / have to / had to may / might ought to / should am / is / are going to III. Unit 14. Wonders of the world 1. Reported speech: I. Yes / No question. 1. Tobe. + V (bare) + O. + be + P2 + (by + O).

(241) Eg1. " Are you a student?" I asked Hoa. Eg2. " Are they coming here now?" Hoa asked me. Eg3. " Is Nha Trang far from Ha Noi?" Hoa asked me. Eg4. " Were you at Ha Long Bay last summer?" Hoa asked Lan. Eg5. " Was he a robber?" I asked Hoa.. S + asked + O + if / whether + S + am/is/are -> was / were was / were -> had been 2. Verb Eg1. " Do you go to school by motorbike?" I asked Hoa. Eg2. " Do you like coffee?" Hoa asked me. Eg3. " Do they often have dinner late?" Hoa asked Lan. Eg4. " Did you watch TV last night?" Hoa asked me. Eg5. " Did he get mark ten yesterday?" I asked Hoa.. S + asked + O + if / whether + S + V (s,es) -> V (ed) V (ed) -> V (ed ) / had been 3. Modal verb Eg1. " Can you use a computer?" I asked Hoa. Eg2. " Will you go to HN next Sunday?" Hoa asked me. Eg3. " Must the students wear uniforms?" Hoa asked Lan. Eg4. " Should I go to bed early ever evening?" Hoa asked Lan. Eg5. " Shall we go home now?" I asked Hoa.. S + asked + O + if / whether + S + can -> could + V (base) will -> would shall -> should must -> had to ought to -> should may -> might Ex1: Choose a, b, c or d to complete the following sentences. 1. I was cooking for dinner................... a. then the phone rang b. then the phone was ringing c. when the phone rang d. when the phone was ringing 2. The family........ when the mailman came. a. is sleeping b. was sleeping has slept d. have slept 3. .........I was having dinner, my husband were watching T.V. c..

(242) a. While. b. If c. Because. d. As 4. The leader said that.........to award the prize to you. a. he is pleasing b. he was pleasing c. he is pleased he was pleased 5. Christmas songs ........for people eight hundred years ago. a. perform b. are performed performed d. were performed 6. The teacher told the students ...... a. what to do which to do that c. how to do that d. by how to do that 7. She wondered if many tourists.........to visit My Son in summer. a. want b. wanted c. will want d. were wanting 8. Do you know where I can find the best place ............? a. to eat b. to eating c. for eat for eating 9. Do you know the place .........I can have a meal with my friends ? a. where b. which c. what when 10. She stayed here and enjoyed ...........to classical music. a. listen b. to listen c. to listening listening Key: 1. b 2.b 3.a 5.d 6.c 8.a 9.a 10.d Ex2: Finish the second sentence so that it has the same meaning as the first. 1. "Bring it back if it doesn't fit," he told her. He told................................. 2. My son takes all the messages for me. All my .................................. 3. She didn't ring a bell but she walked in . She walked in without............. 4. He was given a bicycle for his birthday. A bicycle............................................ d.. c.. b.. d.. d.. d.. 4.d 7.b.

(243) 5. The chair man will open the factory. The factory......................................... 6. He walks to school so as to get some exercise. He walks to school so that.................... 7. The hall was so crowded that we couldn't get in. The hall was too................................... 8. Learning to ride a bicycle is quite easy. It............................................................. IV- Homework: - Revise all the knowledge you learnt - Prepare for the Test 45 minutes next period. Week : 31 Preparing day: Period: 92 Teaching day:. / 3 / 2012 / 4 / 2012. Test 45 minutes A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to finish the test exactly. They will find out what they learnt well and what they forgot to build a plan to revise at home and to control their methods to learn better. Grammar, structures and vocabulary from Unit 12 to Unit 14. B- Teaching aids: Test 45 minutes, papers and pens. C- Work arrangements: Individual D- Procedure: I. Checking Ss' preparation A- LISTENING: Listen then decide the following statements are true or false. Write T for True and F for False next to each of the statements. (2 points) ...........1. Da Lat is in the central highland province of Lam Dong. ...........2. Da Lat is known as a city of banana trees, waterfalls and flowers. ...........3. Da Lat has many rivers and canals. ...........4. Da Lat people are very proud of the beauty of Da Lat. B- READING: Read this passage carefully the answer the questions (2.5 pts) THE GREAT WALL OF CHINA In China, there is a wall that is 1,500 miles long. It is called the Great Wall of China. It winds uphill and down, through valleys and mountains. It was made by hand. The Great Wall of China was built from 246 - 209 BC. The people of China made it to keep out their enemies. There are watch towers all along the way. The Wall is made of brick and earth. It is high and wide on top. People can walk along the top as if it were a road. No other defense line has ever been made as long as the Great Wall of China..

(244) 1. Where is the Great Wall? 2. How long is it? 3. When was it built? 4. What is the Wall made of? 5. Is it wide and high on top ? C- LANGUAGE FOCUS: I - Choose A, B, C or D to complete each of the following sentences. (1.5 points) 1. I usually do morning exercises ___________ have good health. a. so as b. in order to c. because 2. Nga asked Linh how _________ from My Son to Hoi An. a. go b. to go c. going 3. ____________ is a stream or river that falls from a height. a. Waterfall b. Lake c. Bay 4. Hoa ________ dinner when the mailman _______. a. was eating - came b. was eating - was coming c. ate - came 5. Last Week my school held a contest in which students arranged flowers as attractively as they could. It is a............................ a. arranging - flower contest b. flower - arranging festival c. flower - arranging contest II - Rewrite each sentence, beginning as shown, so that the meaning stays the same.(1.5pts) 1. "Do many people visit Ha Long Bay everyday?" I asked Lan. - > I asked Lan. ....................................................................................................... 2. " Is Nha Trang far from Ha Noi? " Lan asked Hoa. - > Lan asked Hoa if................................................................................................... 3. He repaired my computer yesterday. - > My computer.................................................................................................... D. WRITING Imagine you are a tourist on a vacation in Quang Ninh. Using the cues to write a postcard to a friend about your trip. (2 pts) - Place: Ha Long Bay, in Quang Ninh - How you feel about the people: hospitable, helpful...... - What the weather is like: sunny, hot..... - Who/What you visit: relatives, Chay Beach, Dau Go Cave...... - What you buy: souvenirs, food, postcards, photos.... Dear ......., Love, Key: Question Key A 0,5 point for each correct answer. Listening 1. T 2. F 3. F 4. T (2 points). Point 2 points.

(245) B 0.5 points for each correct answer. Reading 1. The Great Wal is in China. (3 points) 2. It is 1,500 miles long. 3. It was built from 246 - 209 BC. 4. The Wall is made of brick and earth. 5. Yes, it is. C I- 0,3 points for each correct answer Language 1. b 2. b 3. a 4. a 5. c focus II- 0,3 points for each correct answer. (3 points) 1. I asked Lan if many people visited Ha Long Bay everyday 2. Lan asked Hoa if Nha Trang was far from Ha Noi. 3. My computer was repaired yesterday.. 3 points. D - Đủ bố cục của 1 đoạn văn, ngữ pháp, từ vựng chính xác Writing thì đạt điểm tối đa: 2 điểm. (2 points) - Đủ bố cục của 1 đoạn văn, ngữ pháp, từ vựng chưa chính xác thì đạt điểm: 1,5 điểm. - Không viết theo bố cục của một 1 đoạn văn mà viết từng câu riêng rẽ, ngữ pháp, từ vựng chính xác thì đạt 1,5 điểm.. 2 points. 3 points. Tape script: Da Lat lies on Lam Vien plateau, in the central highland province of Lam Dong. Da Lat is known as a city of pine trees, waterfalls and flowers. Da Lat has few rivers and canals but it has many picturesque waterfalls. The famous Cam Ly Falls is only three kilometers from the town center. The water pours down like a white shade. Da Lat people are very proud of it. They always boast to tourists about it in the first place.. Week :31. Preparing day:. / 4 / 2012.

(246) Period: 93. Teaching day:. / 4 / 2012. Unit 15: Getting started + Listen and Read A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know something about computers and its benefits in life. Ss will know the vocabulary such as printer, connect, guarantee....and distinguish fact and opinion. Ss revise the present perfect tense with "yet, already". Vocabulary concern computers. Grammar: The present perfect tense. B- Teaching aids: Pictures, reference books, cassette tape, extra board. C- Work arrangements: Individual, pair, group D- Procedure: I. Warm up: Ask ss to play a game: Network. Work with your partner. Make a list of how computers can help us. Keeping information for time saving time for entertainment Play a game Watch TV The use of computer. Collect information Listen to music II. New lesson: - T introduces the subject of the ****Getting started lesson. Key: Computer We're going to learn about a machine. Now listen and answer my questions then predict the machine. Which machine can we use to type letter, send e-mails ? Which machine can we use to play Vocab: interesting games ? Computer (n): máy vi tính Which machine begins with letter C ? (to) save: tiết kiệm (computer) Printer (n): máy in Give some new words (to) connect: kết nối Picture Properly (adv): đúng cách, thích hợp Realia Plug (n): phích cắm.

(247) Translation Check: R and R. Socket (n): ổ điện Manual (n): sách hướng dẫn sử dụng Under guarantee (n): trong thời gian bảo hành Who says what Name - Ask ss to listen to the tape, read the 1. The printer isn’t working. 2. Have you turned it on? dialogue between Mr. Nhat and Nam - Ask ss to do it Ex individually, then 3. I know how to connect a compare with a partner and give the printer. 4. I bought it in HCM city. result. 5. Let’s phone them now. 1. Practise the dialogue. Ask ss to role a play: Work in pair s. Call some pairs of ss to practice. - Ask ss to listen to the tape again and do Ex 2. What is Fact? And Opinion?. 2. Fact or Opinion Fact (F) diễn tả sự thực xảy ra Opinion (O) diễn tả quan điểm, ý kiến và hiểu biết cá nhân. Key: d–O - Ask ss to do it in group and give the a – F b–O e– F result. c–O f–O Model sentences - Ask ss to listen to the tape again and Mr. Nhat: have you turned it on yet? Nam: Yes, I have already done it. find the model sentences. Have / Has + S + P2 + ……yet? T - > WC, H - > H S + have / has + already + P2 + ….. Open pairs, close pairs Yet (chưa) dùng trong thì HTHT trong câu hỏi và câu phủ định. Already (đã rồi) dùng ở HTHT trong câu khẳng định. - Ask ss to make sentences with the structure above. III- Consolidation: - Ask ss to do Ex: Complete the passage with words provided. Check / store / printer / idea / problem / plug / computer / socket / guarantee / manual..

(248) Yesterday, Nam used this (1)…… . After connecting the (2)…… but it wasn;t working. Nam asked his father Mr. Nhat to (3)……Mr. Nhat asked Nam if the (4)…. Came out of the (5)….. Nam said that it was ok. Mr. Nhat had no (6)…. What the (7) …. Was and the (8)…. Wasn’t very helpful. Finally, they decided to phone the (9)… they bought it from because it was under (10)…… Key: 1. computer, 2. printer, 3. check, 4. plug, 5. socket, 6. idea, 7. problem, 8. manual, 9. store, 10. guarantee IV – Homework - Ask ss to - Learn by heart the vocabulary, the structure - Find more famous places in the world. - Do ex 1, 2 (90) and 4 (92) in the workbook - Prepare parts Speak and Listen. Week :30 Period: 89. Preparing day: 27 / 3 / 2011 Teaching day: 6 / 4 / 2011. Unit 15: Computers Lesson 1 - Getting started + Listen and Read A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know something about computers and its benefits in life. Ss will know the vocabulary such as printer, connect, guarantee....and distinguish fact and opinion. Ss revise the present perfect tense with "yet, already". Vocabulary concern computers. Grammar: The present perfect tense. B- Teaching aids: Pictures, reference books, cassette tape, extra board..

(249) C- Work arrangements: Individual, pair, group D- Procedure: I. Warm up: Ask ss to play a game: Network. Work with your partner. Make a list of how computers can help us. Keeping information for time saving time for entertainment Play a game Watch TV The use of computer. Collect information Listen to music II. New lesson: - T introduces the subject of the ****Getting started lesson. Key: Computer We're going to learn about a machine. Now listen and answer my questions then predict the machine. Which machine can we use to type letter, send e-mails ? Which machine can we use to play Vocab: interesting games ? Computer (n): máy vi tính Which machine begins with letter C ? (to) save: tiết kiệm (computer) Printer (n): máy in Give some new words (to) connect: kết nối Picture Properly (adv): đúng cách, thích hợp Realia Plug (n): phích cắm Translation Socket (n): ổ điện Check: R and R Manual (n): sách hướng dẫn sử dụng Under guarantee (n): trong thời gian bảo hành Who says what Name - Ask ss to listen to the tape, read the 1. The printer isn’t working. 2. Have you turned it on? dialogue between Mr. Nhat and Nam - Ask ss to do it Ex individually, then 3. I know how to connect a compare with a partner and give the printer. 4. I bought it in HCM city. result. 5. Let’s phone them now..

(250) 1. Practise the dialogue. Ask ss to role a play: Work in pair s. Call some pairs of ss to practice. - Ask ss to listen to the tape again and do Ex 2. What is Fact? And Opinion?. 2. Fact or Opinion Fact (F) diễn tả sự thực xảy ra Opinion (O) diễn tả quan điểm, ý kiến và hiểu biết cá nhân. Key: a–F d–O - Ask ss to do it in group and give the b – O e– F result. c–O f–O Model sentences Mr. Nhat: have you turned it on yet? - Ask ss to listen to the tape again and Nam: Yes, I have already done it. find the model sentences. Have / Has + S + P2 + ……yet? T - > WC, H - > H S + have / has + already + P2 + ….. Open pairs, close pairs Yet (chưa) dùng trong thì HTHT trong câu hỏi và câu phủ định. Already (đã rồi) dùng ở HTHT trong câu khẳng định.. - Ask ss to make sentences with the structure above. III- Consolidation - Ask ss to do Ex: Make sentences with the present perfect tense. check / store / printer / idea / problem / plug / computer / socket / guarantee / manual. Yesterday, Nam used this (1)…… . After connecting the (2)…… but it wasn't working. Nam asked his father Mr. Nhat to (3)……Mr. Nhat asked Nam if the (4)…. came out of the (5)….. Nam said that it was ok. Mr. Nhat had no (6)…. what the (7) …. was and the (8)…. wasn’t very helpful. Finally, they decided to phone the (9)… they bought it from because it was under (10)…… Key: 1. computer, 2. printer, 3. check, 4. plug, 5. socket, 6. idea, 7. problem, 8. manual, 9. store, 10. guarantee IV – Homework - Ask ss to - Learn by heart the vocabulary, the structure - Find more famous places in the world. - Do ex 1, 2 (90) and 4 (92) in the workbook.

(251) - Prepare parts Speak and Listen. Week : 32 Period: 94. Preparing day: Teaching day:. / 4 / 2012 / 4 / 2012. Unit 15: Speak A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to further improve their understanding about common connectives, phrasal verbs and suggestions through sentence completion and suggestions making. Connectives, phrasal verbs and suggestions B- Teaching aids: Pictures, reference books, extra board. C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Procedure: I. Checking the old lesson: 15' Read the passage and answer the questions that follow. (10 pts) His name is David. He works for a construction company. He started working for this company in 2004. They build roads, dams, bridges and things like that. At the moment his company is producing a plan for a new motorway. He usually works in the road department, but this month he is working in the department that builds bridges. So his whole working day is different just now. He normally spends a lot of time outdoors because he has to go to the construction sites. But with this new project he spends a lot of time in the workshop. Now he is testing a model of one of the new bridges. He enjoys it a lot because he has learned a lot of new things. 1. When did David begin working for his construction company? 2. What is his company doing at the moment? 3. Where does he usually work? 4. Is he working in the road department this month? 5. Does he enjoy testing a model of one of the new houses?.

(252) Key: 1. He started / began working for this company in 2004. 2. At the moment his company is producing a plan for a new motorway. 3. He usually works in the road department. 4. Yes, it is. 5. No, he doesn't. II. New lesson: - Introduce the topic of the speaking and Pre - stage structures to students . Vocab. - Write the topic on the board : Useful Unhealthy (adj): không khỏe mạnh expressions to express agreements and Time – consuming (adj): tốn thời gian disagreements Challenging (adj): mang tính thách thức - Put the table on the board and elicit Solution (n): cach giải quyết students’ answers then write them on the Screen (n): màn hình table Monitor (n): 1 bộ phận của máy vi tính - Explain the phrase “on the other hand” (to) adjust: điều chỉnh to Ss . Knob (n): núm vặn - Get Ss to copy the table . (to) insert: đặt 2. Matching : Button (n): nút bấm - Put the pictures / 139 on the right of the board and the word cues on the left ( not in order ) 1. Reading comic books Boring, interesting, fun, time – - Have Ss match the words with the consuming, entertaining …… pictures . 2. Running and playing in the rain Fun, dangerous, unhealthy - Call on some Ss to go to the board to 3. Driving a car draw the matching lines Difficult, easy, dangerous, challenging => Answer key : 1. b 2. c 3. a 4. d 4.Eating foreign food Delicious, unhealthy…. While - stage - Erase the words but leave the pictures * Oral Drill - Get a student to demonstrate the model (a) - Ask Ss to use the adjectives in the box on page 140 to express their opinions after going through the meaning of some new words . - Have Ss use the pictures on the board to practice speaking with their partners - Call some pairs to demonstrate for the class . - Give feedback and correct . Mapped dialogue - Present the dialogue and have Ss repeat. T : I think driving a car is easy. Ss : I disagree. I think it is difficult to drive a car. or So do I. Post-stage 2. Reading dialogue. Lan: I am having problems with.

(253) , sentence by sentence my computer. - Call on one student to demonstrate the Ba: What’s wrong? dialogue. Lan: it doesn’t work. I think it’s broken. - Ss make similar dialogues refering the Ba: No, you didn’t plug in it. cues / 140 to replace the information. Lan: Oh, sorry. Starting / stopping (Circle ) - Introduce the topic of the listening and some new words to students . - Get Ss to understand how events are sequenced in a flow chart and the meanings of all the shapes used in the chart . - Ask Ss to look at the flow chart and guess the words in the gaps . - Play the tape 3 times and ask ss to listen - Tell Ss to fill the gaps with the information they have heard from the tape . - Have ss compare the answers with their partners . - Call on some Ss to go to the board to write their answers .. Questions ( Triangle ) Answers ( Oval ) a. Do you have the correct change? b. Yes c. What do you do want to drink? d. Take it.. III - Homework : - Write complete dialogues in your notebooks . - Do the exercises in the owrkbook . Circle the best option A, B, C or D to complete each of the following sentences 1. Mary likes _____ the piano. A. playing B. plays C. played D. play 2. She told me _____ you that present. A. giving B. gave C. to give D. given 3. I have known her _______ two years. A. for B. since C. with D. within 4. I’d like you ______ with me for some days. A. staying B. to stay C. stayed D. will stay 5. I am happy _______ all the exams. A. passed B. pass C. passing D. to pass - Prepare the next lesson . Week : 32 Period: 95. Preparing day: Teaching day:. /4 / 2012 / 4 / 2012.

(254) Unit 16: Listen A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about the inventions using the passive and Ss will be able to fill in the gaps and order sentences from listening. The passive forms. Speaking and listening skills B- Teaching aids: Pictures, reference books, extra board, cassette tape. C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Procedure: I. Checking the old lesson: S1. Write three new words and make sentences with them. Fill in the suitable letters: 1. WOOD PU __P 2. PA __YR __S S2. goes to the board and summarize the chocolate- manufacturing process. - Ask ss to do Ex Matching 1.Priting press (n) 2. Bicycle (n) 3. Facsimile (n) 4. Sewing machine (n) 5. Reinforced concrete (n) 6. Microphone (n). a. Xe đạp b. Máy in c. Máy khâu d. Máy Fax e. Mic f. Bê tông cốt thép. 1. X – ray (n) 2. Louderspeaker (n) 3. Helicoper (n) 4. Color TV (n) 5. Optical fiber (n) 6. Laser (n). a. Loa phóng thanh b. Tia X – quang c. Tivi màu d. Máy bay trực thăng e. Tia lade f. Sợi quang học. II. New lesson: - Have Ss study the meanings of the A - Speak inventions using Vietnamese. Pre - speaking - Have Ss work in pairs, one looks at the EG: table on page 150 and the other page 156. 1. T: What was invented by Friedrich.

(255) - Have Ss read the model dialogue on page 149. - Let Ss know what they are going to do: Ask and answer the questions about the inventions to fill in the missing information. - Ask Ss to look at the tables on page 150 and 156 and model the exchanges, using a good student. ? How do you ask for the name of the inventor? ? How do you ask for the name of the invention? ? How do you ask for the nationality? ? How do you ask for the time?. Koenig ? S: Printing Press was invented by Friedrich Koenig ? T: When was it invented ? S: It was invented in 1810. T: Where was Koenig from ? What was the inventor’s nationality? S: He was from Germany. He was German. - Who was + tên vật + invented by? - What was invented by + tên nhà phát minh? - What was the inventor’s nationality? - When was + tên vật + invented?. -Ask ss to workin pairs. Both two students; tables have some missing information. These are either inventors or inventions’ nationalities or the year or invention. - Ask ss to ask and answer with your partner to complete the table. - Call some pairs to practice before the class.. While - Speaking Answer key: Printing press Bicycle German 1843 Alexander Bain English Sewing machine F.J. Monitor French - Ask ss to look at the complete table 1 and D.E.Hughes report their findings before the class. American Wilhelm Konarad German 1939 American Optical fiber Making reports Post - Speaking - Model and have Ss repeat 1.The printing press was invented by Eg: The printing press was invented by Friedrich Koenig in 1810. Friedrich Koenig in 1810..

(256) - Ask Ss to use the complete table to report what they have found. - Elicit words from Ss - Have Ss copy - Checking by "rub out and remember" - Inform the topic: paper-making process. - Ask Ss to ask and answer the questions orally then fill in the missing information. - Monitor and help Ss if necessary. - call on some pairs to demonstrate the exchanges. - Give feedback and correct - Have Ss copy the complete table - Have Ss read the sentences - Play the tape 2or 3 times and ask Ss to fill in the gaps with the words they catch. - Ask Ss to compare their answers with theirs partners. - Call on Ss to give theirs answers. - Give feed back and corrects - Ask Ss to read the sentences (a->g) carefully and guess the order. - Write the Ss' prediction on the board. - Play the tape again and k Ss to listen. - Call on Ss to give their correction - Give feedback and correct. - Ask Ss to asks and answer about the famous people in Viet Nam in pairs. - Call some pairs to practice.. B - Listen Pre - listening Vocabulary - procedure (n): quy trình - pulp (n): bột giấy - vat (n): vại, chum - (to) drain: - pulp fiber (n): sợi giấy (to) smooth: tản đều - (to) press dry: vắt khô. 1. Listen and fill in the gaps in these sentences. Answer key. 1. simple 2. same 3. two hundred 4. left 5. rollers While - listening 2. Listen again. Put the sentences in to the correct order. Answer key: c–d–a–e–g–f–b Post - Listening. III- Homework: - Use the information in the table to write 12 complete sentences in your books. - Do Ex 3 (97) - Prepare part Read.

(257) Week : 32 Period: 96. Preparing day: Teaching day:. / 4 / 2012 / 4 / 2012. Unit 15: Read A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to further improve their understanding about common connectives, phrasal verbs and suggestions through sentence completion and suggestions making. Connectives, phrasal verbs and suggestions B- Teaching aids: Pictures, reference books, extra board. C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Procedure: I. Checking the old lesson: S1. Write three new words and make sentences with them. Jumbled words => Words relating to a computer 1. terpirn -> printer 2. seumo -> mouse 3. recsnc -> screen 4. nimorot -> monitor 5. bdoaryke -> key board 6. moseu dap -> mouse pad S2: Use the table and the pictures to make express and respond.... II. New lesson - Introduce the topic of the passage reading and some new words to Vocab:. Pre- reading.

(258) students. Pictures Visuals Translation Synonym. Freshman (n): Sinh viên năm thứ 1. * Checking vocabulary : Rub out and remember. Acess (n): đường kết nối. User (n): người sử dụng Telephone line (n): đường dây điện thoại (to) restrict: giới hạn Jack (n): ổ cắm. Introduce the topic of the text . Skeptical (adj): có tinhd hoài nghi - Ask Ss to guess what they are going to Impact (n ): sự ảnh hưởng read . * Suggestions : a) Where in the library do we get / find information ? b) How can we store the information ? c) If we want to discuss something, how can we do ? - Call on some Ss to give their predictions and write them on the board . - Ask Ss to read the text to check if their While - reading guesses are correct or not . Check the predictions: - Give feedback and correct Matching 1.(to) send a. vị trí message b. bản tin 2. location (n) c. gửi tin nhắn 3. bulletin board d. mối quan tâm (n) e. kỹ thuật - Ask ss to read the text again then read 4. technology (n) the true / false statements and decide if 5. concern (n) the statements are true or false . - Call on some ss to give their answers 1. True / False Statements Answer Key : and correct the false statements . - Have Ss copy all the right statements in a) T b) T their notebooks . c) T d) F -> Students do not have to go to computer rooms because college Comprehension questions - Have Ss read the questions / 147 and campuses now have computer jacks in find out the information in the text to every part of the university . e) T answer . - Ask Ss to compare their answers with f) T 2. Answer their partners . - Call on some Ss to give their answers Answer key : a) It has no library . All the information for the class . normally found in a library is now stored - Give feedback and correct ..

(259) - Have them copy.. - Ask ss to discuss together question e.. in the university, s computers . b) All the information normally found in a library or messages normally found on a bulletin board . c) A computer and a telephone ( line ) d) With a bulletin board on the Internet , a great number of people ( over 20 million ) can get access to the bulletin and exchange information quickly Post - reading Key: e, Yes, I would because it doesn’t cost me much money to go to the university campus to attend professor’s lectures or to the university library. No, because it’s boring when staying at home. I only can talk and play sports with my friends at school.. III - Homework : - Learn by heart new words and make sentences with them. - Do the exercises 6 (94) in the workbook. - Write a paragraph about the computer according to the content of the text. - Prepare Write..

(260) Week : 33 Period: 97. Preparing day: Teaching day:. / 4 / 2012 / 4 / 2012. Unit 15: Write A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to further improve their understanding about common connectives, phrasal verbs and suggestions through sentence completion and suggestions making. Connectives, phrasal verbs and suggestions B- Teaching aids: Pictures, reference books, extra board. C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Procedure: I. Checking the old lesson: S1: Read the text and do Ex. T or F 1. There is a new university without a library in the USA recently. 2. Students have to go to the computer rooms to connect thier computers to the computer jacks. S2. Read the text and do Ex: Answer the questions below. 1. What makes the new university different from others? 2. Would you like to complete a college degree from home? Why? Why not? II. New lesson: Word square - Put the word square chart on the board . Group work of 4/5 students - Inform the topic and the number of the hidden words . ( Words related to a computer ) - Ask Ss to write the words they find out on a piece of paper and hand in offer they finish their work. - Give feedback and correct Introduce the topic of the writing and some new words to students Use the picture / 142 to elicit words from Ss .. C O M P U T E R. N U O A H R S I. Pre - Writing E E R T P U N I T E N O B C D A Y O U O M P O W. Matching. C T O C E P G E. S P R I N T E R. K E Y B O A R D.

(261) a- paper input tray 1. Giấy b- monitor screen 2. Đg, lối ra c- power button 3. ký hiệu + Have ss copy d- icon 4. Nút mở điện Ask Ss to look at exercise 1 / 142 and e- output path 5. Khay đựng giấy do the matching . f- paper 6. Màn hình - Get some Ss to give their answers and correct . 1. Match…. - Get Ss to make use of some phrasal Key: verbs . a.- 3; b – 1; c – 6; - Put the words on the board and ask d – 2; e – 4; f - 5 Ss to fill in the gaps with right words if possible . - Ask some Ss to give their answers **** Gap fill 1. to wait ...so/sth and correct . 2. to remove ... sth 3. to turn ... a machine 4. to plug ... sth 5. to load ... sth Answer Key 1. to wait for (so / sth ) - Ask Ss to look at the pictures / 143 2. to remove  (sth) 3. to turn on / off ( a machine ) and read the cues . - Have Ss work in pairs to outline the 4. to plug in sth 5. to load  ( sth instructions - Call on some Ss to say out the While - Writing instructions first ( 1 or 2 Ss for each 2. Look at…. sentence ) - Ask Ss to write the instructions in Plug the printer and turn on the power. - Remove the old paper and load the new their note books paper input tray. - Wait for the power button to flash. - Have the pages appear on the coputer screen. - Click the printer icon on the screen and wait for a few seconds. The ptinted paper will come out of the - Have some Ss read their writings output path in a minute. before the class . - Give feedback and correct . Post - Writing.

(262) III. Homework : - Learn by heart new word and write two line for each one . - Do the exercises in the workbook . - Prepare the next lesson .. Week : 33 Period: 98. Preparing day: Teaching day:. / 4 / 2012 / 4 / 2012. Correcting the test 45 minutes A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know what they learnt well and what they learnt not well to control the methods to revise the old knowledge they learnt and learn next time better. B- Correct the test: I. Yêu cầu HS xác định lại đề bài trong bài kiểm tra. II. Nhận xét: A. Ưu điểm:.

(263) - HS làm bài và nộp bài đầy đủ, đúng thời gian quy định. - HS tập trung làm bài và có ý thức hoàn thành bài kiểm tra. - Có nhiều HS trình bày bài kiểm tra sạch sẽ, chữ viết đẹp. - Một số học sinh có tinh thần học bài tốt nên bài làm đạt kết quả cao B. Nhược điểm: - Bên cạnh những HS viết chữ đẹp, trình bày bài kiểm tra sạch sẽ còn có nhiều HS viết chữ cẩu thả, trình bày kiểm tra luộm thuộm chủ yếu ở lớp 8 B. - Còn nhiều HS không học bài kĩ trước khi làm bài kiểm tra nên làm bài sai và lạc đề. - Một số học sinh vẫn chưa biết cách trả lời trong dạng bài trả lời câu hỏi Yes - No chủ yếu là lớp 8B. - Các bạn lớp lớp B chưa có tinh thần tự giác làm bài, còn nhìn bài của nhau. C. Thông báo kết quả: - GV thông báo kết quả từ điểm cao xuống thấp theo số điểm bộ môn từ đó rút ra kinh nghiệm học bài và làm bài cho HS. Lớp <5 5-<8 8 - 10 Số lượng % Số lượng % Số lượng % 8A 8B D. Tuyên dương, phê bình: * Tuyên dương: GV tuyên dương những HS làm bài tốt, đạt điểm cao. * Phê bình: GV nhắc nhở phê bình những HS làm bài yếu kém. III. Chữa lỗi sai: I. Loại bài tập nghe hiểu: - Hầu hêt HS làm bài này tốt vì phù hợp với trình độ của các em. II. Loại bài đọc và trả lời câu hỏi. - Hầu hết HS lớp 8A đều làm được bài này vì các em đã xác định được đâu là câu hỏi dạng YES - NO, đâu là câu hỏi có từ để hỏi. - Lớp 8B vẫn còn hiện tượng HS nhầm lẫn giữa câu hỏi dạng Y –N với câu hỏi có từ để hỏi. Trả lời câu hỏi Yes / No khi mở đầu câu hỏi là Are / Is / Do / Does / Did / Have / Has. 1. Với động từ ToBe. Eg1. Are you a teacher? Yes, I am. / No, I am not. Eg2. Is he a good student? Yes, he is / No, he isn’t. 2. Với động từ thường..

(264) Eg3. Do you go to school by bike? Yes, I do. / No, I don’t. Eg4. Does Lan often get up very early in the morning? Yes, she does. / No, she doesn’t. Eg5. Did you watch TV last night? Yes, I did. / No, I didn’t. Eg6. Have you learned English for 5 years? Yes, I have. / No, I haven't. Eg7. Has the plug come out of the socket? Yes, it has. / No, it hasn't. Chú ý: Khi trả lời không phải lag câu hỏi Y / N ta phải chú ý: Thường thì trong câu hỏi có chứa các từ giống như trong câu trả lời vậy ta phải tìm ra sự lặp lại này để lấy câu trả lời. III. Loại bài chọn đáp án đúng. - Hầu hết HS đều làm được bài này vì đều là kiến thức cơ bản. IV. Loại bài viết lại câu mà nghĩa câu không bị thay đổi. - Học sinh lớp 8A làm tương đối tốt tuy nhiên một số học sinh bị nhầm lẫn cách sử dụng trạng từ thời gian giữa câu bị động và câu gián tiếp. - Học sinh lớp 8B làm chưa tốt, chưa hiểu kỹ cách làm. Chú ý: Trạng từ chỉ thời gian ở câu bị động được giữ nguyên, còn trạng từ thời gian ở cau gián tiếp phải lùi lại theo thì. V. Loại bài tập hoàn thành tấm bưu thiếp với các gợi ý cho sẵn. - Học sinh lớp 8A làm tương đối tốt, học sinh lớp 8B làm chưa tốt. Chú ý: - Ta nên dùng thì hiện tại đơn để diễn tả cảnh vật, đặc điểm và con người của Hạ Long. Nên sử dụng động từ tobe. - Ta nên dùng thì quá khứ đơn để diễn tả đặc điểm thời tiết trong những ngày đó. Những việc ta làm, những đồ ta mua... C. Bài tập củng cố: I. Rewrite the following sentences without changing the meaning. 1. The sister asked: “Are you hungry, Tom?” => The sister ………............................................................... 2. How long have you studied medicine? => When………...............................................................? 3. John was too ill to go to school. => John wasn’t ………............................................................... 4. We spent an hour traveling to Cairo. => It………............................................................... 5. This flat is too small for my family. => ……………big enough………………………….. 6. She didn’t ring the door bell but she walked in. -> =>………….without……………………. 7. They are pulling down the old theatre at this time..

(265) => The old theatre ……………………………. 8. "They are pulling down the old theatre at this time." Mr. Nam said. => Mr. Nam said ……………………………. III. Homework - Revise the knowledge you learnt not well at home. - Redo the exercise at home - Prepare part Language focus.. Week : 33 Period: 99. Preparing day: Teaching day:. / 4 / 2012 / 4 / 2012. Unit 15: Language focus A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to revise the present perfect tense with "yet" and "already". They will compare the present perfect tense with the past simple tense and find out the same and difference between two tenses. Ss will be able to complete the dialogues and make sentences base on the cues. The present perfect tense with "yet" and "already" Compare the present perfect tense with the past simple tense B- Teaching aids: Pictures, reference books, extra board. C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Procedure: I. Checking the old lesson: A student goes to the board and says the steps to print a document. II. New lesson:.

(266) - T gives the situation and asks Ss to tell the tense is used in the situation. ** Set the scene “ Ba's mother has just been back from market. She wanted him to do some housework while she was at the market. Ba made notes in his diary and checked (v) the work he has done . Look at Ba's diary" - Show the chart ( Ba,s diary ) on the board - Ask questions and elicit the answers from Ss . - Have Ss repeat and write the sentences on the board . - Have Ss copy . Retell use of the present perfect ?. - T gives 2 situations to introduce uses of "yet" and "already". - Call a student to read the request of ex 1. - Now read the notes in Ba's diary then complete the dialogue using already and yet. - Call Ss to read the dialogue. - T corrects. In order to understand more about "yet" and "already" we do ex 2. - Work in pairs ask and answer about the flights as the example. - Look at the departures and arrivals and then practice asking and answering. 1. Complete the dialogue using YET and ALREADY.. + Do homework (v) -> ( already ) + Tidy the room (v) x ( not yet ) + Turn off the washing machine (v) -> ( already ) + Call and tell Aunt Le to have lunch (v) -> ( already ) T : Has Ba done his homework yet ? S : Yes, he has already done his homework . T : Has Ba tidied the room yet ? S : No, he has not tidied the room yet . The present perfect tense. * Form: S + have/has + PII (+)S + have/has + already + PII (-)S + have/has not + PII + yet (?) Have/ has + S + PII + yet ? - Yet : used in questions and negative statements and at the end of the sentence - Already : used in positive statements and between auxiliary have and past participle 1. I have already finished it 2. I haven't cleaned and tidied it yet. 3. I have already turned it off. 4. I have already called and told her to lunch with us. 2. Work with a partner. Ask and answer questions about the flights. Eg: A: Has the flight to Hong Kong departed yet ? B. No. It hasn't departed yet..

(267) in pairs. - Call some pairs to practice. - T corrects. - T gives 2 examples to explain "finished action" and "incomplete action" Eg: I have been to Hanoi - finished action I have gone to Hanoi - incomplete action - Now read the sentences then check the correct column. - Compare your answers. - Call Ss to read the sentences. - T corrects.. 3. Read the sentences. Check the correct column. 1. I have ever been to Da Lat . -> ( finished ) 2. My parents have gone to DaLat for 3 days. -> ( incomplete ) => Present perfect tense Use : - finished actions -> indefinite time - incomplete actions -> for, since, recently. Finished action incomplete action a. V b. V c. V d. V e. V f. V g. V - Ask Ss to give examples 4. Complete the dialogues. Use the - Give difference between two tenses. present perfect or the past simple of - Now somplete the dialogues. the verbs in the brackets. - Call Ss to read the dialogues 1. have seen, did see, saw 2. haven't had 3. have been 4. have heard 5. happened 6. had 7. fell 8. broke 9. has arrived, has, did arrive, arrived III- Consolidation: - Ask Ss to make sentences using the present perfect tense with "already" and "yet" and the past simple. - Call Ss to read their sentences. - t corrects. IV- Homework: - Learn by heart the use and form of the present perfect tense with "already" and "yet". - Guide Ss to do ex 1 (P. 90), ex 3 (Ps 90, 91), ex 4 (P. 92), ex 6 (P. 94) - Prepare correct the test..

(268) Week : 32 Period: 95. Preparing day: 21 / 4 / 2011 Teaching day: 25 / 4 / 2011. Unit 16: Inventions Lesson 1 - Getting started + Listen and read A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know the stages in development of paper and chocolate. They will understand the text and match the halves of the sentences exactly. Vocabulary concern invention Grammar: Revise the passive form B- Teaching aids: Pictures, reference books, cassette tape. C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Procedure: I. Warm up: - Ask ss to play a game: Hangman It's an action which people find and make a new thing. Key: INVENTION II. New lesson: - T introduces the topic of Unit 16 Getting started - Now look at the pictures in book then Match the stages in the development of answer the questions. paper with the correct pictures. What do you think the people in the A - b first picture are doing ? B-c What can you see in picture a ? C-e - Guide Ss to match. D-a - Call Ss to give answers. E-d - T corrects.

(269) Chocolate is a popular cake. Do you know what ingredients are needed to make a chocolate ? - T introduces new words. Vocabulary - Checking by "What and where" - cacao bean (n): hạt ca cao - manufacturing process (n): quy trình sản xuất - vanilla (n): hương liệu vani - (to) crush : nghiền nát - (to) liquify: làm cho thành nước - Call a student to read the introduction - (to) pour: đổ in book. - mold (n): cái khuôn - Now look at your book and listen to - conveyor belt (n): băng truyền the tape. Ask ss to answer some - (to) remove: lấy ra, loại ra questions below: ? How many steps are there in the + There are 4 steps. chocolaten – manufacturing process? - The beans are washed, weighed and What are they? cooked here. - The shells are removed, the beans are crushed and liquefied. - Cacao butter is added, along with sugar, vanilla and milk. - The mixture is ground, rolled and poured into molds. - Read the dialogue in groups. 1. Practise the dialogue Matching - Call some groups to read. 1. foreman(n) a.vỏ - T correct Ss' pronunciation. 2. (to)store b. cảnh báo - Let Ss listen to the tape again. c. thành phần - Ask ss to guess the meaning from the 3. shell (n) 4. (to) warn d. cai thợ context. e. dự trữ - Ask ss to do it individually, then 5. sample (n) compare with a partner and give the 6. ingredient (n) f. mẫu hàng result.. - Match the half-sentences individual - Share your answers. - Call Ss to read full sentences.. in 2. Match the half- sentences. a. E b. D c. C d. F e. B f. A Model sentences The Cacao beans are stored here..

(270) - T corrects.. Form: S + (to)be + P2 III- Consolidation: - Base on the conversation, you work in pairs and summarize the chocolatemanufacturing process. After that, you report it in front of the class. - Call Ss to retell the history of paper and the ways to make it. IV- Homework: - Learn by heart the processes to produce chocolate, new words. - Do Ex 1, 2 (96) workbook. - Prepare Speak + Listen.. Week: 33 Period: 97. Preparing day:21 / 4 / 2011 Teaching day: 27/ 4 / 2011. Unit 16: Inventions Lesson 3 - Read A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to fill in the gaps and match the headings to the verses. Knowledge about inventions Reading skill.

(271) B- Teaching aids: Reference books, extra board. C- Work arrangements: Individual, pair, group D- Procedure: I. Checking the old lesson: 2 Ss go to the board and demonstrate the dialogue about one of the inventions and inventors last period. 1 student says something about paper making process. II. New lesson: - Let Ss fill in the brain storm Pre - reading - Elicit words from Ss or write them on the board Household appliances - Checking by "Bingo" - Get Ss to brain storm a list of 10 new words and write them on the board. - Ask Ss to choose any 4/5 words and Microwave copy them in to their paper. Vocab: - Call out the words until someone has Up – to – date = latest (adj): gần nhất, ticked all of their words and shout hiện đại "bingo" and wins. Microwave: lò vi sóng Suggested words: microwave, vacuum, Toaster: lò nướng bánh mì hairdryer, dishwasher, telephone, Vacuum: máy hút bụi toaster, washing machine. Hairdryer: máy sấy tóc - Get Ss to read the poem on page 151. Dishwasher: máy rửa bát - Ask Ss to do Ex to help them (to) defrost: làm tan ra, làm lỏng ra understand the reading more.. 1.A microwave 2. A toaster 3. The vacuum 4. The dishwasher 5. Hairdryer. a. goes ping b. goes chugga – chug c. give the loudest boom d. says de – dom e. says vroom. While - reading Key: 1 – d; 2 – a; 3 – b; 4 – c; 5 - e 1. Match the headings to the verses. Answer key:.

(272) - Ask ss to read the poem and check that Ex. - Have Ss match the headings to the verses on page 152. - Call on some Ss to give their answers. - Give feedback and correct. - Tell Ss to read the sentences carefully and fill in the gaps with the inventions taken from the poems. - Have Ss compare their answers with their partners. - Call on Ss to give their answers and correct. 1-b 2-c 3-a 2. Fill in each of the gaps in the sentences with one "invention" in the poem. Answer key: 1. vacuum 2. telephone 3. washing machine 4. microwave 5. hairdryer 6. toaster Post – reading - Look at what I bought todayin town - The very latest thing - Acolor TV that is very large. - An electric bicycle that is made in Japan.. -Ask ss to read the poem again aloud then translate it into Vnamese. - Ask ss to make their own poems about inventions by playing a game: chaingame. III- Homework: - Redo the exercises in part Read - Guide Ss to do exercises 5(98) in work book. - Prepare Part Write.. Week : 33 Period: 98. Preparing day: 21 / 4 / 2011 Teaching day:27 / 4 / 2011. Unit 16: (cont) Lesson 4 - Write A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use the sequence markers to describe a manufacturing procedure. Use of the sequence markers B- Teaching aids: Pictures, reference books, extra board. C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works.

(273) D- Procedure: I. Checking the old lesson: A student goes to the board and say something about the main content of the poem last period. II. New lesson: - Elicit words from Ss Pre - writing Vocab - log (n): khúc gỗ - Get Ss to copy - chip (n): lát mỏng - Checking by What and Where (to) whiten: làm trắng - (to) flatten: làm mỏng - (to) refine: lọc, tinh chế - Liquor (n): rượu - (to) roast: rang - (to) ferment: làm cho lên men - power (n): thuốc bột - Ask Ss to read the text on page 152 and 1. Fill in the gap with one of these the fill in the gaps with the right the sequence markers to describe the sequence markers to describe the procedure of paper making. procedure of papermaking. Answer key: - Ask Ss some questions to check if they 1. first understand the text. 2. then What is cut into chips ? 3. next What are chips mixed with before they 4. after this are crushed to heavy pulp ? 5. then Why is the pulp passed through rollers ? 6. finally What is the last step in paper making ? - Call on some Ss to read the completed sentences. - Give feedback and correct. While - writing - Have Ss look at the picture on page 2. Look at the sequence of pictures that 153 describe how cacao beans are - Ask Ss to think of the process of processed. Put them in the correct chocolate-making and put the pictures in order. the correct order. 1-d - First - Call on some pairs to give their 2-a - Then answers. 3-e - Next - Ask Ss to listen to check if their 4-c - After this answers are corrects or not. 5-b - Then.

(274) - Read the statements aloud. 6-f - Finally - Give feedback and correct - Ask Ss to rearrange the sentences on Post - writing page 153 according to the order pictures - Call on Ss to give answers. d-a-e-c-b-f III- Home work: - Use the sequence markers to write any making process you like. - Prepare Language focus. Week : 34 Period: 100. Preparing day: Teaching day:. / 4 / 2012 / 4 / 2012. Revision Unit 9 + Unit 10 + Unit 11 + Unit 12 A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use vocabulary and structures from Unit 9 to Unit 10 to do exercises exactly. Vocabulary and structures. B- Teaching aids: Reference books, extra board., work sheet C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Procedure: I. Checking the old lesson: During the lesson.

(275) II. New lesson: Unit 9: A first aid - course - Ask Ss to give the main structures : + in order to/ so as to + future simple tense + modal will. to make requests, offers and. promises. - Ask Ss to open the book on page 86 and the notebook at period 70 - Ask Ss to do exercise Exercise 1: Join each idea in A with an idea from B using "in order (not) to....or/ so as (not) to....". A B 1. He drank lots of black coffee. a. disturb the neighbor. 2. i often write things down b. save time 3. She took an umbrella c. get a better job. 4. We'll use the computer d. forget them 5. i want to pass the exam e. keep awake 6. We turned down the music f. get wet. Exercise 2: Choose the best answer. 1. Yoko..........to be here tomorrow (will, may, is going) 2. .........you please help me ? (May, Can, Do) 3. I promise I................come on time. (will, can, have to) 4. .............I use your car, Dad ? Oh, sorry, Tom. I............use it now. (Can-should, may-must, should- must) 5. .........you answer the telephone for me, please ? (Would, Could, Would or Could) 6. You......play with matches. (don't have to, musn't, none is correct) 7. I promise I won't be late....................(I hope so, you must, both of them are correct) 8. Let me help you a hand. ........(No, thank you, That would be nice, both of them are correct) Unit 10: Recycling - Ask Ss to give the main structures: + Passive forms + adjs followed by an inf or a noun clause. - Ask Ss to open the book on page 95 and the notebook at period 70 1. The present simple tense in passive form..

(276) Eg : Lan cleans the house everyday. The house is cleaned by Lan everyday. 2. The past simple tense in passive form. Eg: Lan cleaned the house yesterday. The house was cleaned by Lan yesterday 3. The futuret simple tense in passive form. Eg: Lan will clean the house tomorrow The house will be cleaned by Lan tomorrow 4. The present perfect tense in passive form. Eg: Lan has just cleaned the house. The house has just been cleaned by Lan. * The structures: S + am/is/ are + P2 S + was/were + P2 S+ will be + P2 S +has/ have + P2 Ask Ss to do exercises Ex1: Use the given words to make meaningful sentences. 1. I/ delighted/ receive/ your letter. 2. The children/ not tall enough/ reach/ shelf. 3. he/ eager/ come back/ home. 4. It/ very important/ keep / environment/ clean. 5. She/ lucky/ have/ a lot of good friends. 6. We/ very happy/ live/ together. Ex2: Change the following sentences in to passive. 1. People grow corn in Ohio. 2. They will build a new bridge in the city. 3. They sent 2 million books to America every year. 4. I will give you a new bike next month. 5. They have just introduces a new style of jeans in the USA. Unit 11: Travelling around VN - Ask Ss to give the main structures: ed, ing participles. - Ask Ss to open the book on page 108 and the notebook at period 70 1. Ed, ing participles. a) Ed participles.. This book is 25.000dong. It is made in Vietnam. -> This book made in Vietnam is 25.000 dong b) ing participles..

(277) The boy is Nam. He is sitting on the stage. -> The boy sitting on the stage is Nam 2. Mind Would you mind if you moved a car ? Do you mind if you move a car / * Form: Do/ Would you mind + Ving ? Do you mind if S + V (present simple )? Would you mind if S + V (past simple )? - Ask Ss to do exercises Ex1: Rewrite the sentences using Ef or Ing. 1. That girl is Australian. She is talking to John. 2. A plane crashed into the sea yesterday. It was carrying 28 passengers 3. The man was taken to hospital. He was injured in the accident. 4. The paintings haven't been found yet. They were stolen from the museum. 5. The girl is very intelligent. She's sitting next to me. Ex2: Put the verbs in the correct forms. 1. Would you mind if I (take) a photo ? 2. Do you mind if my friends (join in) our trip ? 3. Would you mind (open ) the door ? 4. Would you mind if she (take ) these books to her room ? 5. Do you mind if she (get) a taxi to town ? 6. Do you mind (buy) me some bread ? 7. Do you mind if he (ride) your bicycle ? 8. Would you mind if lan (ask) you for some information ? Unit 12: A vacation abroard - Ask Ss to open the book on page 119 and at period 88. - Ask Ss to give the main structures 1. past progressive tense Eg: I am writing a letter at 6pm yesterday. S + was/were + Ving (while, when/ as, from ...to) 2. progressive tense with always Mr Nam is always smoking S + am/ is/ are + always = Ving (complain) - Ask Ss to do exercises. Ex1: Put the verbs in the past simple or past progressive tense. 1. My mother (sleep) when I (phone). 2. Yesterday it (rain) all the morning. 3. What you (do) from 6am to 8am last Sunday ?.

(278) 4. Hoa (eat) dinner when the phone (ring )? 5. Mrs Hoa and her husband (cook) while their son (learn) English. Ex2: Choose the best answer. 1. The radio was.....by Tim yesterday (repaired, repairing, repair) 2. Would you...........cleaning the floor for me ? (like, please, mind) 3. Would you mind ......I smoked here ? (when, if, where) 4. How about......to the exhibition ? (going, go, to go) 5. While I....dinner, my sister..........to music. (was having/ listen, had, was listening, was having/ was listening) III- Consolidation: - Retell the structures in the lesson. IV- Homework: Learnt by heart all the structures your learnt. Redo all the exercises at home. Prepare: Revise the knowledge in Units 13,14,15,16. Week : 34 Period: 101. Preparing day: Teaching day:. / 4 / 2012 / 4 / 2012. Revision Unit 13 + 14 + 15 + 16 A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use vocabulary and structures to make their own sentences exactly. B- Teaching aids: Reference books, extra board. C- Work arrangements: Individual, pair, group D- Procedure: I. Checking the old lesson: II. New lesson: Unit 13: - Ask Ss to open the book page 128 and notebook at period 88 - Ask Ss to give the main structures + passive forms + compound words + reported speech 1. passive forms Eg 1: Lan cleans the house - Ask Ss to do ex..

(279) Ex1: Turn in to passive. (Period 97) 2. compound words Eg: Vietnam exports rice. We call Vietnam a rice-exporting country Private noun Ving common noun 3. reported speech a. Requests in reported speech "Can you meet me outside my office ?" Mrs lan said to me -> Mrs Lan asked me to meet her outside her office. S + asked + O + to + inf/ not to + inf. b, Commands in reported speech "Meet me outside my office, please" Mrs Lan said to me. -> Mrs lan told me to meet her outside her office. S + told + O + to+ inf/ not to + inf c. Statements in reported speech Eg1: "I am a teacher" Mrs lan siad -> Mrs Lan said (that) she was a teacher Eg 2: "I have a lot of good friends at school" lan said. -> Lan said (that) she had a lot of good friends at school Eg 3: "i can speak 3 languages" Nam said. -> Nam said he could speak 3 languages S + said (that) + S + V (past simple tense) Ex2: Rewrite the sentences using provided words. 1. "I see the children quite often" he said. -> He said (that)...................................... 2. "Take a deep breath" the doctor said to the patient. -> The doctor............................................. 3. "Could you please open the door for me ?" said the man. -> The man asked me................................. 4. "We must go now" they said -> They said................................................ 5.Nobody told me that George was ill. ->I................................................................ 6. Mr Nam has painted his house blue. -> Mr Nam.................................................... Unit 14: - Ask Ss to open the book on page 136 and notebook at period 88 - Ask Ss to give the main structures :.

(280) + Passive forms + Indirect questions with If/ Whether + Question words before to-inf. + Verb = to -inf 1. Passive forms(Period 97) 2. Indirect questions with If/ Whether a. with (to) be "Are you a good teacher ?"Mrs Lan asked me. -> Mrs Lan asked me if I was a good teacher. S + asked + O + if/ whether + S + was/were + ..... b. Verb Eg: "Do you have much money ?" -> I asked Mr Nam if he had much money. S + asked + O + if/ whether + S + V (past simple tense) c. Modal verbs Eg: "Can you help me cook dinner ? " -> Mai asked Lan if she could help her cook dinner. S + asked + O + if/ whether + S + modal verbs in the past 3. Questions words before to-inf. Eg: I want to know how to cook the mushrooms S + know/ tell/ request/ ask + how/ what/ when...+ to-inf * Verb + to-inf Eg: It started to rain 2 hours ago. S + need/ want/ decide....+ to - inf. Unit 15: Ask Ss to open the book on page 144 and notebook at Period 94. Ask Ss give the main structures - Present prefect with yet an Already - Comparison of present perfect and past simple 1- Present perfect. Eg1: I already (do) my homework Have already done. Eg2: I (not finish) my homework yet Have not finished Eg3 you (finish) your homework yet? Have you finished yet? +) S + have / has + already + P2.

(281) - )S + have not / has not + P2 +yet. ?) Have / Has + S + P2 +yet? Ask Ss to do EX. EX 1: fill in each gap with sine, for, already or yet. 1- I am hungry I have not eaten lunch...................... 2- They are know each other........... they were at Secondary school 3- That is a very old car I've had it..............a long time 4- I expected the parcel and hour ago. He is...........here. 5- John came here an hour ago. He is............here 6- She has come here..........August. 7- I have not come to a restaurant...............6 months 8- I have............seen this film before Unit 16: - Ask Ss to open the book on page 154 and notebook at period 102 - Ask Ss to give the main structures + passive forms + sequence markers 1. passive forms first , then, next, after this, finally Ex1: Choose the best answer 1. My mother showed me how......clothes (to make, making, made, make) 2. My family has decided..........Da Lat in the summer.(to visit, visit, visited, visit) 3. My friend told me what......when i visited Hoi An. (doing, to do, do, done) 4. Mai asked me if Hanoi ..............far from Hai Duong. (was, is, was being, to be) 5. Lan asked me if I..........good grades. (got, get, getting) Ex2: Rewrite the sentences. 1. "Do you want to visit the Statue of Liberty one day ?" Ann asked Long.(if) 2. Mary has studied English for 3 years (started) 3. They repaired this road in 2002 (passive voice) 4. "What should i do during the 3 days off ?"Lan asked her friends (what + to... 5. They built these two pagodas under the Nguyen dynasty. (passive voice) 6. "Do you like reading when you have free time ?"(whether) Trang Asked Mai III- Consolidation: - Retell the structures in the lesson. IV- Homework: Learnt by heart all the structures your learnt. Redo all the exercises at home. Prepare for the 2nd term test.

(282) Week : 34 Period: 102. Preparing day: Teaching day:. / 5/ 2012 / 5 / 2012. Revision A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use vocabulary and structures to make their own sentences exactly. B- Teaching aids: Reference books, extra board. C- Work arrangements: Individual, pair, group D- Procedure: I. Checking the old lesson: II. New lesson: ***** Language forcus. A. Choose one word (A, B, C, or D) whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the rest in each group.(1.5 pts). 1. A. nothing B. clothes C. hold D. told. 2. A. cloudy B. windy C. dry D. rainy 3. A. cooked B. wished C. watched D. wanted 4. A. books B. pens C. students D. lamps 5. A. the B. that C. thin D. this. 1. relax lazy teenager vacation 2. total cost phone globe 3. study music fun Subject 4. excited physic skip energetic 5. love some woman come 6. awful call ball apartment 7. brushed changed combed ironed 8. absent disease poster essay 9. decided fitted needed watched 10.usually unhappy uniform useful 11.filled worried stayed noticed 12.movies cartoons artists bands 13.gather band adventure paddle 14.character chemical chemist chest 15.defeated invented imported gathered.

(283) 16.cloud amount cough stout 17.allow shower shout show 18.wrong weigh wait weather 19.local improve buffalo photo 20.touch machine cheap children B. Choose the best option(A, B, C, or D) to complete each sentence below. (1.5 pts). 1. These houses …… 100 years ago. A. are built B. were built C. build D. built 2. Lan told me what …… when I visited Hoi An. A. do B. doing C. to do D. done 3. Would you mind …… the radio? A. turn off B. turning off C. turns off D. turned off 4. The questions sound ……. because I can do them myself. A. difficult B. easy C. difficultly D. easily 5. The United States has a big …… industry. A. car – making B. making – car C. car – made D. made – car C. Change into the Passive : a) I will repair your bicycle tomorrow b) John will collect me at the airport . c) We can’t wear Jeans at work . d) My father decorated the Christmas tree with colored lights . e) They held the festival in the communal house yard . f) Alexander Eiffel designed the Eiffel Tower for the Paris World Fair of 1889 . g) She cleans the house every day . h) My younger brother has met them on the way to school i) They have built a new school in my town . II. Read Nguyen Du (1766-1820).is a celebrated Vietnamese poet. He is most famous for writing the epic poem Kim Van Kieu Nguyen Du was born in 1766 in Tien Dien village, Nghi Xuan district, Nghe Tinh province, North Viet Nam.He was the seventh child of Nguyen Nghiem, a former prime minister under the Le Dynesty. He lost his father at the age of 10 and his mother at the age of13.For most of his teen years, he lived with his brother Nguyen Khan and later with his brother-in –law Doan Nguyen Tuan. a.When and where was Nguyen Du born? …………………………………… b.What is he most famous for? ………………………………………………………… c.when did he lost his mother? ………………………………………………………… d.Who did he live with when he was in his teens? …………………………………… D. Writing 1. Complete the story : a) Thuy / a day / remember / month . b) She / English exam / and get /up so late ..

(284) c) She / get / up / 7.00 because she / a movie / TV last night . d) As / she / riding / school , her bike / a problem e) After / bike / ok , it start / rain /heavily f) She / try / ride / fast / she could . g) suddenly / she ride/ a rock / and fall h) schoolbag / pool / and everything / get wet i) Strangely / rain / stop / and she/ get / her classroom . j) Luckily / Thuy / enough time / finish 2. Write a letter to a friend. Tell him / her about a place you have visited recently. Use the following prompts to help you. (2.5 pts) - Place: Ha Noi capital / Ha Long bay….. - Distance from your city / home: 120 km / 50 km - How to get there: by bus / by train / plane….. - Sights: beautiful / wonderful / magnificent and weather: sunny / cool / hot /windy…. - How you feel: happy / excited/ relaxed….. Dear……., ………………………………………………………………………………………… ………… Your friend, Tam III- Consolidation: - Retell the structures in the lesson. IV- Homework: Learnt by heart all the structures your learnt. Redo all the exercises at home. Prepare for the 2nd term test. Week : 35 Period: 103. Preparing day: Teaching day:. / 5/ 2012 / 5 / 2012. Revision A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use vocabulary and structures to make their own sentences exactly. B- Teaching aids:.

(285) Reference books, extra board. C- Work arrangements: Individual, pair, group D- Procedure: A. Choose one word (A, B, C, or D) whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the rest in each group.(1.5 pts). 1. usually unhappy uniform useful 2. filled worried stayed noticed 3. movies cartoons artists bands 4. gather band adventure paddle 5. character chemical chemist chest 6. defeated invented imported gathered 7. cloud amount cough stout 8. allow shower shout show 9. wrong weigh wait weather 10. local improve buffalo photo 11. Touch machine cheap children B. Rewrite the following sentences as directed : a) Most of the goods are exported . They are made in this factory(use Past participle b) The baby is crying for his mother . He is sitting in an armchair . ( use Present participle) c) Can you take me a photograph ? ( use Would you mind ……? ) d) Could I turn the air conditioner off ? ( use Do you mind if ……..?) e) Traveling around Viet Nam is very interesting . ( use It’s + adj + to –infinitive ) f) Writing an English essay is very difficult . ( use It’s + adj + to-infinitive ) g) Jane said to us : “ You are my best friends” ( reported speech ) h) Mary asked me : “ do you want to visit London ?” ( reported speech ) i) Nien asked Hoa : “ Do you have many new friends ?” (reported speech ) j) It is a contest in which participants have to make a fire . ( use a noun compound ) k) He always drives carefully . He doesn’t want to cause accidents . ( use So that ) l) He moved to the front row . He could hear the speaker better ( use In order to) C. Write the postcard , using the words given a) We / wonderful / Montreal , Canada b) The weather / terribly cold / but we have great vacation . c) Montreal / beautiful city and lots people speak / French / here d) We / stay /mini-hotel / a lake . e) The hotel / great / and the food / delicious . f) Yesterday / go/ skiing g) It/ very exciting / and I /take / lot / photographs . h) Everything / very nice / but they / expensive / so / I /not buy /many things i) I / go Quebec city / next year . j) It / not far / here . k) How /you ? E. Give the correct of the verbs. 1/ My mother asked me if I (do) ___ my homework. 2/ The guest doesn’t know how (get) ___ to the airport..

(286) 3/ This house just (paint) __ . 4/ The new teacher asked the students what their names (be) __ . 5/ ____ the floor (clean) _____ yet? 6/ When you rang me last night, I (watch) ___ TV. 7/ What ___ you (do) ___ at 9.30 this morning. I was having a class meeting. 8/ You looked so tired when I (see) ___ you yesterday. 9/ Would you mind (close) ___ the door? 10/ The teacher told the students whether they (be) ____ ready for the following day. 11/ Don’t forget (turn off) ____ the lights before (go) ___ out. 12/ He stopped (talk) ___ , then tried (lift) ___ a box into a lorry. 13/ It’s a big factory. Five hundred people (employ) ___ there. 14/ I (lose) __ my purse on the bus yesterday. 15/ I (meet) ___ her at a party last week. She (become) ____ rich and beautiful. 16/ We (see) ___ her three days ago. 17/ They (never/ talk) ____ to each other. Since the children (leave) ___ home. 18/ How long (you/ study) ___ Spanish? 19/Nam (do) ____ his homework while his sister (read) ___ a newspaper. 20/ __ you (play) ___ table tennis at 9 a.m yesterday? III- Consolidation: - Retell the structures in the lesson. IV- Homework: Learnt by heart all the structures your learnt. Redo all the exercises at home. Prepare for the 2nd term test Week : 35 Period: 103. Preparing day: 21 / 4 / 2011 Teaching day: / 5 / 2011. Unit 16: (cont) Lesson 5 - Language focus A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to change active sentences in to passive ones and write Wh-questions in to passive. Passive forms. B- Teaching aids: Pictures, reference books, extra board. C- Work arrangements: Individual works, pair works, group works D- Procedure: I. Checking the old lesson: During the lesson II. New lesson:.

(287) - T introduces new words - Checking by "Slap the board". - Have Ss do exercise 1 page 154 - Call on some Ss to give their answers orally for the class. - Get some Ss to go to the board and write the sentences - Give feedback and correct. - Have Ss do exercise 2 - Ask Ss to compare their answers - Call on some Ss to go to the board and write the sentences - Give feedback and correct.. - Have Ss do exercise 3. - Go through the underlined words with Ss before have them write questions. Eg: a. the zipper -> what b. Maize -> what c. by Lewis Waterman -> who in 1884-> when d. in Hungary -> where e. in copying machines -> in which machine - Get some Ss to give their answers in front of the class. - Give feedback and correct.. Vocabulary - (to) run a business: quản lý 1 doanh nghiệp - around the corner: rất gần, mọi ngõ ngách - due to: phụ thuộc vào - zipper (n): cái khóa - xerography: kỹ xảo chụp hình không dùng mực ướt - (to) thresh: đập - (to) bran: cán - Motor (n): cối giã gạo - mill (n): cối xay thóc - (to) winnow: sàng, xảy thóc 1. Change the sentences from the active in to the passive. a. The document was typed by Mrs Quyen. b. The computer was repaired by Mr Nhan c. The picture was drawn by Ba. d. The lights were turned off by Hoa e. The cake was baked by Lan 2. Active or passive ? Use the correct form of the verbs in brackets to complete the sentences. a. was awarded b. won c. ran e. was run/ was sold f. was closed/ closed 3. Put a question for each of underlined phrases in the sentences below. a. What was invented by WL Judson in 1893 ? b. What was brought in to Vietnam by Phung Khac Khoan ? When was maize brought in to Vietnam ? c. Who invented the fountain pen?.

(288) - Ask Ss to look at the pictures carefully - Tell me what you see in each picture - Ss write sentences using the prompts given - Call Ss to read their sentences aloud - T and Ss correct - T gives the key. - Ss copy.. When was the fountain pen invented? d. Where was the ballpoint pen invented ? e. In which machine is xerography widely used ? 4. Use the sequence markers to describe.. First, the rice crop is harvested. Then the rice plants are threshed to separate the grains from the straw. Next (after this) , the rice grains are husked in the mill to produce brown rice. After this, the bran is removed in the mortar and it is finally winnowed to produce white rice.. III- Consolidation: - Think of the inventions you know then work in pairs. Ask and answer about the inventions using the passive forms. - Call some pairs to practice - T corrects. IV- Homework: - Redo all the exercise at home - Guide Ss to do all the exercises in work book - Prepare for the test of the second term..

(289) Week : 35 Period: 104. Preparing day: Teaching day:. The second term examination A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to finish the test exactly. They will find out what they learnt well and what they forgot to build a plan to revise at home and to control their methods to learn better. B- Teaching aids: Test 45 minutes, papers and pens. C- Work arrangements: Individual D- Procedure: A- LISTENING (2 points) - Listen and choose the best answer. 1. Where do the Green family live? A. In a big town B. In a big city C. In a big village 2. How many sons do they have? A. One B. Two C. Three 3. Where did they go last summer? A. park B. beach C. mountain 4. How long did they stay? A. 2 days B. 2 weeks C. 2 months B- VOCABULAYRY - LANGUAGE FOCUS (3 points) I- Choose A, B, C or D to complete each of the following sentences. (2,0 pts) 1. Would you mind ______ off the TV? A. turn B. turning C. to turn D. turned 2. He told me how ______ English fluently. A. speak B. speaking C. to speak D. to speaking 3. The children said they _______ waiting for the school bus then. A. are B. were C. have D. can 4. I _______ here for 10 years. A. live B. am living C. lived D. have lived 5. Henry ________ his newspaper when John _______. A. was reading / came B. was reading / was coming.

(290) C. read / came D. read / was coming II. Rearrange the following words to make the meaningful sentences(1.0 pt) 1. he / finished / he / his homework / said / that. 2. built / this house / last / was / year. 3. asked / if / people / visited / many / me / everyday / Lan / Hanoi. 4. mind/ you/ closing/ would/ door/ the ? C- READING (3 points) - Read this passage carefully and answer the questions. THE GREAT WALL OF CHINA In China, there is a wall that is 1,500 miles long. It is called the Great Wall of China. It winds uphill and down, through valleys and mountains. It was made by hand. The Great Wall of China was built from 246 - 209 BC. The people of China made it to keep out their enemies. There are watch towers all along the way. The Wall is made of brick and earth. It is high and wide on top. People can walk along the top as if it were a road. 1. Is the Great Wall in China or Vietnam? 2. How long is it? 3. When was it built? 4. What is the Wall made of? 5. Is it wide and high on top ? D. WRITING (2 points) - Imagine you are a tourist on a vacation. Using the cues to write a letter to a friend about your trip. Dear Lan, 1. We / have / wonderful time / Ha Long Bay / last week. 2. It / be / about 70 km / Tu Ky town. 3. We / get / there / bus. 4. The sights / be / beautiful / and / magnificent. 5. The people here / be / friendly / hospitable / and / helpful. 6. The weather / be / sunny / and / windy. 7. We / be / really / happy now. 8. Write / me soon. Love, Mai Huong Question Key Point A 0.5 for Listening 1. B 2. A 3. C 4. B each (2 points) B I- 1. B 2. C 3. B 4. D 5. A 0.4 for Language each focus II- 1. He said that he finished his homework. 0.25 for (3 points) 2. This house was built last year. each 3. Lan asked me if many people visited Hanoi everyday. 4. Would you mind closing the door? C 1. The Great Wall/ It is in China. ( In China) 0.6 for Reading 2. It is 1,500 miles long. each (3 points) 3. The Great Wall of China / It was built from 246 - 209 BC..

(291) 4. The Wall/ It is made of brick and earth. 5. Yes, it is. D 1. We had a wonderful time in Ha Long Bay last week. Writing 2. It was about 70 km from Tu Ky town. (2 points) 3. We got there by bus. 4. The sights were beautiful and magnificent. 5. The people there were friendly, hospitable and helpful. 6. The weather was sunny and windy. 7. We are really happy now. 8. Write to me soon.. 0.25 for each. Tape script: Mr. and Mrs. Green live in a big city. Mr Green is a dentist. He works in a big hospital. Mrs. Green ia a teacher. She teaches near her house. They have a son and a girl. His name is Peter and her name is Mary. They are good children. Last summer they went on vacation in a small village in the mountain. They found a small house and they stayed there for two weeks. They visited a lot of beautiful places. Peter took a lot of photos and Mary draw some pictures of that village.. Week : 35 Period: 105. Preparing day: Teaching day:. Correcting test 45 minus A- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to find out what they learnt well and what they didn't learn well. Base on the result of the test. Ss will control their.

(292) methods to revise the old knowledge to remember it and to learn the new knowledge better. B. Correcting the test I. Yêu cầu HS xác định lại đề bài trong bài kiểm tra. II. Nhận xét: A. Ưu điểm: - HS làm bài và nộp bài đầy đủ, đúng thời gian quy định. - HS tập trung làm bài và có ý thức hoàn thành bài kiểm tra. - Có nhiều HS trình bày bài kiểm tra sạch sẽ, chữ viết đẹp. - Ở bài kiểm tra này học sinh đã xác định được đâu là câu hỏi dạng Y / N để trả lời đúng. - Một số học sinh có tinh thần học bài tốt nên bài làm đạt kết quả cao B. Nhược điểm: - Bên cạnh những HS viết chữ đẹp, trình bày bài kiểm tra sạch sẽ còn có nhiều HS viết chữ cẩu thả, trình bày kiểm tra luộm thuộm chủ yếu ở lớp 9B. - Còn nhiều HS không học bài kĩ trước khi làm bài kiểm tra nên làm bài sai và lạc đề. - Một số học sinh vẫn chưa biết cách trả lời trong dạng bài trả lời câu hỏi Yes - No chủ yếu là lớp 9B. - Các bạn lớp lớp B chưa có tinh thần tự giác làm bài, còn nhìn bài của nhau. C. Thông báo kết quả: - GV thông báo kết quả từ điểm cao xuống thấp theo số điểm bộ môn từ đó rút ra kinh nghiệm học bài và làm bài cho HS. Lớp <5 5-<8 8 - 10 Số lượng % Số lượng % Số lượng % 8A 8B D. Tuyên dương, phê bình: * Tuyên dương: GV tuyên dương những HS làm bài tốt, đạt điểm cao. * Phê bình: GV nhắc nhở phê bình những HS làm bài yếu kém. III. Chữa lỗi sai: I. Loại bài tập nghe hiểu: - Hầu hêt HS làm bài này tốt vì phù hợp với trình độ của các em. II. Loại bài đọc và trả lời câu hỏi. - Hầu hết HS lớp 8A đều làm được bài này vì các em đã xác định được đâu là câu hỏi dạng YES - NO, đâu là câu hỏi có từ để hỏi. - Lớp 8B vẫn còn hiện tượng HS nhầm lẫn giữa câu hỏi dạng Y –N với câu hỏi có từ để hỏi..

(293) Trả lời câu hỏi Yes / No khi mở đầu câu hỏi là Are / Is / Do / Does / Did / Have / Has. 1. Với động từ ToBe. Eg1. Are you a teacher? Yes, I am. / No, I am not. Eg2. Is he a good student? Yes, he is / No, he isn’t. 2. Với động từ thường. Eg3. Do you go to school by bike? Yes, I do. / No, I don’t. Eg4. Does Lan often get up very early in the morning? Yes, she does. / No, she doesn’t. Eg5. Did you watch TV last night? Yes, I did. / No, I didn’t. Eg6. Have you learned English for 5 years? Yes, I have. / No, I haven't. Eg7. Has the plug come out of the socket? Yes, it has. / No, it hasn't. Chú ý: Khi trả lời không phải lag câu hỏi Y / N ta phải chú ý: Thường thì trong câu hỏi có chứa các từ giống như trong câu trả lời vậy ta phải tìm ra sự lặp lại này để lấy câu trả lời. C. Bài tập củng cố: I. Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently from the others. 1. a. sunbathe b. taste c. water d. teammate 2. a. river b. pottery c. plumber d. fetch 3. a. husk b. urge c. rub d. jumble 4. a. council b. about c. without d. thrghout 5. a. design b. custom c. saint d. description II. Choose the word or phrase that best completes each unfinished sentence below or substitutes for the underlined word or phrase. 6. These computers are made_______Australia. a. in b. from c. of d. by 7. The —— festival is a festival in which people have their bulls fight against each other. a. whale watching b. bull-fighting c. mountain-climbing d. ice skating 8. The teacher told_____ us talk. a. not to b. not c. don’t d. didn’t 9. The -ing form of ‘sit’ was spelled a double t. a. with b. by c. without d. of 10. We used to go and fetch milk the farm. a. from b. at c. to d. in.

(294) 11. Jane had the waiter ____ her some tea. a. bring b. brings c. to bring d. brought 12. The fish has gone. a. has left b. has happened c. has moved d. has disappeared 13. James told me why he went home early two days _____. a. before b. ago c. following d. previous 14. The journey from the airport to the university about an hour and a half. a. spends b. takes c. want d. passes 15. Vietnam is a country that exports a lot of rice. a. sells and transports goods to another country b. buys goods from another country into one’s own country c. plants something in the ground and looks after it d. produces something III. Choose the words or phrases that are not correct in Standard English. 16. Vietnam’s New Year is officially know as Tet Nguyen Dan, or Tet. BC 17. Basil explained me that he was going to visit his aunt the next day. A B C D 18. I had the gardener planted some trees. A B C D 19. I have to fetch the children at school at 4 o’clock. A B C D 20. He has repeatedly urged the government doing something about this. A B C D IV. Choose the word (a, b, c, or d) that best fits each of the blank spaces. Tet is a national and (21) _____ festival in Vietnam. It is occasion for every Vietnamese to be reunited to think (22)____their past activities and hope for good luck (23)____the, year to come. Before Tet all houses are white washed and (24) _____with yellow apricot flowers and colorful lanterns. Everybody is looking (25)_______to a more favorable life. (26)_____ the New Year’s Eve, children are smartly dressed. They are hoping to (27) _____ money put in small red envelopes as they are wishing longevity to their grandparents and parents. Wrong doings (28)____be absolutely avoided on these days. 21. a. traditional b. modern c. music d. summer 22. a. about b. to c. after d. for 23. a. in b. at c. on d. when 24. a. decorate b. decorates c. decorating d. decorated 25. a: at b. for c. after d. forward 26. a. In b. At c. On d. When 27. a. receive b. buy c. sell d. make 28. a. should b. need c. ought d. have V. Read the following passage and choose the item (a, b, c, or d) that best answers each of the questions about it. Different cultures have different ways of celebrating the new year. Most of these customs are observed to bring good luck..

(295) On New Year’s Eve in Mexico, people wait for the clocks to strike midnight. At the first sound of the bells, people begin to eat grapes. They must eat 12 grapes before the bells ring 12 times. In the South of the United States, people eat black-eyed peis on New Year’s Day. Some people think you have to eat 365 peas to have good luck every day of the new year. In Greece, people throw old things such as plates, glasses, and even furniture out of the window on New Year’s Day. observe (v) tiến hành 29. What do they do on New Year’s Day in Mexico? a. They wait for the clocks to strike midnight. b. They eat grapes. c. They try to eat 12 grapes before the bells ring 12 times. d. no information 30. What do they do on New Year’s Day in the South of the United States? a. They eat black-eyed peas. b. They eat grapes. c. They throw old things out of the window. d. no information 31. What does the word ‘they’ in line 5 refer to? a. The American b. The Greek c. The Mexican d. The Vietnamese 32. What does ‘such as’ in line 9 mean? a. however b. for example c. instead of d. as soon as 33. Which of the following is not true? a. Different cultures have the same way of celebrating the new year. b. People believe that the customs will bring good luck. c. On New Year’s Eve, the Mexican begin to eat grapes at 12 p.m. d. In the South of the United States, people try to eat 365 black-eyed peas on New Year’s Day. C. Homework - Revise the knowledge you learnt not well at home. - Redo the exercise at home.

(296)

giao an tieng anh 8 ca nam

Tài liệu liên quan

Tài liệu bạn tìm kiếm đã sẵn sàng tải về